JP7318183B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while the display means such as a liquid crystal display device is performing a dynamic display (variable effect) of symbols and the like, a predetermined There are some cases where the dynamic display related to the incoming ball is withheld, with the number as the upper limit. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, the pattern is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is a technique in which a pseudo effect (a so-called “pseudo-continuous” effect) is executed as if a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2015-134027 A

However, in the conventional game machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the presentation cannot be unexpected. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means for shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means for allowing the game ball shot by the shooting means to enter, and a game ball by the shooting means. second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information at least by entering the ball into the first ball entering means; determination means capable of determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means; and dynamic display capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information performed on the first display means based on the determination result of the determination means. and execution means, capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, and a predetermined number of a storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second display means capable of displaying first effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means. and a second effect number information display means capable of displaying second effect number information different from the first effect number information on the second display means by a ball entering the second ball entering means, The dynamic display execution means causes the specific identification information to appear by stopping all of the identification information changed with the start of the dynamic display on the first display means, or to display the specific identification information. The sum of the first performance number information and the second performance number information and the gaming machine comprises execution time selection means capable of selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the execution time After the execution time selected by the selection means has elapsed, a post-elapsed change means capable of changing the form of the non-specific identification information appearing in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means; and the post-elapsed change means includes a first mode that changes the mode of the non-specific identification information that is displayed on the first display means, and a second mode that is different from the first mode on the first display means , and the result of the dynamic display based on the ball entering the first ball entering means can affect the ball entering the second ball entering means. .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is provided a shooting means for shooting a game ball, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and a game ball shot by the shooting means. is capable of entering a ball and is different from the first ball entering means; acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information by at least entering the ball into the first ball entering means; and dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information performed on the first display means based on the determination result of the determination means. wherein, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value can be given to the player, and a predetermined number is set as the upper limit, and the storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means; second display means capable of displaying first effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means; a second effect number information display means capable of displaying second effect number information different from the first effect number information on the second display means when a ball enters the ball entering means; and the dynamic display executing means. is that the specific identification information appears by stopping all of the identification information that has been changed with the start of the dynamic display on the first display means, or the predetermined identification information is different from the specific identification information The number of times corresponding to the total number of the first effect number information and the second effect number information to determine whether or not the non-specific identification information that cannot give a game value and whose mode can change after appearing will appear and the game machine includes execution time selection means capable of selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means, and execution time selection means selected by the execution time selection means. post-elapsed change means capable of changing the mode of the non-specific identification information that appears in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means after the execution time has elapsed, and The post-changing means performs a first mode of changing a mode of the non-specific identification information displayed on the first display means, and a second mode different from the first mode on the first display means. The ball entering the second ball entering means can be influenced by the result of the dynamic display based on the ball entering the first ball entering means. As a result, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be preferably improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternating distribution unit and the holding device as viewed from the front. FIG. 4A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit and the holding device taken along line AA in FIG. In b), when the holding device solenoid is driven from the state of (a), the ball held in the holding device is released from the holding state, and the ball flows down from the board surface return port to the dummy prize winning port. (c) shows a state in which the tip portion of the retaining device opening/closing plate tilts from the state of (b) toward the passage side of the sorting ball entrance, and the ball can be received into the retaining device. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet from the state of (c) is guided into the holding device by the holding device opening/closing body. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of a reservation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is , and a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table of the stop pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a change pattern table for losing; It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for big hits. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect time of each effect element of the variable effect or "slump effect" that is executed in each game situation. A timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation time and the extended time and the "slump effect", (a) showing the "slump effect" at the time of losing, (b) at the time of reach This shows a "slump effect". 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of an audio lamp control device and a display control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a pending change table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending display information storage area; FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a slump effect storage area; It is the figure which showed an example of the slump effect table typically. (a) is based on the start winning in the "slump state", the fluctuation time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when the variable effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired. (b) shows the variation time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when various reach variable effects are acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state". It is a timing chart shown. (a) is the variable time of the variable effect and the "slump effect" when the variable effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the starting prize during the "slump effect" other than the extended time; (b) is a timing chart showing the production time and (b) is the fluctuation time of the variable production when various reach variable productions are acquired based on the start winning during the "slump production" other than the extended time. 10 is a timing chart showing the performance time of the “slump performance” and the performance time of the “slump performance”. (a) is the variable time of the variable effect and the "slump effect" when the variable effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the start winning during the "slump effect" based on the extended time; (b) is a timing chart showing the production time and (b) is the variable time of the variable production when various reach variable productions are acquired based on the start winning during the "slump production" based on the extended time. 10 is a timing chart showing the performance time of the “slump performance” and the performance time of the “slump performance”. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending information storage area and an execution information storage area; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the holding|holding apparatus control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the dummy prize winning process which is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a hold display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing variation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the pattern setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a final setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation production|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and a state just before the development of the chance symbol appears. There is, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the "pseudo fluctuation" effect element in "gase pseudo-run 1" from the state of (a) is stopped, (c) is ) from the state of (c) to the state in which the pending symbol is shifted and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation", which is "gase pseudo-run 2", is executed; It is a diagram showing a state in which the false chance pattern is stopped in the "pseudo fluctuation" production element in the pseudo-continuation 2", and (e) shows a state in which the pending symbol is shifted from the state of (d) to "gase pseudo-continuation 3 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is executed, and (f) shows a false chance in the effect element of "pseudo-variation" in "gase pseudo-run 3" from the state of (e) It is a diagram showing a state in which the eye pattern has stopped and a series of "slump effects" have ended. (a) is a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is being executed in the variable effect or "slump effect" in the third pattern display device, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a state just before the development of the chance symbol appears, and (b) shows the state in which the first chance symbol appears in the “pseudo-fluctuation” effect element from the state of (a). (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of (b) is being executed, and (d) is a , (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element is executed from the state (c), and (e) is a diagram showing a state in which all FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which a “high-speed fluctuation (short)” production element in which the pattern fluctuates is being executed, and (f) shows that the reach formation pattern in the “pseudo-variation” production element from the state of (e) is It is the figure which showed the state just before appearing. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "first development propriety effect" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device; FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a state in which a "development availability effect" is being executed, and (c) is a diagram showing a state in which a "third development availability effect" is being executed from the state of (b). (a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is being executed in the "slump effect" of the third symbol display device, and shows a state just before the appearance of the chance symbol development symbol. (b) is a diagram showing the state of whether or not the chance symbol is stopped in the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram of (b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the gasechan eyes pattern appears in the "pseudo-variation" production element from the state of (d), the "pseudo-variation" production element ends from the state (c), It is a diagram showing a state in which it is suggested that the variation effect is terminated by the appearance of the false chance pattern, and (e) is a state in which the "third development propriety effect" is being executed from the state of (d). (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the "third development propriety effect" has successfully developed from the state of (e) and a chance symbol has appeared. (a) shows a state in which the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" is executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and a state in which the chance eye development symbol is stopped in the main display area. It is a figure, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the chance symbol has appeared in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of (a), (c) is again from the state of (b) After all the symbols have changed, the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element is executed, and the reach formation pattern is just before appearing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the reach formation pattern appears from the state, the sub display area and the cockpit display area are erased, and the reach formation pattern is enlarged, and (e) shows " It is the figure which showed the state where the production element of "Where is the reach?"

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 47, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

To the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (entering ball openings) 63, 65a, 77a, 78a, etc. is removably attached from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content of the advance notice display executed in the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable effect"). Also used as

Also, the variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, the left side special figure winning opening 77a or the right side special figure winning opening 78a (see FIGS. 3 and 4) is executed as a trigger, and the pattern (the third pattern described later) is changed for a predetermined time. After that, there is an effect of presenting to the player the result of the lottery (whether it is a big win or not) for the winning, depending on the combination of the stopped symbols.

Furthermore, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) to be described later are unified. Stage” and “Island Stage” are provided. Various effects such as the variable effects described above and the "ready-to-reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "ready-to-win display" means a display one step before the "big win display" indicating that a big win will occur in the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) continues to fluctuate without stopping. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "ready-to-win display" is roughly divided into one unit of elements that constitute the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit of elements that constitute the effect is referred to as "effect element"), It is developed and executed from the production element of "normal reach", and the production element of "super reach" having a higher expectation for a big hit than the production element of "normal reach" and the production element of "normal reach" are developed and executed, The production element of "Special Reach", which has a higher expectation of hitting the jackpot than the production element of "Super Reach", and the production element of "Pseudo Fluctuation" described later or the production element of "Development Possibility". Reach' production elements are provided.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the variable effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the effect element of "high-speed change" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed in the variable effect so that the player cannot see it. This is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 . Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed repeatedly in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

In addition, when the production element of "normal reach" is started in the variable production performed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the production element of "normal reach" to the production element of "super reach" or When developing into the effect element of "special reach", the selection screen of the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the effect element of "normal reach". It may be configured as

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, based on the production candidate selected when developing into the production element of "super reach" or the production element of "special reach", the production element of "super reach" or the production element of "special reach" is determined. , according to the determination, the effect element of "super reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as the effect element of "special reach".

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. It may be constituted by an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward and leftward. Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the production element of "super reach" or the production element of "special reach" may be determined.

In addition, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it is a position where the player can press it. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper tray 17 or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower tray 50 to be described later.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined "ready-to-win display" is performed, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") are provided on the periphery of the window part 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps. lights up or blinks to notify that the big win is in progress or that the "ready-to-win display" just before the big win is in progress. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") is applied to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 with chrome plating. .) A plating member 36 made of resin is attached.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51 is a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of , a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the period of pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer responsible for each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery A random number generator used for the system, a clock pulse generator circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13, and detailed configurations of the alternate allocation unit 71 and the holding device 73 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. , a variable winning device 65 that opens when a big hit of the third pattern occurs, a left special prize winning port 77a and a right special prize winning port 77a that triggers the lottery of the third Alternating distribution unit 71 having a figure winning opening 78a and a holding device 73 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) to be described later, a second ball entrance 67 serving as a second symbol lottery trigger, a third symbol display device 81, and A variable display device unit 80 and the like having a second pattern display device 83 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 .

The general prize winning port 63, the variable prize winning device 65, the alternate distribution unit 71, the second ball entrance 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a wood screw or the like from the front side of the . Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 3, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the central part (hereinafter, the act of shooting the ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as "right hitting". , the act of causing the shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as “left hitting”). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, while a ball can enter the alternate distribution unit 71, it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 67 and the variable winning device 65. . Also, in a right-handed game, while a ball can enter the second ball entrance 67 and the variable prize winning device 65 , it is difficult for a ball to enter the alternate distribution unit 71 . A specific configuration of the alternate distribution unit 71 will be described later.

Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 3). The first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol variably according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as "dynamic display"). is performed, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of balls (holding balls) for which dynamic display has not been executed among the balls that have won (entered) a left special prize opening 77a and a right special prize winning opening 78a, which will be described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot and an error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the LED 37a corresponding to the state. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit light of different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the colors of light, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. .

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two left and right 7-segment LEDs, and performs dynamic display showing the determination result of the first symbol. Specifically, the two 7-segment LEDs have a variable time (dynamic After dynamic display (in the first embodiment, one segment in the middle of the 7-segment LED alternately blinks) until the target display time) elapses, a pattern indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. When the judgment result is a loss, a "-" pattern is displayed in which only one segment in the center is illuminated, and when the judgment result is a big hit, "3" and "7" corresponding to the big hit are displayed. ” is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the ball entering the left special prize winning port 77a or the right special prize winning port 78a is judged to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, that Judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. As the jackpot types determined here, "15R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" are prepared.

Here, the "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "variable probability state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds. In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, the same odd-numbered symbols are stop-displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

"2R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a "variable probability state" after two rounds of jackpot. In the first embodiment, when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, the third symbol display device 81 stops displaying a predetermined third symbol combination (for example, "341").

``15R normal jackpot'' is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, the transition to the ``time shortened state'' is performed for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). That is. In the first embodiment, when the "15R normal jackpot" is won, the same even symbols are stop-displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81 respectively.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during a so-called probability change. That is. In the high probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the first embodiment, the probability of the variable display of the second symbol described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the second symbol is referred to as "variable display") is increased. The electric accessory 79 provided on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 71 is likely to be in an open state, and as a result, the ball is likely to enter the right special figure winning opening 78a in the alternate distribution unit 71. Including state.

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to the time of the low probability state that is not the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the jackpot probability is higher than the "probability fluctuation state". is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a state in which the jackpot probability is low as in the "normal game state", and only the probability of variable display of the second symbol is increased. Like "probability fluctuation state", it refers to a game state in which the electric accessory 79, which will be described later, is in an open state and the ball is likely to enter the right special figure winning opening 78a.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the variable display of the second symbol, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the electric accessory 79 attached to the right special prize winning opening 78a to open, may change the number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened. Specifically, in the "time reduction state", the time for the electric accessory 79 associated with the right special figure winning opening 78a to open is made longer than in the case other than the "time reduction state", or the electric The number of times the accessory 79 is opened may be increased compared to the case other than the "time reduction state". In addition, in the "shortened time state", at least two of the increase in the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol, the extension of the opening time of the electric accessory 79, and the increase in the number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened. You can do both at the same time.

At the lower central part of the game area, an alternate distribution unit 71 is arranged in which balls flowing down the game area can enter. This alternate sorting unit 71 mainly includes a sorting ball entrance 72 into which a ball flowing down the left side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view in the game area (that is, a ball in a left-handed game) can enter, A holding device 73 (see FIG. 4) in which a ball entered into the sorting ball entrance 72 (see FIG. 4) is entered and held, and a board surface return in which the ball held in the holding device 73 is discharged. An opening 74, a dummy prize winning opening 75 into which the balls discharged from the board surface return opening 74 can flow, and alternately sorting the balls that entered the sorting ball entrance 72 and did not enter the holding device 73. A sorting device 76 (see FIG. 4) that alternately sorts the left side path 77 or the right side path 78 (both see FIG. 4) in the unit 71, and the ball sorted to the left side path 77 by the sorting device 76 can enter. A left special figure winning opening 77a, a right special figure winning opening 78a into which the ball distributed to the right path 78 by the distribution device 76 can enter, and the electric accessory 79 described above.

When the ball enters the left special prize winning port 77a or the right special prize winning port 78a provided in the alternate distribution unit 71, a special prize winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. , the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) draws a jackpot for the first symbol due to the turn-on of the special figure winning opening switch, and the dynamic display of the first symbol according to the result of the lottery is the first symbol. It is indicated by the 7-segment display 37b of the display device 37, and the third pattern display device 81 executes the variation effect of the third pattern. The left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a are also one of the winning openings from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 of the first embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 as viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 4, for convenience of explanation, it is a composition in which the parts on the front side of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 are excluded, and is a schematic representation of the internal structure of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 The alternately distributing unit 71 and the holding device 73 are expressed in cross-sectional views, and each member (part) constituting them will be described.

As described above, the alternate sorting unit 71 includes the holding device 73 that holds the ball that entered the sorting ball entrance 72, and the sorting device that can sort the ball that has flowed down without being held by the holding device 73. A device 76 is provided. Balls held in the holding device 73 are configured to be able to enter a dummy prize winning port 75, and balls distributed by the sorting device 76 are allowed to enter a left special prize winning port 77a or a right special prize winning port 78a. It is configured.

The sorting ball inlet 72 of the alternate sorting unit 71 is a path through which a ball that is shot left-handed and flows down the game area flows into the alternate sorting unit 71, and the sorting ball enters. Balls that have flowed into the port 72 are configured to be guided to a retaining device 73 or a sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side (toward the bottom of the alternate sorting unit 71). It should be noted that the sorting ball entrance 72 is configured so that a right-handed ball that has passed through the game area will not flow into the ball.

The holding device 73 is a device for holding (reserving) only one ball that has flowed into the sorting ball entrance 72, and is downstream of the sorting ball entrance 72 and upstream of the sorting device 76. located in Balls flowing into the sorting ball entrance 72 are held by the holding device 73 before reaching the sorting device 76 if the balls are not held by the holding device 73, When the ball is held in the holding device 73, it passes through the front side of the holding device 73 and flows down to the sorting device 76, where the flowing direction is sorted by the sorting device 76. The ball held in the holding device 73 is ejected from the holding device 73 and flows out from the board surface return port 74 when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed). , flow into (win) a dummy prize winning port 75 provided directly below the board return port 74 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is designed so as not to fall into a situation where the variation effect of the third symbol is not executed (hereinafter referred to as "slump") as much as possible. (In the first embodiment, after the lapse of "5 seconds" or more after the stop of the variable production. Hereinafter, the situation is referred to as a "slump state.") From the first left special figure winning opening 77a or When the variable performance of the third pattern is executed based on the winning to the right special figure winning opening 78a, the performance of the time (period) longer than the execution time of the acquired variable performance, and the acquired variable performance The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute an effect element (hereinafter referred to as "slump effect") with a greater number of times of execution than the number of times of execution. By constructing in this way, the performance time performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened and the number of performance times is increased, thereby reducing the situation where the performance is not performed by the third pattern display device 81, It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In this case, the number of times of execution of the variable effect corresponding to the acquired starting prize (hereinafter referred to as “slump effect”), which is the effect that constitutes the fluctuation stop (pseudo stop) from the start of the fluctuation of the third symbol Including), the unit of production composed of a combination of multiple production elements may be referred to as a "production unit"). It is necessary to display a dummy hold display in a cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, to give the player the illusion that a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, in order to create the above situation, the balls held in the holding device 73 at the timing before the execution of the "slump effect" are alternately distributed units having a left special figure winning opening 77a and a right special figure winning opening 78a. A dummy winning opening 75 provided in 71 is made to win, and based on the winning, the dummy pending display is the actual variable performance pending display (hereinafter, the actual variable performance pending display may be referred to as "main pending display"). Yes) is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. By causing the dummy pending display to disappear when the additionally executed "slump effect" is executed, the player can be given the illusion that the variable effect is being executed.

It should be noted that, like the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" to be described later, a method of executing a plurality of effects in the variable effect corresponding to one main reservation display is also conceivable. When you see the effect element of "pseudo-variation" that is executed when there are few on-hold displays, you will guess that "the time of the variable effect is forcibly lengthened", and rather it is a factor that makes you lose interest in the game. It's becoming Therefore, by executing the "slump effect" with the appearance and disappearance of the dummy pending display as in the first embodiment, by executing the effect as if the variable effect is being executed, it is possible to simply change the effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by making it difficult to guess that the performance time is extended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the operation mode of the holding device 73 and the behavior of the balls when the balls are flowed into, held (stored), and discharged from the holding device 73 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the retaining device 73 taken along line AA in FIG. 4 as viewed from the side, and FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram showing the state, and FIG. 5B shows that the ball held in the holding device 73 is released from the board return port 74 by the holding device solenoid 73f being energized from the state of FIG. 5A. It is a diagram showing a state in which the ball is discharged and flows down to the dummy winning opening 75, and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which a ball can be received into the holding device 73 by tilting to the side (front side of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a state in which a ball that has flowed into a mouth 72 is guided into a holding device 73 by a holding device opening/closing plate 73a; FIG. When the state shown in FIG. 5(d) is reached, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 5(a) again, so the states shown in FIGS. .

First, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the holding device 73 mainly includes a holding device opening/closing plate 73a, a holding ball holding portion 73b, a rotating shaft portion 73c, a rear wall 73d, a locking piece 73e, It is composed of a holding device solenoid 73f and a holding ball detection switch 73g. Each of the above configurations will be described below with reference to the movement of each configuration shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d).

The holding device opening/closing plate 73a, the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the rotating shaft portion 73c are integrally formed so that the holding device opening/closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are perpendicular to each other in an L shape. A rotating shaft portion 73c is arranged at a connecting portion (a corner position of the L shape) between the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a and the retaining ball retaining portion 73b. The holding device opening/closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are configured to be rotatable in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the rotating shaft portion 73c.

FIG. 5( a ) shows a state in which one ball is held in the holding device 73 . In this state, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (that is, OFF), and the holding portion locking portion 73e1 and the opening/closing plate push-out portion 73e2 provided on the lock piece 73e connected to the holding device solenoid 73f are both rearward. It is in a state of protruding from the wall 73d (hereinafter, the state in which the locking piece 73e (holding portion locking portion 73e1 and opening/closing plate push-out portion 73e2) protrudes from the rear wall 73d is referred to as "initial position"). In addition, when the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the movement of the lock piece 73e is restricted by the retaining device solenoid 73f.

The retained ball holding portion 73b is a portion for retaining the ball in the retaining device 73 when the ball flows into the retaining device 73. As shown in FIG. When a ball flows into the holding device 73 in a state in which the tip side of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted toward the passage side of the sorting ball entrance 72 (that is, the holding device 73 is open), When the device solenoid 73f is in a non-driven state and the holding portion lock portion 73e1 is at the initial position, the ball is held on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the holding state is maintained by the holding device solenoid 73f.

Specifically, when a ball is placed on the ball holding portion 73b, the ball holding portion 73b rotates due to the weight of the ball. It abuts on the upper surface of the portion 73e1, and the downward rotation of the retaining ball holding portion 73b is restricted by the holding portion locking portion 73e1. That is, the holding ball holding portion 73b is pressed downward by the weight of the ball placed on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b in a state in which downward rotation is restricted by the holding portion lock portion 73e1. The holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state, and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a integrally formed with the holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in an upright state. As a result, the state in which the ball is housed in the space formed by the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a, the upper surface of the retaining ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained. At the same time, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is maintained in an upright state, and the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball inlet 72 flows into the sorting device 76 provided downstream.

At this time, a held ball detection switch 73g arranged in the holding device 73 detects that the ball is held in the holding device 73 . This holding ball detection switch 73g detects the presence of a ball between a light emitting element and a light receiving element (both not shown) by blocking the space between the light emitting element and the light emitting element. The main control, which will be described later, is electrically connected to the holding ball detection switch 73g, which is composed of an optical detection switch that detects the absence of a ball between the light receiving element and the light emitting element by not blocking the light receiving element. Detection information of the held ball detection switch 73 g is output to the device 110 . Note that the held ball detection switch 73g is not limited to an optical type, and other well-known sensors such as microswitches can be used.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is shipped from the factory with one ball held in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10 . The lock piece 73e is configured so that the holding portion lock portion 73e1 is located at a position that restricts the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b when the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (that is, OFF). ing. Further, even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned sideways or upside down, the lock piece 73e maintains the state in which the ball is held by the reserved ball holding portion 73b. By constructing in this manner, the state in which the balls are held in the holding device 73 is maintained regardless of the orientation of the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 is transported from the time of shipment from the factory to the time of installation in the hall. can do. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the hall, the first ball entering the alternate distribution unit 71 is not held in the holding device 73, and wins the left special prize winning port 77a or the right special prize winning port 78a. can be made Therefore, when a game is played for the first time on the pachinko machine 10, when the ball is made to flow into the alternate distribution unit 71, it is possible for the player to receive the lottery for the third symbol (first symbol) without fail. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, the first effect unit in the "slump effect" (hereinafter referred to as "first effect") is executed, and six seconds have elapsed. ), the holding device solenoid 73f is energized (that is, turned on) for a predetermined time ("2000 ms" in the first embodiment), the lock piece 73e moves toward the holding device solenoid 73f side, and the holding portion lock portion Both the 73e1 and the opening/closing plate push-out portion 73e2 are recessed into the rear wall 73d. In this way, when the retaining device solenoid 73f is energized, the retaining portion locking portion 73e1, which has restricted the downward rotation of the retaining ball retaining portion 73b until then, sinks into the rear wall 73d, thereby The holding portion 73b rotates downward due to the weight of the ball. Then, the ball held in the reserved ball holding portion 73b flows downward, is discharged from the board face return port 74 to the front side of the game board 13, and flows into the dummy prize winning port 75 as it is. That is, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to enter the dummy winning hole 75 by energizing (driving) the holding device solenoid 73f.

By constructing in this way, the ball held in the holding device 73 can be surely won into the dummy winning hole 75, and the left side special prize winning can be prevented by the player who does not understand the details of the dummy winning hole 75.例文帳に追加By entering the ball into the dummy winning hole 75 arranged between the hole 77a and the right special prize winning hole 78a, it is possible to create the illusion that the starting prize of the third pattern (first pattern) has been won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(c), when the holding device solenoid 73f changes from the excited state to the non-excited state, both the holding portion lock portion 73e1 and the opening/closing plate push-out portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e move from the rear wall 73d. It will protrude again. At this time, the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e collides with the tip portion of the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a, and the momentum of the collision pushes the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a toward the front side passage wall 72a of the sorting ball entrance 72. rotated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(d), the retainer opening/closing plate 73a that collides with the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 in the state of FIG. The front passage wall 72a collides with the distal end portion (inclined surface at the distal end) of the retainer opening/closing plate 73a. Since the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is heavier than the holding device opening/closing plate 73b, the weight of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a pushes the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the distribution input). The tilted state toward the front side passage wall 72a side of the ball opening 72 is maintained. Therefore, when no ball is placed on the holding ball holding portion 73b, the tilting state of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is maintained, and the ball flowing into the sorting ball entrance 72 can be received in the holding device 73. state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “acceptable state”).

Here, the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is formed to have a sharp inclined surface, and when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a tilts toward the front passage wall 72a, the inclined surface vibrates. It is configured to come into surface contact with the front side passage wall 72a of the diversion ball opening 72 . With this configuration, when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a can be tilted further toward the front side passage wall 72a of the sorting ball entrance 72. can be reliably guided into the retaining device 73.

In addition, the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball entrance 72 is made less likely to collide with the upper surface of the tip portion of the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a (the portion that abuts the wall surface of the sorting ball entrance 72). By constructing it so as to collide with the inclined surface on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the upper right surface of the inclined holding device opening and closing plate 73a), the impact due to the ball's own weight can be parried by the inclined surface. It is possible to mitigate the impact when the ball collides with the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a, thereby preventing the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a from being damaged.

When a ball flows into the sorting ball entrance 72 while the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is in an acceptable state, the ball collides with the holding device opening/closing plate 73a and flows down toward the holding device 73 side. . Then, the ball collides with the upper surface of the ball holding portion 73b, and the weight of the ball rotates the ball holding portion 73b downward around the rotating shaft portion 73c. At this time, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state and the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, so that the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b and the upper surface of the holding portion locking portion 73e1 come into contact with each other. , the downward rotation of the reserved ball holding portion 73b is restricted. By being pressed downward by the weight of the ball placed on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state and formed integrally with the holding ball holding portion 73b. The upright state of the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a is also maintained. As a result, the state in which the ball is housed in the space formed by the upper surface of the retained ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained (FIG. 5A). reference).

In this way, only one ball that has flowed into the sorting ball entrance 72 is held by the holding device 73, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed), , the held ball is discharged from the holding device 73 and entered into the dummy prize winning port 75. - 特許庁Then, based on the winning, the dummy pending display is displayed in the same display as the main pending display, and the second performance unit in the additionally executed "slump effect" (hereinafter, n (n is a natural number) in the "slump effect" ) th production unit is called “nth production”) (at the start of execution of the 1st production element. However, “pseudo-continuation” production and “development possibility” production are excluded.) By making the display disappear, it is possible to make the player feel as if the variable performance is being executed.

In addition, when a plurality of balls continuously flow into the sorting ball entrance 72 and flow into the holding device 73 in a state in which the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted (that is, in an acceptable state), Only one ball may be retained, and a discharge path may be provided for discharging the subsequent balls. With this configuration, only one ball can be reserved in the holding device 73 without fail, and only one ball can be flowed into the dummy winning opening 75 at the time of the "slump production", and the content of the production can be varied. It is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring.

In addition, the members constituting the alternate distribution unit 71 may be made of a transparent or translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, etc.), and the members constituting the holding device 73 may also be made of a transparent or translucent material. . With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the flowing state of the balls flowing into the alternate distribution unit 71 and grasp the winning openings 77a and 78a into which the balls flow, and the balls are held in the holding device 73. It is possible to visually check whether or not it is done.

Furthermore, the holding device 73 is arranged upstream from the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a in the alternate distribution unit 71 (that is, between the distribution entrance 72 and the distribution device 76). However, instead of this, it may be arranged downstream of the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a. Then, by holding the balls that have won the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a in the holding device 73, the ball that has entered the alternate distribution unit 71 can be placed in one of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. It is possible to cause the ball to be held in the holding device 73 while making the player win the prize and surely obtaining the lottery opportunity of the first symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the lottery for the first symbol cannot be received even though a ball has entered the alternate distribution unit 71.例文帳に追加In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is a so-called out ball. Therefore, even if the ball flowing down from the holding device 73 enters the dummy winning hole 75, prize balls or the like may not be paid out. preferred.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description is continued. The sorting device 76 of the alternate sorting unit 71 alternately sorts the balls that have flowed down from the sorting ball entrance 72 and have not flowed into the holding device 73 to the left path 77 or the right path 78, as described above. A rotating shaft portion 76a, a central plate portion 76b extending upward from the outer circumference of the rotating shaft portion 76a, and a left side bearing extending leftward and rightward from the outer circumference of the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is composed of a plate 76c, a right receiving plate 76d, and a distribution side magnet (not shown) incorporated in the central plate portion 76b. In addition, on the wall of the alternate distribution unit 71 on the back side of the game board 13, there is a unit-side magnet ( not shown) are built in.

This sorting device 76 is configured to be rotatable by 30 degrees to the left and right around a rotating shaft portion 76a. In the state of FIG. , the entire left receiving plate 76c is positioned below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is positioned above the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is in a state of guiding the falling ball to the right path 78 . The right guiding position is maintained by the repulsive action between the distribution side magnet and the unit side magnet.

Here, a manner in which a ball that hits the alternate distribution unit 71 is alternately distributed to the left path 77 or the right path 78 by the distribution device 76 will be described. First, as in the state of FIG. 4, the tip side of the left receiving plate 76c contacts the wall portion of the alternately distributing unit 71, and the entire left receiving plate 76c is located below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is located above the rotating shaft portion 76a, the ball that enters the alternate sorting unit 71 and flows down from the sorting ball entrance 72 is placed on the central plate portion 76b and the right receiving plate 76d of the sorting device 76. fits in the space formed by By pushing down the right receiving plate 76d due to the weight of the ball, the entire sorting device 76 rotates, and the tip side of the right receiving plate 76d comes into contact with the wall of the alternating sorting unit 71, and the entire right receiving plate 76d is pushed down. The left receiving plate 76c is located below the rotating shaft portion 76a and above the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the sorting device 76 is in a state in which the ball can flow down to the right path 78 side, and in this state the ball is guided to the right path 78 by rolling on the upper surface of the right receiving plate 76d.

At this time, rather than the repulsive force between the sorting-side magnet (not shown) and the unit-side magnet (not shown), the weight of the ball pushes down the right receiving plate 76d (rotates the entire sorting device 76). is larger, the sorting device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left side receiving plate 76c is positioned above the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d is positioned below the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the state of the left guiding position. maintained.

Then, the next ball entering the alternate sorting unit 71 and flowing down from the sorting ball entrance 72 is accommodated in the space formed by the central plate portion 76b and the left receiving plate 76c of the sorting device 76. FIG. Then, the distribution device 76 rotates by pushing down the left receiving plate 76c by the self weight of the ball, and the tip side of the left receiving plate 76c contacts the wall of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire left receiving plate 76c rotates. The right receiving plate 76d is located below the shaft portion 76a and above the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the sorting device 76 is in a state in which the ball can flow down to the left path 77 side, and in this state the ball is guided to the left path 77 by rolling on the upper surface of the left receiving plate 76c.

At this time as well, the weight of the ball pushes down the left receiving plate 76c rather than the repulsive force between the sorting-side magnet (not shown) and the unit-side magnet (not shown) (rotating the entire sorting device 76). Since the force is larger, the sorting device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left side receiving plate 76c is positioned below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d is positioned above the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the state of the right guiding position. maintained. By alternately repeating these motions, the ball hitting the alternate sorting unit 71 is alternately sorted to the left path 77 and the right path 78 .

The left path 77 of the alternately sorting unit 71 is a path along which the balls guided to the left side in the alternately sorting unit 71 by the sorting device 76 flow down. Below the left side of the left path 77, there is provided a left exit through which balls flowing down the left path 77 flow out, and a left special prize winning opening 77a is provided below the left exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the left path 77 flows down the left path 77, is discharged from the left exit, and is configured to enter the left special figure winning opening 77a.

The right side path 78 of the alternately sorting unit 71 is a path along which the balls guided to the right side in the alternately sorting unit 71 by the sorting device 76 flow down. Below the right side of the right path 78, there is provided a right exit through which balls flowing down the right path 78 flow out, and a right special prize winning opening 78a is provided below the right exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the right path 78 flows down the inside of the right path 78, is discharged from the right exit, and is configured to enter the right special prize winning opening 78a.

By configuring the alternate distribution unit 71 in this way, the ball entered in the alternate distribution unit 71 can be alternately distributed to the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special figure winning opening 78a. It is possible to avoid a state in which the player continues to win a fixed prize in the prize winning opening, and to diversify the ball entering patterns of the prize winning openings 77a and 78a.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description is continued. A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the alternate distribution unit 71 in front view, and a horizontally long rectangular big prize winning opening 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) results in a big win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stops. Thus, the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the opening/closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball easily enters the big prize winning opening 65a. As this special game state, the normally closed big winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses, or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player receives a larger amount than usual as a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

A second ball entrance 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 in a front view and on the right side of the variable display unit 80 described later in a front view. The second ball inlet 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which the ball passes. When the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, a second symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 changes the second symbol variable display due to the turning on. A raffle will be held. It should be noted that this second ball entrance 67 only serves as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is constructed so that prize balls or the like are not paid out even when a ball passes through.

On the downstream side of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 71, an electric accessory 79 is arranged. The electric accessory 79 is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

The main controller 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 in an upright state and closes the right special figure winning opening 78a. When a prize is won, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 is moved to the right from the upright position by a predetermined angle (for example, , 45 degrees) is driven to a tilted open state (tilted state), the right special figure winning opening 78a is opened, and the ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win the right special figure winning opening 78a. .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a win in the variable display of the second symbols changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and by making it difficult to win in the variable display of the second symbol, the electric accessory The rotating plate of 79 is made difficult to be in an open state (tilted state), and it is configured so as to make it difficult to win the right special figure prize winning port 78a. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of the second symbol, The rotation plate of the electric accessory 79 is made easy to be in an open state (tilted state), and it is configured so as to easily win a prize to the right special figure prize winning port 78a.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Also, as described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. In the variable display device unit 80, the entry of the ball into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for effecting pattern variation, and a second pattern variably displayed using the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 as a trigger. A second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later. are displayed.

Each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of patterns, and these patterns are vertically scrolled for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110, whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the game state. The third pattern of the third pattern display device 81 is used to perform a decorative display according to the condition. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.6(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a back pattern made of a wooden box and a number from "0" to "9". The main design with "9") has a large number on the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) have characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. almost all over the front of the wooden box. An imitation accessory pattern is added, and an even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern so as to be displayed in green and small and on the front side of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the first symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) to be described later is a big hit, a variable effect is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , is configured to generate a jackpot after the variable performance is completed. After the jackpot is over, the transition to the "probability fluctuation state (variable state)" and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpot are given, the main pattern with an odd number (equivalent to "variable pattern") is aligned. will be On the other hand, when shifting to the "time reduction state" after the end of the jackpot, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "time reduction design") to which even numbers are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three vertically, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm for varying the third symbol. A cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of balls and the like, and the other upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform a variable performance. It should be noted that the arrangement of numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the left symbol row Z1 may be arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, while the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "big winning display") is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, while the variation effect (dynamic display) or "slump effect" of the third symbol (first symbol) is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball moves to the left side. When the ball enters the special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, the number of times of entering (the number of reserved balls) is displayed up to four times. Similarly, when the ball enters the dummy winning hole 75 while the variation effect or the "slump effect" of the third symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters (dummy reserved ball number) is displayed at most once. That is, when the ball enters the left side special figure winning opening 77a, the right side special figure winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75 while the variation production or "slump production" of the third symbol is being performed, The number of balls (the number of held balls) is displayed as a main reservation display and a dummy reservation display up to a maximum of 5. In this case, the player can recognize the presence of the dummy hold display.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of times a ball enters the left special symbol winning opening 77a or the right special winning opening 78a, which triggers the lottery of the third symbol (first symbol), is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. It is configured to be displayed as a real reservation display, and together with or independently of the main reservation display, the number of times a ball enters the dummy winning opening 75 is displayed in the cockpit display area Db as a dummy reservation display. . In addition, by displaying the main reservation display based on the ball entering the left special prize winning opening 77a or the right special prize winning opening 78a and the dummy reservation display based on the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75 in the same manner, They are configured so that they cannot be sharply distinguished from each other. Then, based on the main suspension display and the dummy suspension display displayed in the cockpit display area Db, in the third symbol display device 81, either the conventional fluctuation production or the "slump production" executed when the fluctuation production is interrupted. or is configured to run.

Conventionally, when the ball does not win the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a for a long time, a "slump state" occurs in which the variable effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81. The player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player because the variation performance is not performed in the third pattern display device 81 even though the player is playing the game by shooting the ball. I can't do it, and I lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. However, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is judged to be a platform from which it is difficult to obtain a game value, and the pachinko machine 10 stops playing, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once falling into a "slump state", the ball enters the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a after that, and the variable effect is executed for the first time. When it is done, in the third pattern display device 81, instead of the normal variation performance, a "slump performance" is performed for a longer time than the execution time of the acquired variation performance, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81. The performance time is configured to be longer than the normal variable performance execution time. In addition, along with the execution of the "slump effect", the dummy hold display is displayed in the same manner as the actual main hold display based on the winning to the dummy winning hole 75, and the effect of 1 of the "slump effect" is displayed. When the unit is executed, it consumes (clears) the dummy pending indication.

By configuring in this way, by entering the ball into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, the effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is a regular variable effect or a "slump" While making it difficult to distinguish whether it is a "performance", the "slump performance" executed by the third pattern display device 81 can make the performance time performed in the third pattern display device 81 longer than the actual time of the variable performance. can. Therefore, the performance time of the performance in the third pattern display device 81 can be lengthened, and the interest of the game can be improved without letting the player lose interest.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the number of pending balls in the variable effect of the third symbol (first symbol) is accurately displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the variable effect of the third symbol and the " The number of reserved balls with "slump effect" is shown in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 provided in the cockpit display area Db. In the first to fifth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db5, one real reserved display and dummy reserved display (in the normal display mode, "○" pattern (white circle pattern) per one ball held (one ball held) .) are displayed respectively, and the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are displayed. Depending on the number, the number of pending balls of variable effect and "slump effect" is displayed.

That is, in the first to fifth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db5, when one reserved design is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1, the number of reserved balls of the variable production and "slump production" is 1 time , and when a total of two reserved patterns are displayed, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display areas Db1 and Db2, the number of reserved balls of the variable production and the "slump production" is two times , and when a total of three reserved patterns are displayed one each in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db3, the number of reserved balls of the variable production and "slump production" is three times , and when a total of four reserved patterns are displayed, one each in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4, the number of reserved balls in the variable production and "slump production" is 4 times , and when a total of five reserved patterns are displayed one each in the first to fifth reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of reserved balls of the variable production and "slump production" is five times indicates that Also, when the reserved design is not displayed in the first to fifth reserved design display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of reserved balls of the variable production and the "slump production" is 0 times and the suspended variable production and " Indicates that there is no slump effect.

Further, in the left part of the cockpit display area Db, an execution pattern display is displayed in which a pattern (hereinafter referred to as an "execution pattern") indicating that the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. A region Db0 is provided. The executed symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to display executed symbols larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. In addition, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 are moved (shifted. Hereinafter, the movement display of the reserved symbols may be referred to as "shift display"). Then, it is displayed as an execution pattern.

The execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 are erased when one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is completed, and with the erasure of the execution symbols, the displayed reserved symbols are on the lower side ( Left side) is moved and displayed as a reserved design. Specifically, when the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased with the end of one production unit of the variable production or the "slump production", it is displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1. The suspended symbol that was being played is moved (shifted) and displayed as an executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the first reserved design display area Db1. Further, the reserved design displayed in the third reserved design display area Db3 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the second reserved design display area Db2. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fourth reserved design display area Db4 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the third reserved design display area Db3. Further, the reserved design displayed in the fifth reserved design display area Db5 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved design in the fourth reserved design display area Db4.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution pattern is continuously displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 ”, excluding the production element of “Special Reach” or the production element of “Which Reach”). On the other hand, when one production unit of the variable production or "slump production" is completed, or during execution of the production element of "super reach", the production element of "special reach" or the production element of "Which reach" In this case, the executed symbols are deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display region Db0, it indicates that one performance unit of the variable performance or the "slump performance" is being executed (continued) in the main display region Dm, When no executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, one effect unit of the variable effect or "slump effect" is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or "super reach". , the effect element of "special reach" or the effect element of "Which reach" is being executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "holding change notice" can be executed by using the holding pattern and the execution pattern displayed in the cockpit display region Db. This "suspended change notice" means that the variation performance executed in the main display area Dm or the jackpot expectation level of one performance unit of the "slump performance" is This is an advance notice that is suggested by changing the display colors of the pending symbols and the executed symbols in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the performance unit to during the execution.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display colors of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of "white" to the blue display mode of "blue" and green as the "suspension change notice". It is configured to be changeable to "green" in the mode or "red" in the red display mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when the "jackpot display" or the "ready-to-win display" occurs in one performance unit of the variable performance or the "slump performance", the display colors of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are changed. Since the selection ratio is configured to be different, the display color of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is changed from the normal display mode ("white") to another display mode (for example, "blue"). It is possible to suggest to the player for each display color the possibility of occurrence of "reach display" or "jackpot display" in the variable performance indicated by the reserved pattern and the execution pattern, or in one performance unit of the "slump performance". can.

Specifically, in the "reserved change notice", when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the fluctuation indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern A ratio of "ready-to-win display" or "jackpot display" is set to be high in one effect unit of the effect or "slump effect". In addition, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "green" rather than "blue", "reach display" or "jackpot display" in the variable effect or "slump effect" indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern is set high. Furthermore, when the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are in the display mode of "red" rather than "green", "reach display" in one production unit of the variable production or "slump production" indicated by the reserved pattern and the executed pattern And the percentage of “jackpot display” is set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved design and the execution design is "green" or "red", the "normal reach" (the main performance mode is called "performance mode"), the "super reach" performance mode, or the "special reach" performance mode is determined.

It should be noted that, due to this "suspension change notice", in the state in which the display mode of the pending design has changed, when the pending design shifts with the execution (digestion) of one production unit of the variable production or "slump production", that It is configured such that the changed display mode of the reserved pattern is taken over (inherited) and reflected in the reserved pattern or the execution pattern of the shift destination. That is, when the display mode of the reserved design changes, the changed reserved design is displayed in the other reserved design display areas Db1 to Db4 or the execution design display area Db0 along with the execution of one performance unit of the variable performance or "slump performance" Also when shifting to , the display mode before the shift is maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved design changes to "red" in the fifth reserved design display area Db5, the reserved design changes from the fourth reserved design display area Db4 to the third reserved design display area Db3 to the second reserved design. When shifting from the display area Db2→first reserved symbol display area Db1→executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or executed symbol is continuously displayed.

In the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable effect based on the ball entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a is configured to be reserved up to four times. The number of held balls is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, the number of reserved balls corresponding to one performance unit of the "slump effect" based on the ball entering the dummy winning hole 75 is configured to be reserved up to one time, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to one time. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 2 or more times (for example, 4 times). Furthermore, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the five divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁It should be noted that, if the third symbol display device 81 does not display information about the number of pending balls (such as pending symbols), it is not possible to execute the "suspended change notice" by the pending symbols. It may be constructed such that by making it appear, a pre-reading notice similar to the "pending change notice" is executed.

Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with five holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number of the variable effect and "slump effect", and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. It may be assumed that Alternatively, one of the executed symbols and the reserved symbols may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the other of the executed symbols and the reserved symbols may be displayed by a reserved lamp other than the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that, when configured to display the number of pending balls by the pending lamp, by providing a plurality of types of display colors for the pending lamp, it is of course possible to execute a pre-reading notice similar to the "holding change notice" of the first embodiment. is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is, as described above, the left special prize winning port 77a, the right special prize winning port 78a, or the ball entered in the dummy prize winning port 75, which is one effect unit of the variable effect and the "slump effect". is an area for displaying reserved patterns indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been executed, and execution patterns related to one performance unit of the variable performance or "slump performance" being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice pattern is displayed, and the variable effect or "slump effect" performed in the main display area Dm is performed in units of 1 more than usual. It is suggested to the player that the state is likely to transition to a big win.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the small central area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and the variable effect or effect performed in the main display area Dm Based on the "slump effect", a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, and the color of the headband, which is usually white, change, and another character appears. And so on, a preview performance is performed.

Further, in the sub display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level indicating step by step whether or not a big hit will occur in one stage unit of the variable effect or "slump effect" performed in the main display area Dm. A meter (not shown) appears and is displayed. This level meter is a "ready-to-reach display" in one production unit of the variable production or "slump production" being executed based on the appearance of the advance notice pattern etc. in one production unit of the fluctuation production or "slump production". is increased (added) each time the degree of expectation for the occurrence of . Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "ready-to-reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the display symbol (second symbol (normal symbol)) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67. It provides a variable display that allows In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in the first embodiment), the electric accessory 79 is in an operating state for a period of time corresponding to the game state. (the rotary plate is rotated (tilted)).

The number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp 84 provided on the center frame 86 . Four second design reserve lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and are arranged below the third design display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the first embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the passage of the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as with the left special prize winning opening 77a or the right special prize winning opening 78a, It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 71 in front view (below the second ball entrance 67 in front view), and a horizontally long rectangular large prize winning opening (large open opening) ) 65a are provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the big win is won. The 7-segment display 37b of the first pattern display device 37 is lighted to display the stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. In this special game state, when a big win occurs as a result of the lottery in the first symbol, the big winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds" elapses, or until the ball is (Until 10 prizes are won) will be released.

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player receives a larger amount than usual as a game value (game value). Prize balls are paid out.

The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. . The big winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win based on the lottery game of the first pattern, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the front lower side, and the right-hand shot ball is opened to easily enter the big winning opening 65a. A state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

That is, when hitting right in the "probability fluctuation state", or when hitting right in the "time shortening state", the ball enters the right special figure winning opening 78a that is easier to enter by the electric accessory 79, and the entering When a big win is won in the lottery game of the first symbol based on the ball, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and then the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" is entered again. It is configured so that subsequent games can be played while the beating game is continued.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the big winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the 7-segment display 37b corresponding to the big win in the first pattern display device 37 lights up, the big winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the big winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the big winning opening 65a while the big winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a special game state.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not enter any of the prize winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 65a, 75, 77a and 78a are guided through an out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. A random access memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing a program, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 sets the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display and the variable effect or the "slump effect" in the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the display result of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203b that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Also, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a variation pattern table 202e. Main controller 110 executes the main control described above by various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., set the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the variable effect or "slump effect" setting of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the second symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to draw a lottery for the display results of . Further, in the description of various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15. FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect or "slump effect" of the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type of the jackpot pattern, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting a variable performance or a "slump performance" performance mode, and an initial value setting for the jackpot random number counter C1. 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

A winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first symbol. Figure winning opening 77a or right special winning opening 78a (hereinafter, left special winning opening 77a and right special winning opening 78a may be collectively referred to as "special winning openings 77a and 78a") Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the ball timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, "0 to 899"), and reaches the maximum value (eg, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). It is configured to return to "0" after reaching. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from "0 to 899". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning), the jackpot random number counter is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Stored in area 203c1.

The value of the random number at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserve area. If the value of C1 coincides with the value of the random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 9(a). FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. FIG. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state of the first symbol, i.e., the "normal game state" or the "shortened time state" (the period in which the "probability fluctuation state" is not applied). A high probability used for the low probability state and when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of the first symbol having a higher probability of winning a big hit than the low probability state, ie, a ``variable probability state (variable probability)''. It is divided into two types, one for status and the other for status. The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (jackpot random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the case of the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" or "time reduction state") is set to 3/900=1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that will be a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 9, and the values "28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866" are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the high-probability state (that is, "variable probability state") is set to 9/900=1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so as not to overlap each other. is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state or a low-probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that becomes , fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot. in the case of a counter that can take the value of ", it returns to "0" after reaching "99").

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning), it is the same as the holding area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 of the reservation area.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of losing. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number that makes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation performance are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of "0-99". Based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202, the jackpot type is determined.

Here, with reference to FIG.9(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first symbols stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the probability of the jackpot is high. "15R normal jackpot" in which the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state later, and shifts to "time reduction state" during 100 fluctuation times, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variable jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "15R jackpot common".

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 9 (b), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the "15R probability variable jackpot", and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 "40 to 40" is associated with the "2R probability variable jackpot". 59” is associated, and the value “60 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “15R normal jackpot”.

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "50", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "90", "15R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the "15R variable jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%, the "2R variable jackpot" is selected with a probability of 20%, and the "15R variable jackpot" is selected with a probability of 40%. "Normal jackpot" is selected.

The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Moreover, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table 202b, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

In the first embodiment, depending on the pending number of suspended variable effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the rough effect mode of the variable effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and at the time of losing is determined. selected. Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as "reach display" ', and a 'super reach' effect mode in which the effect element of 'super reach' is developed from the effect element of 'normal reach', and the effect element of 'normal reach' is also executed. ``Special reach'' production mode in which the production element of ``special reach'' is executed, and the production element of ``movie'' dedicated to ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is executed. are selected.

Among the production modes, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long)" production mode, The “non-reach (middle)” production mode and the “non-reach (short)” production mode may be collectively referred to as “the “non-reach” production mode”) refers to each display in the main display area Dm. After the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed in the areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6(a)), except for the "non-reach (short)" production mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" production element or "pseudo-variation ' is performed, and the same third pattern does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 to prevent the occurrence of the 'ready-to-win' display. Details of the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element, the "low-speed fluctuation" effect element, and the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element will be described later.

Among the production modes, the "normal reach" production mode means that the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 are the same in the variable production of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the "normal reach" effect element is executed, and the "reach display" does not develop into another "reach display" (that is, the "super reach" effect element or the "special reach" effect element). It is one of the production modes of. Details of the "normal reach" effect element, the "super reach" effect element, and the "special reach" effect element will be described later.

Among the presentation modes, the "super reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the presentation element of "super reach" is developed from the presentation element of "normal reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "special reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of "reach display" in which the presentation element of "special reach" is developed from the presentation element of "normal reach".

Among the performance modes, the ``special variation'' performance mode is a performance mode that is executed without omission when the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is won, and is a performance mode in which the ``movie'' performance element is executed. The details of the "movie" rendering element will be described later.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 of the area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether the variable performance is appropriate, the current game state, and the number of variable performances currently pending (the number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided in a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected according to the number of variable effects during standby (the number of pending balls) and the like.

Specifically, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the number of reservations table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the propriety of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current variation effect One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number (the number of held balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the variable performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 for selecting the effect mode differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect according to the suitability of the variable effect, the game state and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) whether a big hit occurs in the acquired third symbol variation effect, or (2) the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability change state", "time reduction state" or "normal game state". and (3) how many balls of the suspended variable effect are on hold, the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation for a big win for each effect mode. That is, the stop patterns, that is, the "non-reach" performance mode, the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, and the "special reach" performance, are used when the jackpot lottery is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost. By configuring the selection ratio of modes (excluding the ``special variation'' production mode that is selected without fail when winning the ``2R probability variable jackpot'') to be different, the degree of expectation for a big hit for each presentation mode change.

Specifically, for example, when winning the jackpot lottery, the ``super reach'' performance mode or the ``special reach'' performance mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the ``non-reach'' performance is configured. The mode and the "normal reach" presentation mode are configured to be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the ``super reach'' performance mode and the ``special reach'' performance mode can be a performance mode in which it is easy to hit a big hit, and the ``normal reach'' performance mode and the ``non-reach'' performance mode are less likely to hit a big hit. A performance or a performance without a big win can be provided, and the degree of expectation for a big win can be differentiated for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that makes it easy to win a big win appears in the variable performance, it is suggested to the player that the possibility of a big win is high while the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being performed, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. there is

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained result of the lottery is a big win, the stop pattern table 202d makes it easy to select an effect that makes it easy to win a big win and makes it difficult to select an effect that makes it difficult to win a big win. It is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and a performance mode (stop pattern) of a variable performance is selected based on a stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that makes it difficult to win a big win. Configure to select.

As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third pattern in the variable performance, if the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is being executed, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win in the variable performance and the performance that makes it difficult to win a big win is executed. In the case of the variable performance, it is difficult for the big win to occur, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big win for each performance mode (stop pattern), the amusement of the game can be enhanced during the execution of the variable performance.

In addition, as a second reason, the number of times of waiting for the variable effect of the third symbol (dynamic display of the first symbol. The same applies hereinafter) has reached the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible useless balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning).

Specifically, the number of standby times for the variable effect of the third symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, and the variable effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the right special figure winning opening 78a in the state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, the ball enters the right special figure winning opening 78a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached, and the right special figure winning The lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained even though the ball has entered the opening 78a.

In addition, even in the "normal game state", when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third pattern is reached, if a variable performance with a long fluctuation time is selected, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is maintained during the execution of the variable performance. is not digested, even if a ball enters the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

In the state as described above, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is entered into the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, and the variable effect is digested, and the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The shooting of the ball is stopped until the state is reached, and the game is interrupted. As a result, the game is interrupted, which lowers the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 and affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a short variation time is selected in the game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is easily reached, or in the number of reserved balls close to (or matching) the maximum number of reserved balls. Based on the easy stop pattern table 202d, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time.

Specifically, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is small (no), if the ball is not newly entered into any of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a within the variable time of the variable effect being executed, The next variable effect cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demonstration screen or the like. When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the special symbol winning openings 77a and 78a because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged as a machine and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of pending balls of the variable effect is small, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variable time is likely to be selected. there is As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 is not subjected to the variable performance can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the details of the pending number table 202c will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the pending number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the balls entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the propriety of the variation effect and the game at that time It is configured to refer to the pending number table 202c based on the state and the pending number of variable effects at that point in time to select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5. Then, based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined.

Specifically, as shown in the pending number table 202c of FIG. 10, when the loss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of pending balls is "1", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 11(a)) is selected.

In addition, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "2 or 3", or when extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the number of retained balls is "one", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when extracting a loss in the "normal game state" and the number of retained balls is "4", or when extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of retained balls is " 2 to 4”, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when extracting the ``15R jackpot (``15R probability variable jackpot'' or ``15R normal jackpot''), the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (Fig. 12(a) ) is selected.

Furthermore, when extracting the "2R probability variable jackpot", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 12(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of held balls.

That is, when one of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4 or E table 202d5) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of pending balls or the game state at that time, Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, at the time of losing), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2 or C table 202d3) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. .

It should be noted that the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a jackpot is won. For example, when a big hit is won and the number of pending balls is large, a stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected It may be configured to allow selection of the "Special Reach" effect mode, etc.).

In this case, in each performance mode in which 'ready-to-reach display' is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the performance element of 'high-speed fluctuation' is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the variable effect is started in a state where the number of held balls is four, even if the effect element of "high speed change" is performed in 5 seconds, the "high speed change" for 5 seconds At the time when the production element of "fluctuation" ends (at the time when the production element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is recognized), in the fluctuation production, does the "failure display" appear after the production element of "low-speed fluctuation"? It becomes unrecognizable whether it develops into "reach display". Therefore, even if the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the "reach display" that is not the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode can be executed, it is possible to make it impossible to know at the time of execution of the ``high-speed fluctuation'' performance element for 5 seconds whether the variable performance will result in a big hit or a loss.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of held balls is small, a stop pattern table 202d (for example, A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected 202d1) may be selected. By configuring in this way, even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the third pattern display device 81 is performing the fluctuation effect, and the third pattern display device 81 A situation in which the variable performance is not performed can be made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of failure. FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. . Also, FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, and FIG. 12(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to " 97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is not assigned. The mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode are set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is not allocated. ' rendering mode and 'non-reach (short)' rendering mode are set so as not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In addition, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is not allocated. ' rendering mode and 'non-reach (short)' rendering mode are set so as not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Furthermore, in the C table 202d3, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is 75%, the "normal reach" effect mode is 20%, the "super reach" effect mode is 3%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected on the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode on the B table 202d2. In table C 202d3, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. there is

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time for the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2 or the C table 202d3, and the B table 202d2 is selected as compared to the C table 202d3. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to be relatively long. In other words, the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter fluctuation time of the selected variable performance than the A table 202d1, and the C table 202d3 has the selected variation of the variable performance compared to the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2. It can be said that the time is likely to be shortened.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2 and the C table 202d3.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the production mode of the variable production is selected based on the number of pending balls of the variable production being held. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable performance is large, it is made easy to select a "non-reach (short)" performance mode or a "non-reach (middle)" performance mode with a short variable performance time. Thus, when the number of pending balls of the variable performance is large, the execution time of the variable performance to be executed is shortened and the number of times of execution of the variable performance is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved.

Also, for example, when the number of suspended balls in the variable effect is small, in order to secure the ball entry time to the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, the variable effect time is changed from the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. To make it easy to select a long "non-reach (long)" performance mode or a "non-reach (middle)" performance mode. As a result, it is possible to perform the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the "non-reach (middle)" production mode with a longer variable production time than when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. By making it easier to secure the ball entry time into the figure winning openings 77a and 78a and increasing the possibility of generating a new starting prize during the execution time of the variation performance in the third pattern display device 81, the variation performance is realized. can maintain the status of execution.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the performance mode of the variable performance acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" performance mode, addition to the variable time of the acquired variable performance A production extension time (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "extension time") for performing a realistic production is obtained by lottery, and a series of "slump production" is performed during the total time of the acquired variable time and extension time. is configured to run. By configuring in this way, the dynamic production time of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened beyond the fluctuation time of the acquired variable production, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by reducing situations in which the dynamic presentation is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(a), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "40" to " 99”. In the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" rendering mode, and the "special variation" rendering mode is set not to be selected. Also, the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of the big win, and since the "ready-to-win display" always occurs, the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(b), in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other "ready-to-win display" is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot" is set to always be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the E table 202d5 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of the big win, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is set to 5% for the "normal reach" effect mode, 35% for the "super reach" effect mode, and 60% for the "special reach" effect mode. Also, in the E table 202d5, the "special variation" presentation mode is set to have a selection ratio of 100%.

Therefore, in the variation production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of “special reach” production mode > “super reach” production mode > “normal reach” production mode, and in the fluctuation production at the time of losing, “normal reach” production mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode > "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win at the time of appearance of each "ready-to-win display" is high in the order of the "special ready-to-win" production mode>"super ready-to-win" production mode>"normal reach" production mode. configured to be Thus, the degree of expectation for the big win can be shown to the player by the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the exhilaration of the big win according to the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the special figure winning opening 77a , 78a, and determination of the variable performance based on the start of the variable performance based on the entry, substantially the same performance mode is selected. there is Specifically, in the case of the variable performance of losing, one of the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3 is selected based on the number of pending balls in the variable performance. In the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3, stop pattern counters assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, or the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode. The value of C3 is the same, and the values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to other effect modes are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of pending balls of the variable production, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected, or the "non-reach (short)" production is selected. Since the only difference is whether the mode is selected, the same presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode of "ready-to-win display" irrespective of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of starting winning and the effect mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of held balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice" is performed based on the presentation mode selected at the time of starting winning, in the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the contents of the pre-reading notice On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause any discrepancies.

From the above, the state in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls held in the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times of execution of the variable performance based on, it is possible to select a performance mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d having completely different selection rates for each effect mode may be provided according to the number of pending balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of pending balls in the variable effect, in performing a pre-reading notice such as "holding change notice", the number of pending balls at the time of deciding the pre-reading notice execution The number of pending balls at the time of execution of the variable effect that is the target of the pre-reading notice may be different. In such a case, it is necessary to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the processing complicated.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 of the area.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3, by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM202, detailed Determining fluctuation patterns. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

In this way, MPU 201 of main controller 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation effect and determines only the variation time. By configuring in this way, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, since it is not necessary to perform control such as detailed notice lottery necessary for executing the variable performance, the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable performance can be reduced. can. In addition, the main controller 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation performance, the variation performance You can increase the degree of freedom to choose. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time corresponding to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 determines whether or not a series of "slump effects" can be executed, and in the "slump effects", the variation pattern of the variable effects is a "pseudo-run" effect. Even if only one variation pattern is provided, it is possible to execute a variation pattern of a plurality of "pseudo-run" presentations as a "slump presentation". Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of presentations while reducing the ROM capacity, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, a losing variation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of losing and a big win variation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of the big win are prepared. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, "E0: non-reach (long)" to be referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and the "non-reach (middle)" production mode are determined. "E1: non-reach (middle)" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, "E2: non-reach (short)" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " For "E3: Normal Reach" referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach" for reference when the "Super Reach" rendition mode is determined, and "Special Reach" rendition It is divided into "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the mode is determined. A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a jackpot value (jackpot random value), that is, if it is a value that is lost, refer to the reservation number table 202c. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the above-mentioned stop pattern table are selected. 202d to select an effect mode. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. determined as a variation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table for losing 202e1, "E0: non-reach (long)" includes "effect element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + effect element of "low speed fluctuation"" with total fluctuation time of "15 seconds". (variation time; hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "high-speed variation (long)" effect + "low-speed variation" effect "Element" is "0 to 9", and only ""High speed fluctuation (long)" production element + "Low speed fluctuation" production mode" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table for losing 202e1, "high speed fluctuation (long )” effect element + effect mode of “low speed variation” are associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, only the "high-speed variation (long)" effect mode + "low-speed variation" effect mode is always selected as the variation pattern.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect mode of "low speed variation" is the first half of the effect element of "pseudo-run", and the chance game development pattern appears. Furthermore, it is configured to be the same as the variation time of the "pseudo-fluctuation" presentation mode that indicates whether or not the chance symbol will appear, and the voice ramp control device 113 side sets the "low-speed variation" presentation mode to "pseudo-variation". ” can be replaced with the production mode of “.

Specifically, for example, when main controller 110 selects “high-speed fluctuation (long)” production mode + “low-speed fluctuation” production mode, and that effect is transmitted to sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113, in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, as transmitted, either "high-speed variation (long)" effect mode + "low-speed variation" effect mode" or "high-speed It is configured to be able to select and execute the production mode of "variation (long)" + the production mode of "pseudo-variation". By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute an effect that is greater than the type of variable time selected by the main controller 110, and while increasing the variation of the effect, the number of variable times stored in the main controller 110 is reduced. As a result, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, each effect mode will be described in detail while referring to each effect element that constitutes each effect mode. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of an effect time for each effect unit of a variable effect or a "slump effect" executed in each game situation. Also, FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the variable time and the extended time and the "slump effect", and FIG. There is, and FIG. 16(b) exemplifies the "slump effect" at the time of reach.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where the "slump effect" can occur so as not to fall into a slump situation where the variation effect of the third symbol is not executed as much as possible. (that is, "slump state"), when the variable performance of the third symbol is executed based on the winning to the special symbol winning openings 77a, 78a, a series of "slump performance" is executed by the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in a situation other than the "slump state" (that is, "normal state"), it is configured to perform a variable effect composed of predetermined effect elements. By constructing in this way, the performance time performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened, the possibility of the next start winning occurring during execution of a series of "slump performance" is increased, and the third pattern display is performed. By reducing the situation where the device 81 is not performing the performance, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

First, as the production of the "normal state", the production element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" performed for "10 seconds", the production element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed for "5 seconds", and the production element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed for "5 seconds". ``Low speed fluctuation'' effect element, ``Pseudo fluctuation'' effect element performed for ``5 seconds'', ``Normal reach'' effect element performed for ``5 seconds'', and ``Super reach'' performed for ``15 seconds'' , the effect element of "special reach" performed for "25 seconds", the effect element of "re-fluctuation" performed for "5 seconds", and the effect element of "movie" performed for "50 seconds". prepared. In addition, as the "slump effect" of the "slump state", the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed for "5 seconds", the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" performed for "5 seconds", and the effect element of "0 seconds" A production element of "development possibility production" performed for a longer period than "10 seconds" and a production element of "whatever reach" performed for "10 seconds" are prepared. Note that the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed in the "normal state" and the "slump state" and the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" are equivalent effect elements.

"High-speed fluctuation (long)" or "High-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to as "high-speed fluctuation" ) effect elements are the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (FIG. 6 ( a) Refers to an effect element in which the third pattern displayed in (see) is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen.

In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third pattern is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third pattern cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the previously stop-displayed variable performance or the stop result of the "slump performance" is irregularly mixed. It is executed as a (shuffle) performance. In the first embodiment, the difference between the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” effect element and the “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element is the length of the high-speed shuffling effect time (“10 seconds” and “5 seconds”). ) (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" effect element or the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element is performed, a specific effect mode ("non-reach (short)" effect It is configured such that the effect element of "low-speed variation" or the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is performed except for the mode or "special variation" effect mode).

The effect element of "low-speed fluctuation" means that in the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 6(a)), after the effect element of "high-speed change", the effect is visually recognized by the player. It refers to a production element in which the third pattern is scrolled at a possible speed at a low speed. This "low speed fluctuation" production element is a production mode other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode, and except when the "pseudo fluctuation" described later is executed, the "high speed fluctuation" production element is followed by " 5 seconds” (see FIG. 15).

In this "low-speed fluctuation" production element, the player is made to recognize the display contents of the third symbol, and the third symbol row is displayed in the order of left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)). Stop displaying the pattern. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is considered that the "ready-to-win display" occurs and develops into the production element of "normal reach", while the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol stops in (except for a chance eye development symbol to be described later), the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is terminated ("pseudo-run" to be described later). (unless it develops into In addition, in the effect element of this "low-speed fluctuation", the time during which the "ready-to-win display" is established and the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates by several frames, and the time during which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped without the "ready-to-win display" being established. are configured to be the same time.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the production element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production, and then the production element of "low speed fluctuation" is produced for "5 seconds". will be In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, the production element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production, and then the production element of "low speed fluctuation" is carried out for "5 seconds". will be Then, in the "low-speed variation" effect element, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) stop in order, and the "failure display" appears, ending one variation effect.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the effect element of "low speed change" is not performed after "high speed change (short)" is performed for "5 seconds", and the effect of "high speed change (short)" is not performed. After the completion of the elements, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) are stopped at the same time, and the "failure display" appears, ending the 1 variable effect. That is, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element is performed, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 rapidly moves without going through the "low-speed fluctuation" production element. It is configured to stop (what is called a bitter stop).

In addition, in the production element of "low speed fluctuation", when "failure display" is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation production ends and is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The execution pattern that is running is erased.

The effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" is, first, when the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6A) is "+1" larger than the third symbol. When the symbols are displayed stationary (for example, the third symbol "7" is stationary displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the third symbol "8" is stationary displayed in the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6A) ( That is, "7 8 (○ is fluctuating)") is applicable.Hereafter, the combination is referred to as "chance eye development pattern"). When the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped, the same third symbol as the third symbol stopped in the left symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, the left symbol row Z1 And the case where the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol "8" is stop-displayed in the right symbol row Z3 (that is, "778") is applicable. is referred to as a "chance eye symbol"), or a third symbol with a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped in the left symbol row Z1 in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped (for example, in the left symbol row Z1 This corresponds to the case where the third symbol of "7" is stopped and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 (that is, "788"). (referred to as "Gasechanmoku pattern").

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the chance symbol appears in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the "pseudo-fluctuation" production element, the "high-speed fluctuation (Short)” effect element is executed, and when the above-mentioned gacha chance pattern appears, the variable effect ends as it is.

This "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element may be performed for "5 seconds" instead of the "low-speed fluctuation" effect element after the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element (see FIG. 15). In addition, in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) is stopped, the same third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6(a)) When the third pattern (that is, the ready-to-win formation pattern) is stopped and displayed, it develops into a "ready-to-win display" (a performance element of "normal reach" or a performance element of "whatever reach") as it is.

Therefore, in this "pseudo-fluctuation" production element, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element and the "pseudo-fluctuation" production element start again from the chance symbol. An effect as if the variable effect had started one more time (so-called “pseudo-continuous”). ” is sometimes referred to as production.) is executed.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one “pseudo-run” effect is executed (selected) in the “normal state” variable effect, and a maximum of five “pseudo-run” effects can be executed in a series of “slump effects”. is configured (can be selected) to

Specifically, for example, when executing a single “pseudo-continuous” effect in the “normal state”, after executing the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” effect element or the “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element, The effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, the chance symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo stop"), and again the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, the ready-to-win formation pattern appears in the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element, and develops into a "normal reach" effect element to be described later.

On the other hand, when the "pseudo run" effect is executed five times in the "slump effect", the effect element of "pseudo change" is executed after the effect element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" is executed, and the chance symbol is simulated. Stop, the second ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'' effect element and the ``pseudo-fluctuation'' effect element are executed again, the chance symbol is pseudo-stopped, and then the third ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'' effect is executed. The element and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" are executed to stop the chance symbol, and furthermore, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" are executed for the fourth chance symbol. is pseudo-stopped, and the fifth “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “pseudo-variation” effect element are executed, and the reach formation pattern appears in the “pseudo-variation” effect element, and then, It develops into the production element of "Which reach", which will be described later.

Also, in the case of executing the "gase pseudo-continuous" effect three times in the "slump effect", the effect element of "pseudo change" is executed after the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is executed, and the chance eye symbol is displayed. A false chance symbol appears without stopping, and the second ``high-speed variation (short)'' performance element and the ``pseudo variation'' performance element are executed again, and the chance symbol does not stop and the false chance symbol appears. appears, and then the chance symbol does not stop even in the third “high-speed fluctuation (short)” effect element and the “pseudo-fluctuation” effect element, and the fake chance symbol appears in the “pseudo-fluctuation” effect element. After that, the series of "slump effects" ends.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variation pattern managed by the main controller 110, even if only the variation pattern in which the "pseudo-run" effect is executed only once, In the "slump effect" in the "slump state", the "pseudo-run" effect can be performed two or more times (five times or less). Therefore, even if the number of variation patterns related to the "pseudo-run" effect stored in the main controller 110 is reduced, the "pseudo-run" effect of a plurality of patterns can be executed. , it is possible to enrich the variation of production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal state" and the "slump state", when the chance symbol appears in this "pseudo-run" effect, at least some "ready-to-win display" ("normal state" It is configured to always develop into the production element of "Normal reach" described later, and the production element of "Which reach" described later in the "slump state").

Therefore, in the production element of "pseudo-fluctuation", after the production element of "pseudo-variation" is finished, the ready-to-reach formation pattern appears (the middle pattern row Z2 is fluctuating) and develops into the production element of "normal reach". , a chance symbol appears and develops into a "pseudo-continuous" performance again, or a false chance symbol appears and the variable performance ends as it is.

In addition, in the effect element of "pseudo-variation", when the gacha chance pattern is stopped and displayed, the change effect or "slump effect" ends, and the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6(b)) ) is erased (hereafter, the case where the gacha chance pattern is stopped and the variation effect or the 'slump effect' ends is referred to as a 'gase quasi-continuous' effect). On the other hand, when the chance symbol or the ready-to-win formation symbol (the middle symbol row Z2 is fluctuating) is stopped and displayed, the variation effect or the "slump effect" continues. The displayed execution symbols are also continuously displayed until the change performance or the "slump performance" ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of times of the pseudo-stop is set to 1 in the "pseudo-continue" effect in the "normal state", but the "pseudo-continue" effect in which the number of times of the pseudo-stop is two or more times is executed. It may be configured as Furthermore, in the "pseudo-continuous" effect in the "slump effect", the maximum number of times of the pseudo-stop is set to 5, but it is possible to execute the "pseudo-continuous" effect in which the number of times of the pseudo-stop is 6 or more. good.

The production element of "normal reach" is the production element of "low speed fluctuation" or the production element of "pseudo fluctuation". In this case, it is an effect element for showing whether or not a big hit will occur depending on the variation result of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)). This "normal reach" effect element is performed for "5 seconds" after the effect element of "low-speed fluctuation" or the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" (see FIG. 15).

In this "normal reach" effect element, the third symbols stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the main display area Dm are displayed enlarged from the normal time. (not shown). Further, the third pattern of the middle pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) is scrolled at a low speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen, and displayed in a state in which the player can visually recognize the third pattern of the middle pattern row Z2. be done. Furthermore, in this "normal reach" effect element, the secondary display area Ds (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased (not shown) as the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) is enlarged. ).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the effect element of "normal reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "jackpot display", and the pattern of "super reach". A pattern that develops into a production element, a pattern that develops into a 'special reach' production element, and a pattern that once a 'failure display' appears and then a 'revariation' production element is executed are prepared.

It should be noted that, in the effect element of "normal reach", when the "losing display" or "big hit display" is stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db. ) is erased.

The production element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) continues without stopping the "loss display" in the production element of "normal reach". , the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) to perform a "battle effect" to show whether or not a big win will occur. This "super reach" effect element is performed for "15 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" effect element (see FIG. 15).

In this "super reach" effect mode, during execution of the "super reach" effect element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is erased from the display state of the "normal reach" effect element, and this " The reach formation pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the effect element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character designs are displayed to perform "battle effect" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "battle effect", it is configured to suggest the suitability of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy's side, the variable effect is suggested to be a "big win display", When the character pattern on the side loses to the character pattern on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variable effect becomes "losing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the effect element of "super reach", a pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", a pattern of directly displaying the "big win display", and a pattern of directly displaying the "loss display" ” appears, and then the effect element of “re-fluctuation” is executed.

In addition, in the effect element of "super reach", when the "losing display" or "big win display" is stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 (FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db is displayed. reference) is erased.

The production element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variation of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) continues without stopping the "loss display" in the production element of "normal reach". , the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)). This "special reach" effect element is performed for "25 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" effect element (see FIG. 15).

In this "special reach" effect element, during the execution of the "special reach" effect element, the display state of the "normal reach" effect element changes to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6(a)) is erased, and the reach formation pattern of the third pattern which was the cause of occurrence of this "reach display" is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the effect element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the effect element of "super reach" appear to create a "competition effect". ” (not shown).

In the first embodiment, based on the result (win/lose) of the "competition effect", it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character pattern on the player's side wins over the character pattern on the enemy side, the variation effect is suggested to be "big win display", while the game When the player's side character pattern is defeated by the enemy side's character pattern, the variable effect is configured to suggest "losing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the effect element of "special reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display" and the direct "jackpot display" are displayed in the same way as the effect element of "super reach". A pattern to appear and a pattern to perform the effect element of "re-fluctuation" after once appearing "failure display" are prepared.

In addition, in the effect element of "special reach", when the "loss display" or "big hit display" is stopped and displayed, the variable effect ends and the execution pattern display area Db0 (FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db is displayed. reference) is erased.

In addition, after the execution of the effect element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach", but instead of this configuration, the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" When the ready-to-win formation pattern is stopped later, it may be constructed so that the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach" suddenly develops without going through the effect element of "normal reach". Further, the effect element of "special reach" may be performed after the effect element of "super reach" is executed.

The effect element of "re-fluctuation" is a effect element that develops and is executed after the "losing display" once appears in any of the "ready-to-win display" to display the "jackpot display". This "re-fluctuation" effect element is performed for "5 seconds" after execution of any of the "ready-to-win display" (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only the pattern in which the "big win display" appears after the execution of the effect element of "revariation" is prepared. That is, when the effect element of "re-fluctuation" is executed, the "big win display" always appears after that. In other words, in the case of "failure display", the effect element of "re-variation" is not executed. This is because the production element of "re-fluctuation" is a production element that changes the temporarily stopped display of "loss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so the "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If you go in the case of , there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, this "re-variation" effect element is configured to be selected only in the big win variation pattern table 202e2 and not selected in the losing variation pattern table 202e1.

In addition, when the "big win display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of "re-variation", the change effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The execution pattern that is running is erased.

The "movie" effect element is executed when the "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, and is a effect element for displaying the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot". The effect element of this "movie" is performed for "50 seconds" as a whole (see FIG. 15), and a specific character pattern (for example, An effect is executed in which a premier character speaks a predetermined message (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the effect element of "movie", only the pattern in which the "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability variable jackpot" appears is prepared. That is, when the effect element of "movie" is executed, the "jackpot display" of the "2R probability variable jackpot" always appears after that. In the first embodiment, the "movie" effect element is configured to be executed (selected) not only in the "normal state" but also in the "slump state."

In addition, when the "big win display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of the "movie", the variable effect ends and is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The execution pattern that is present is erased.

Next, the rendering of the "slump state" will be described. In the "slump state", when the ball wins (start winning) in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the third symbol display device 81 produces a "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element and a "pseudo fluctuation" production element. The "pseudo-run" effect (including the "gase pseudo-run" effect; the same shall apply hereinafter) is configured to be executed at least twice.

Conventionally, when there is no pending ball number for the variable performance, the next variable performance is started unless the ball is newly entered into either of the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a within the variable time of the variable performance being executed. Therefore, the demonstration screen or the like is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . When the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable effect in spite of the fact that the player is playing the game by shooting the ball, the player can obtain the interest related to the lottery for the big win desired by the player. Instead, they lose interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 makes it difficult for the ball to enter the special symbol winning openings 77a and 78a because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will be judged as a machine and the game will be stopped.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the ball starts and wins in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump state", the "slump effect" is executed, and the variable time of the acquired variable effect It is configured so that the dynamic performance of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81 can be performed for a longer period of time. As a result, a situation in which the third pattern display device 81 does not perform a dynamic effect (fluctuation effect and "slump effect") of the third pattern is unlikely to occur. It is possible to maintain the execution state of the dynamic production for a long time.

In particular, when the variable performance acquired by the above-mentioned starting prize is in the "non-reach" performance mode, a plurality of "gase pseudo-ren" performances, which are "slump performance", are performed for a longer time than the variation time of the acquired variable performance. configured to run twice. By configuring in this way, the dynamic effect time of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, and the dynamic effect time of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is increased. It is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her excitement by reducing the situation in which the dramatic effect is not performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" effect mode (that is, the number of pending balls is 0, so "15 seconds" If it is a “non-reach (long)” production mode), the time (hereinafter referred to as “extended time”) for performing additional production for the variable time of the acquired variable production is obtained by lottery. and the "slump effect" is executed during the total time of the acquired variable time and extended time. Specifically, when the extended time of "5 seconds" is obtained, the "slump effect" is executed twice, and the extended time of "10 seconds" is obtained. , as a "slump effect", in addition to two "gase quasi-continuous" effects, a later-described "development propriety effect" effect mode is executed for "5 seconds".

In addition, the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the production mode in which the "reach display" is executed (that is, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode ), the extension time is not drawn, and one or more “pseudo-run” effects are executed according to the acquired variable time, and the effect element of “Which reach”, which will be described later, is executed. . The detailed contents of various effects performed in the "slump effect" will be described later.

Furthermore, if the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning during the "slump production" is the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the extension time is not drawn, and according to the acquired variable time " Slump effect” is configured to be additionally set. This is because the extended time has already been acquired in the "slump effect" that has already been executed, and if additional extended time is acquired in that state, the effect time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. In addition, management of the performance time becomes complicated. Therefore, if a variable effect (all variable effects of the "non-reach" effect mode and the "reach display" effect mode) is acquired during the "slump effect", do not extract additional extended time By configuring, the processing load related to the extraction of the extension time is reduced, and the management of the presentation time of the "slump presentation" is facilitated.

In particular, when a new start winning occurs during the "slump effect", when the "slump effect" being executed is not in execution of one effect unit of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, that is, based on the extended time If the production element in the previous stage of the production element is being executed, additional production is performed in order to match the series of "slump production" in performing the additional "slump production" based on the above start winning. In order to carry out, the originally set extension time is once reset (that is, cleared to 0), and the content of a series of "slump effects" is newly set. This means that if the effect element other than the effect element during the extended time, that is, the effect element that precedes the effect element based on the extended time is being executed, the effect element corresponding to the acquired extended time is executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the contents of a series of "slump effects" are set again, the contents of the effects will not be inconsistent.

In addition, in the "pseudo run" production in the "slump state", when the false chance pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, when the "gase pseudo run" production is performed, one of the series of "slump production" The performance unit ends, and the execution symbol (main suspension display or dummy suspension display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased accordingly. Therefore, as one performance unit of the ``slump effect'', a ``pseudo-continuous'' effect equivalent to the variable effect of the ``normal state'' is performed, and as a result of the display, the false chance pattern is stopped and displayed, and the execution pattern display area is displayed. By erasing the execution symbol displayed in Db0, the player can be given the illusion that the 1st variable performance has been completed.

The effect element of the "development propriety effect" is one of the effect elements executed in the "slump effect" at the time of the "slump state", and is (pseudo) stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a production of whether or not the Gasechan eyes pattern is changed. Also, the effect element of the “development propriety effect” is a effect element dedicated to the “slump effect”. In the effect element of this "development propriety effect", the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 is artificially cracked, and the effect is executed as if the liquid crystal screen is cracked (see FIG. 45).

In the effect element of this "development propriety effect", if the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 is cracked in a pseudo-crack and as a result, the liquid crystal screen is cracked, the false chance pattern is a chance. Instead of the eye design, the next "pseudo-ream" production is performed, or the goose chance eye design is replaced with the reach forming pattern and the production element of "Which reach" is executed. On the other hand, in the effect element of "development propriety effect", the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 is cracked in a pseudo manner, but if the effect of the liquid crystal screen being cracked in a pseudo manner is not performed, that false chance It is configured so that a series of "slump effects" ends with the eye pattern remaining.

During the "slump effect", the effect element of "development availability effect" is executed for a period longer than "0 seconds" and shorter than "10 seconds" after the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed (see FIG. 15). , the longer the number of seconds to be executed, the more the amount of artificial cracks in the liquid crystal screen gradually increases. Specifically, from "0 seconds" to "3 seconds", the "first development propriety effect" with a small amount of cracks is executed, and from "3 seconds" to "7 seconds", the "first development propriety effect" is executed. ``Second development propriety performance'' with more cracks than production'' is executed, and from ``7 seconds'' to ``10 seconds'', the amount of cracks is greater than ``second development propriety performance'' ``Third development propriety performance'' ” is executed. The detailed contents of the “development propriety effect” will be described later.

It should be noted that, in the effect element of "development propriety effect" in "slump effect", if the display screen cracking effect is not executed, that is, if the effect element of "development propriety effect" is not developed, The effect unit 1 of the "slump effect" ends, and the execution symbol (main suspension display or dummy suspension display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db is erased. be. Therefore, the ``development possible/impossible effect'' is performed as the ``slump effect'', and as a result of the display, the false chance pattern is stopped and displayed, and the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased. It is possible to give the person the illusion that one variable performance has ended.

The effect element of "Which is reach" is one of the effects executed in the "slump effect", and is a "reach display" one step before whether or not the "jackpot display" appears. Also, the production element of "Which reach" is a production element dedicated to "Slump production". In the production element of this "Which da reach", the third pattern that is the same as the ready-to-win forming pattern and the third pattern that is different from the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 are displayed in the central part of the third pattern display device 81. An effect of competing whether or not it will be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "which effect") is executed (see FIG. 47(e)).

The effect element of "Which reach" is performed for "10 seconds" after the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" or the effect element of "development possibility effect" is executed during the "slump effect" (see FIG. 15).

In this "Which da reach" effect element, during execution of the "Which da reach" effect element, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased in the same manner as the above "Super reach" effect element. Then, the reach forming pattern of the third pattern, which was the cause of occurrence of this "ready-to-win display", is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes to the background display exclusively for the effect element of "Which da reach", and the above-mentioned "Which da effect" is performed (see FIG. 47(e)). ).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest whether or not the "slump effect" (fluctuation effect) is appropriate based on the result (win or lose) of the "which effect". Specifically, for example, in the above "Which effect", the same third pattern as the ready-to-win formation pattern is stopped and displayed in the central portion of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the position of the middle pattern row Z2). In this case, while suggesting that the "slump effect" will be a "big hit display", when the third pattern different from the ready-to-win formation pattern is stopped and displayed in the central part of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, It is configured to suggest that the "slump effect" will be "failure display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the effect element of "Which reach", the pattern of directly displaying the "losing display" and the direct "jackpot display" are displayed in the same manner as the effect element of "Super reach". and a pattern in which the effect element of "re-variation" is executed after the "failure display" appears.

It should be noted that when the "losing display" or "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed in the production elements of "Which reach", the series of "slump production" ends, and the execution pattern display area Db0 (Fig. 6(b)) is erased.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the performance time (fluctuation time) of all the performance elements of the variable performance that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the performance time in units of "5 seconds" ( That is, it consists of "5 seconds", "10 seconds", "15 seconds", "20 seconds", "25 seconds" or "50 seconds"). In addition, in the "slump state", the presentation time of all the presentation elements except for the presentation element of "probability of development" is an integer multiple of the presentation time in units of "5 seconds". The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also an integral multiple of the presentation time in units of "5 seconds". By configuring in this way, when performing a series of "slump effects" in which a plurality of effect elements are executed in relation to one acquired variable effect, the variable time (and extension time) of the variable effect and " It is possible to facilitate matching with the performance time of "slump performance".

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the relationship between the execution time of the variable effect (dynamic display), the extended time acquired during the "slump effect", and the effect time of the "slump effect" to be executed will be described. do.

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), in the "slump state", when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected and "5 seconds" is selected as the extension time, the total production time is " 20 seconds”, and as a “slump effect”, the first “gase pseudo-ren” production in the “first production” (hereinafter, the first “gase pseudo-ren” production is called “gase pseudo-ren 1”, the second The “gase pseudo-continuation” production is set to “gase pseudo-continuation 2”, . 2 effect” is set to “Gase Pseudo Ream 2”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in the "slump state", when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected and "10 seconds" is selected as the extension time, the total presentation time is ``25 seconds'', and as the ``slump effect'', the ``first effect'' is set to ``gase pseudo-continuation 1'', the ``second effect'' is set to ``gase pseudo-continuation 2'', and the ``third effect'' is set. , a "development possible/impossible effect" corresponding to the remaining effect time (that is, "5 seconds") of the "slump effect" is set.

Then, each of the above-mentioned "slump effects" is carried out, and a false chance pattern, which is a pattern corresponding to the acquired stop pattern of the variable effect ("non-reach (long)" effect mode, "losing display"), is displayed. The stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends. While this "slump effect" is being performed, if a new starting prize occurs in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the transition to the "normal state" does not occur, while a new starting prize does not occur. If it is, it will be in a "slump state" again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the "slump state", the total effect time is "20 seconds", and the "slump effect" is changed to the "first effect ” to the first “pseudo-ren” production (hereinafter, the first “pseudo-ren” production is “pseudo-ren 1”, the second “pseudo-ren” production is “pseudo-ren 2”, …, n A “pseudo-run” effect for the th time (n is a natural number) is set as “pseudo-run n”), and the “second effect” is set to the effect element of “whatever reach”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(b), in the "slump state", when the "super reach" production mode is selected, the total production time is "30 seconds", and the "slump production" is "first ``Demonstration'' is set to ``Pseudo-Ren 1'', ``Second Rendering'' is set to ``Pseudo-Ren 2'', and the ``Third Rendering'' is set to the rendering element of ``Where do you reach?''.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16(b), in the "slump state", when the "special reach" production mode is selected, the total production time is "40 seconds", and the "slump production" is "first ``Pseudo-Long 1'' is set in the ``Effect'', ``Pseudo-Long 2'' is set in the ``Second Effect'', ``Pseudo-Long 3'' is set in the ``Third Effect'', and ``Which one'' is set in the ``Fourth Effect'' The production element of "Dai reach" is set.

Then, each "slump performance" is carried out, the "loss display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop pattern of the obtained variable performance is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump performance" is completed.

By configuring in this way, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the variation time of the acquired variable effect, the effect time performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is performed by the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to reduce the number of situations that have not been done so that the player does not lose interest.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description continues. In the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E1: non-reach (middle)" includes "effect element of "high speed change (short)" + effect element of "low speed change"" with total change time of "10 seconds". One variation pattern of is prepared. 13 and 14, the term "effect element" will be omitted for convenience of explanation.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (middle)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 9", and only ""high speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed fluctuation"" is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for losing, "high speed fluctuation (short )”+“low speed variation”” are associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, only "high speed fluctuation (short)"+"low speed fluctuation" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table for losing 202e1, one fluctuation pattern of "only 'fast fluctuation (short)'" with a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds is prepared for "E2: non-reach (short)".

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only "fast fluctuation (short)". , and it is set to be selectable only for "only 'high-speed variation (short)'".

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the fluctuation pattern table for losing 202e1, "high speed fluctuation (short )” only” is associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, "only "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table for losing 202e1, "E3: normal reach" includes ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" with an overall fluctuation time of "20 seconds", and the total fluctuation time Two fluctuation patterns of "30 seconds" "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" are selectable, A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" 0 to 6", and "7 to 9" for "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is 70%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%. Therefore, in the variable effect including the effect element of "normal reach" selected at the time of losing, the change pattern of ""high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "normal reach"" is more likely to be selected (70%). there is

In the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E4: super reach" includes ""high speed change (long)" + "low speed change" + "super reach" with an overall change time of "30 seconds", and "high speed change" + "low speed change" + "super reach". Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of "40 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in the "E4: Super reach" production mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is ""high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "super reach". "0 to 7" for "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" "8, 9", It has become.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 80%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo reach" is 80%. fluctuation”+“fast fluctuation (short)”+“pseudo fluctuation”+“super reach”” is set to be selected at a rate of 20%. Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is likely to be selected.

In the change pattern table for losing 202e1, "E5: Special reach" includes ""High speed change (long)" + "Low speed change" + "Special reach" with an overall change time of "40 seconds", Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of "50 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" "0 to 8" for "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "Special reach" is "9" .

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 90%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo reach" is 90%. fluctuation"+"fast fluctuation (short)"+"pseudo fluctuation"+"special reach"" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is likely to be selected.

It should be noted that the variation pattern at the time of failure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting the presence or absence of advance notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG.

The big hit variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected effect mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E6: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E7: super reach" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined for "reach", for "E8: special reach" referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined, and "E9: special variation" to be referred to when the "special variation" performance mode is determined are divided into A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of a jackpot random number counter C1 is a value (jackpot random number value) for a jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of a jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area and the game state at the time of start winning. , and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the big winning variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "E6: normal reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "normal reach" with an overall variation time of "20 seconds", and overall variation time is "25 seconds" with "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", and total fluctuation time is "30 seconds" with "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "Normal reach" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “normal reach” + “re-fluctuation”” are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" 0", "1, 2" against ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + " "3 to 5" against "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach", "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation ” + “Normal Reach” + “Revariation” is “6 to 9”.

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach"" is 10%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is 20%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation The pattern is 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "'Fast fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'Fast fluctuation (short)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'Normal reach' + 'Re-fluctuation'" is 40%. is set to be selected by

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the big hit, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation" is likely to be selected (40% of the total). However, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation", "high-speed fluctuation (Long) + “Pseudo Fluctuation” + “High Speed Fluctuation (Short)” + “Pseudo Fluctuation” + “Normal Reach”” can also be selected, so that you can expect a big hit from any variation pattern. can provide.

In the big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: super reach" includes ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" with an overall fluctuation time of "30 seconds", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of "35 seconds" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "40 seconds" )” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “super reach””, and “high speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “45 seconds” ” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Super reach” + “Re-fluctuation”” are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Super reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" "0, 1", "2 to 4" for ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "Fast Fluctuation (Short)" + "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "Super Reach"", "5, 6" )” + “pseudo-fluctuation” + “super reach” + “re-fluctuation”” is “7 to 9”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 20%, and ""high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" is 20%. The fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" is 30%, ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach "" fluctuation pattern is 20%, and "" high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation"" fluctuation pattern It is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern including the production element of "re-variation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re- fluctuation”, or “fast fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “super reach” + “re-fluctuation”) are likely to be selected (overall 60%). However, fluctuation patterns that do not include the production element of "re-fluctuation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach") or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach"") can be selected, thereby providing game characteristics in which a big win can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

In the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E8: special reach" includes "high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "special reach" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of "45 seconds" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "50 seconds" )” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “special reach””, and “high speed fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” with an overall fluctuation time of “55 seconds” ” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Special reach” + “Re-fluctuation”” are selectably prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: Special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" "0 to 2", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" + "Revariation", "3, 4", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + " "5 to 7" for "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short )” + “Pseudo Fluctuation” + “Special Reach” + “Re-fluctuation”” is “8, 9”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 30%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" is 30%. Fluctuation + “Special reach” + “Re-fluctuation” is 20%, and “High-speed fluctuation (long)” + “Pseudo-fluctuation” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo-fluctuation” + “Special reach” "" fluctuation pattern is 30%, and "" high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation"" fluctuation pattern It is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" production mode selected at the time of the big hit, the variation pattern that does not include the production element of "re-variation" (that is, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach") , ``fast fluctuation (long)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``fast fluctuation (short)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``super reach'''') are likely to be selected (60% of the total). However, fluctuation patterns that include the production element of "re-fluctuation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "High Speed Fluctuation (Short)" + "Pseudo Fluctuation" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation") can also be selected, so you can expect a big win from any fluctuation pattern. can provide sexuality.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of "movie" with a total variation time of "50 seconds" is prepared for "E9: special variation". In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "movie", and only "movie" is set to be selectable. That is, when the jackpot stop type is "2R probability variable jackpot", "movie" is always selected as the variation pattern.

When "movie" is selected by the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to "movie" is determined by the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the "movie", for example, "chicken" or "girl" is displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 (see FIG. 6A) of the third pattern display device 81. While the character is displayed, the third pattern is finally specified with a variation pattern in which the third pattern finally stops at a specific pattern (for example, "341"), or with the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp. It includes a variation pattern that stops at the symbol of.

In this way, when a big win is won, a comparatively long variation pattern is easily selected, thereby enhancing the performance contents of the variation performance in which a big win occurs, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to. In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, in the case of a loss, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the performance contents of the variation performance at the time of the loss and performing the variation performance. It can be digested efficiently.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or "reach display" before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, or if the reach is established , It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol that is to be stopped last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" is provided, but a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" is not provided, and "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R Only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of "ordinary jackpot" may be defined. In this case, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is selected as the jackpot type, "movie" may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, only "movie" is selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, but when "2R probability variable jackpot" is achieved, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns. It may be selected. In this case, like the "15R jackpot common" group, even in the group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot", the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected when "2R probability variable jackpot" occurs. Additionally, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain reservation area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in that reservation area.

In addition, among the presentation modes selected by the main controller 110, there may be provided a presentation mode in which a "pseudo change" presentation element is executed in which the number of pseudo stops (the number of stops of chance eye symbols) is performed two or more times. . Alternatively, the ``pseudo-variation'' effect element may not be executed, but the chance symbol may appear in the ``low-speed variation'' effect element to develop the ``pseudo-continue'' effect.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description continues. The hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). When the winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the winning random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). It is updated and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67. be. There are 50 random number values to be won, and the range is "5 to 54". That is, when the acquired value of the winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 54", it is determined that the winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 lights up the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 79 of the right special figure winning opening 78a is operated, and the right special figure winning opening 78a is opened only for a predetermined time.

On the other hand, if the obtained value of the winning counter C4 is not in the range of "5 to 54", that is, if it is in the range of "0 to 4" or "55 to 99", it is determined as a loss, and the second The pattern display device 83 lights up a symbol "x" as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 79 does not operate.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with various tables. And according to each of the tables 202a to 202e described above, the setting of the big winning lottery and the dynamic display in the first design display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect in the third design display device 81, the display in the second design display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as drawing of results can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203b shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, input/output It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output, hereinafter abbreviated as “I/O”) are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned on. A non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203c, a reserved ball execution area 203d, a main slump counter 203e, a reserve device drive flag 203f, and a reserve device drive timer 203g.

The number of pending balls counter 203a is the number of balls entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (hereinafter referred to as special figure winning Dynamic display of the first symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81) It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol variable effect corresponding to the first symbol.

This reserved ball counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S813 in FIG. 33) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning to one of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a is detected and the number of pending balls of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first symbol increases, 1 is added to the maximum value "4". (See S204 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the number of reserved balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first symbol (variation effect of the third symbol) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 28).

The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 27). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the first symbol dynamic display (variable effect) that is held by the main control device 110 by the pending ball number command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of suspensions of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first symbol without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time a starting winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, dynamic display (variation) of the first symbol managed by the voice ramp control device 113 is performed. Even if the number of pending balls in the production) deviates from the number of pending balls in the actual dynamic display (variable production) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold The number of balls command can correct the deviation.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display pending ball number command for notifying the pending ball number to the display control device 114 every time the internally managed pending ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved design in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third design display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 is used in the pending ball number command. However, according to the start winning that triggered the addition of the number of pending balls counter 203a, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a jackpot random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8) Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 is A number command is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 .

In the voice lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command are used to execute fluctuation effects based on the respective values. Before execution of the variable performance, it is determined what will happen to the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Then, based on the result of determination by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the contents and execution timing (timing) of the "holding change notice".

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which a pending ball number command indicating the pending ball number of the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like are separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the ball entry timing of the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, and based on the entry ball Commands similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (advance fluctuation pattern command and advance stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 . In this case, regarding the program for generating the advance variation pattern command and the advance stop type command, by using the program for the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to easily create the program.

As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203c stores a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern obtained from the counter buffer 203b upon detection of a starting prize in one of the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a. A memory for storing each value of the selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. MPU201, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), when it detects that the ball has won (started winning) to one of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, each counter C1 to C3 from the counter buffer 203b , CS1 are obtained and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas (reserved) so that data corresponding to one start winning of the first symbol (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times. 1st to 4th areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203d starts execution, sets the jackpot lottery of the first symbol being executed, sets the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and sets the dynamic display of the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance, the MPU 201 executes processing such as a big winning lottery, dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and variable performance setting of the third symbol display device 81. For this purpose, the data corresponding to one starting winning among the data corresponding to each starting winning stored in the above-described retained ball storage area 203c (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is used for this retained ball execution. Shift to area 203d. Note that the shift in the first embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d are used to set the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the variable performance of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by MPU 201 of main controller 110 .

As described above, for the setting of the first symbol jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the performance mode of the variable performance, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203c stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203b by the MPU 201 when the ball enters the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning).

The reserved ball storage area 203c is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 are combined in one reserved ball storage area 203c. , but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203c, the data (the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters one of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a (starting winning) is stored. Data can be stored up to a maximum of 4 times, but in that case, the data will be stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the empty areas of the 4 reservation areas (1st to 4th reservation areas). is stored. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a that are older in time are stored, and the first reserved area stores the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, Data corresponding to start-up wins to 78a will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203d is composed of only one area. Like the reserved ball storage area 203c, the reserved ball execution area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203c are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203d1 to 203d4 of the execution area 203d. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 29), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserve first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserve ball execution area 203d. Similarly, the random number in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the fluctuation type counter The random value in the storage area 203c4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4.

Then, when the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203d is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203c is stored (held). Shift processing is performed to shift the data to areas (first to third) whose area number is 1 smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203c.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203c. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. The main slump counter 203e is configured to be updatable within a predetermined range (“0 to 2” in the first embodiment), and is referred to by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not it is in a “slump state”. That is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0", the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 recognizes that it is in a "slump state" in which the "slump effect" is executed, and the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a are entered. A "slump effect" is executed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the start winning.

In the first embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is in the middle of a demonstration effect in which the variation effect or the "slump effect" is not performed, and a predetermined time (a time equivalent to the extension time) after the demonstration effect is started. In one embodiment, after "10 seconds" have elapsed, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to a predetermined value (ie, "2") to enter the "slump state" described above. Then, in the "slump state", when the balls start winning in the special symbol winning openings 77a and 78a, "slump performance" is executed in the third symbol display device 81 instead of the variable performance based on the starting winning. is configured to

The value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the "slump state" is entered, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2". On the other hand, the value of the main slump counter 203e, during the "slump state" (that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0"), 1 each based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a subtracted. That is, when a value larger than "0" is set in the main slump counter 203e, the MPU 201 increases the value of the main slump counter 203e (that is, , 2), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a "slump effect".

In addition, in the "slump state", if the obtained variation pattern of the variable effect is the "ready-to-reach display", the MPU 201 clears the value of the main slump counter 203e to "0". ' is eliminated, and the 'slump effect' is not performed based on subsequent start winnings. This is because the variation pattern including the "ready-to-win display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the starting winnings to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, so the variation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, until the third symbol display device 81 completes the effect and enters the "slump state" again, the subsequent effects are performed as the "normal state" instead of the "slump state".

Here, after setting the additional "slump effect", if a new start winning occurs during the execution of the "slump effect", if you try to set an additional "slump effect", "slump effect" Complicated processing is required in order to grasp the execution time of "effect" and to ensure the consistency of the effect, which may increase the processing load. In addition, when the number of pending variable effects is "2" or more, it is a situation where the effect can be continuously executed in the third pattern display device 81, so the "slump effect" is longer than the obtained effect time of the variable effect. , the effect of executing

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an additional start winning occurs during execution of the "slump effect" and the number of pending variable effects becomes "2" or more, the following It is configured to execute the variable production without executing the "slump production" in the production. By configuring in this way, in a situation where the effect of executing the "slump production" is poor (that is, in a state where the number of suspensions of the variable production is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable production is executed without executing the "slump production". Since there is no need to perform complicated processing for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The holding device drive flag 203f is a flag indicating that the holding device solenoid 73f of the holding device 73 is to be driven in the ON state. In the first embodiment, when the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 and winning the dummy winning opening 75 are satisfied, the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON, and the holding device drive described later. The value of the timer 203g is set ("1250" in the first embodiment). After that, the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is subtracted each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) of the main control device 110 is performed, and when the value reaches a predetermined value (that is, "0"), The holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined time ("2000 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). When the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released and flows into the dummy prize winning port 75 provided downstream.

The holding device driving flag 203f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the first embodiment, the "slump state" is entered, the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0" (for example, "2"), and the ball is placed in the holding device 73 by the holding ball detection switch 73g. is detected as being suspended, and when the ball starts winning to the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, if the production mode of the variable production based on the starting winning does not generate "reach display", " In the "slump effect", a plurality of effect elements (for example, a "gase quasi-continuous" effect) are executed in which the main suspension display or the dummy suspension display is terminated. Therefore, in order to make the ball held in the holding device 73 enter the dummy winning hole 75 in order to match the content of the effect with the main holding display or the dummy holding display, the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on. It is set (see S211 in FIG. 27).

In the first embodiment, when the ball is not detected by the holding ball detection switch 73g in the "slump state" and the ball is not held in the holding device 73, there is a ball to enter the dummy winning hole 75. do not have. Therefore, even if the ball is won in the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding device solenoid 73f is not driven. The drive flag 203f is left off.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump state" is "reach display", the "slump effect" is executed However, since it is configured to execute a "pseudo-continuous" effect that does not erase one executed symbol and does not execute a "gase pseudo-continuous" effect that erases one executed symbol, it is a dummy pending display in the first place. There is no need to display the pattern. Therefore, even if the ball starts winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", when the fluctuation pattern of the acquired fluctuation effect includes "reach display", the holding device solenoid 73f The holding device drive flag 203f is left off so as not to drive it.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on, a value ("1250" in the first embodiment) is set to the holding device driving timer 203g, which will be described later. The holding device drive flag 203f is turned on in the holding device control processing (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) of the main control unit 110 executed every 4 milliseconds. If so, the value of the holding device drive timer 203g, which will be described later, is decremented. Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0", the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period ("2000 milliseconds" in the first embodiment) (see S504 in FIG. 30). , the ball held in the holding device 73 is surely released by turning on for the predetermined period, the ball is made to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding device driving flag 203f is set to be off. (See S505 in FIG. 30).

The holding device drive timer 203g is a timer for measuring the time from when the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on until the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on. When the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" while the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on, the MPU 201 determines that it is time to release the ball held in the holding device 73. is configured to drive (that is, turn on) the holding device solenoid 73f for a predetermined period of time.

The holding device drive timer 203g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the ball enters the "slump state" and the ball is held in the holding device 73 and the ball starts winning to the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, the production mode of the variable production based on the starting winning is " If it is not a variation pattern that generates "ready-to-win display", the above-described suspension device drive flag 203f is set to ON (see S211 in FIG. 27) in order to enter the suspended ball into the dummy winning opening 75 "1250" is set in the device driving timer 203g.

Thereafter, the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on in the holding device control processing (see FIG. 30) executed within the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) of the main control unit 110 which is executed every 4 milliseconds. In this case, the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is decremented by "1". Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" (that is, "5 seconds" after the start of the "slump effect"), the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period (in the first embodiment, "2000 milliseconds") is turned on (see S504 in FIG. 30), the ball held in the holding device 73 is released, and after about "1 second" from there, that is, the "first effect" in the "slump effect" , the ball released from the holding device 73 is made to flow into the dummy winning hole 75 ``six seconds later'' from the start of .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a series of "slump effects", execution of the "slump effect" in which the displayed execution symbols and reserved symbols and a plurality of effect elements are executed. In order to match the number of times, when a predetermined time ("6 seconds" in the first embodiment) has passed since the ball started winning the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a and the "slump effect" was started, A ball held in a holding device 73 is made to enter a dummy prize winning opening 75 to display a reserved pattern as a dummy reserved display. Then, every time one performance unit (“gase quasi-continuous” performance) of a series of “slump performances” is completed, the execution pattern is erased, and the pending pattern, which is a dummy pending display, is moved to the execution pattern and moved. By starting one performance unit in the next ``slump performance'' based on the executed pattern, one performance unit in the ``slump performance'' is completed, as if the variable performance was completed once. perform the performance. By configuring in this way, the dynamic effect time of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, and the dynamic effect time of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is increased. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest and improve the interest of the game by reducing the situation in which the dramatic performance is not performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls in the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 is the same three. By constructing in this way, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based only on the number of awarded balls. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is during the variable effect in the "normal state" or the "slump effect" in the "slump state" based only on the number of awarded balls. Since it is not possible to discriminate whether it is ", it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity and losing interest in the game even when a "slump performance" is performed for a longer time than the actual variation time of the variable performance. can do.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large winning opening solenoid for driving to open and close forward, an electric accessory solenoid for driving the electric accessory 79, and a holding device solenoid 73f provided in the above-described holding device 73 are connected. The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to them via the input/output port 205 .

As described above, the holding device solenoid 73f provided in the holding device 73 moves the lock piece 73e from the rear wall 73d (see FIG. 5) into the passage of the holding device 73 (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) in the OFF state. It is a driving mechanism for making the lock piece 73e protruded and making the lock piece 73e receded into the rear wall 73d in the ON state.

When the locking piece 73e driven by the retaining device solenoid 73f protrudes from the rear wall 73d (that is, when the retaining device solenoid 73f is turned off), the retained ball retaining portion 73b is opened by the retaining portion locking portion 73e1 of the locking piece 73e. (See FIG. 5) is prevented from rotating downward, and the state in which the ball is held in the holding device 73 is maintained. On the other hand, when the locking piece 73e driven by the retaining device solenoid 73f is retracted into the rear wall 73d (that is, when the retaining device solenoid 73f is turned on), the retained ball holding portion by the retaining portion locking portion 73e1 of the locking piece 73e Since the lower support of 73b is removed, the ball holding portion 73b is allowed to rotate downward, and the ball held in the ball holding portion 73b flows down the holding device 73. , flows into the dummy winning port 75 .

Also, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later, and a held ball detection switch provided in the holding device 73. 73g is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. FIG.

The held ball detection switch 73g is an optical detection switch for detecting whether or not a ball exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element as described above. When this is detected, an ON signal is output to the MPU 201 . On the other hand, when it detects that the ball does not exist between the light receiving element and the light emitting element, it outputs an off signal to the MPU 201 . Therefore, the MPU 201 can recognize whether or not the ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection output of the held ball detection switch 73g.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Also, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like. In the first embodiment, commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and commands cannot be transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to exchange commands with each other.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 so as to change the back image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and displays the third pattern on the display control device 114 based on the depression of the frame button 22. The display device 81 is instructed to display.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and " "Slump production", which controls continuous advance notice production.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, detailed electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a pending change table 222e, at least a slump effect table 222f is stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 is obtained from the counter buffer 203b with the start winning in the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type that are transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, pending display setting processing (see FIG. 38), which is prefetch processing, is executed. Also, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a hold display setting process, which is also a look-ahead process, based on a dummy hold command transmitted with the winning of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75 in the main controller 110 .

Then, by this pending display setting process (see FIG. 38), what kind of effect will the pending variable effect or "slump effect" that is the target of the look-ahead process be as a result (whether it will be a big hit or not) , Whether or not it will be a "reach display", etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect or the "slump effect", and the execution of various effects is determined. It executes control to determine the contents of the presentation (and execution time (timing)) of the notice.

Further, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a slump command, which will be described later, indicating that the "slump state" has started from the main control device 110, and after receiving a variation pattern command, the slump effect table 222f , and execute control related to the "slump effect".

The details of the hold change table 222e and the slump effect table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, a dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, a reservation change counter 223d, a reservation display information storage area 223e, a sub-slump flag 223f, a slump effect timer 223g, and a slump effect storage area 223h. , a pending information storage area 223i and an execution information storage area 223j are provided.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation performance should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1507 in FIG. 40). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect or "slump effect" is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1602 in FIG. 42).

When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, if there is a waiting fluctuation production or a "slump production", performs the waiting fluctuation production or the "slump production". is performed (see FIG. 42).

The sub-reserved ball number counter 223b, like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is configured so as to count only the number of times of suspension of the actually performed variable effect, and not to count the number of times of performance unit of "slump effect" 1.

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and manages the number of pending balls by the sub pending ball number counter 223b. there is

Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of pending balls of the variable effect by entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and the value of the pending ball number counter 203a in the main controller 110 is added. When the pending ball number command sent from the main controller 110 is received in the case, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command (that is, the main controller 110 The number of pending balls of the suspended variable effect) is stored in the sub-holding ball number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37).

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the pending ball counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110. Along with this, when the mode of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1613 in FIG. 42). In this way, in accordance with the command transmitted from the main controller 110 in accordance with the update of the pending ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b. While synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated.

The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is used together with the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, which will be described later, to display reserved symbols and execution symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37), or receives the dummy reserve command. Or update the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g described later (see S1207 in FIG. 37 or S1113 in FIG. At the timing when the value of the pending ball counter 223b is updated (see S1613 in FIG. 42), the stored or updated sub pending ball counter 223b value and the later-described dummy pending ball counter 223c value are displayed. In order to notify the control device 114, a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S1304 in FIG. 38 or S1615 in FIG. 42).

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b and the dummy pending ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 The pending symbols for the value and the execution symbols indicating one effect unit of the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. so that it controls the drawing of the image.

As described above, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, in a game state other than the "slump state", that is, in the "normal state", the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also determined by the main control. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 a of the device 110 . Therefore, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to accurately display the number of held balls for which the variable effect is held.

The dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the dummy winning hole 75 in the "slump state". That is, the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is configured so as to count only the number of reserved balls in one effect unit of the "slump effect" and not to count the number of reserved balls in the variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) is displayed based on the sum of the value of the dummy ball counter 223c and the value of the sub ball counter 223b. , the pending design and the execution design are displayed, and if it is not the "slump state", the execution of the variable production and the remaining number of executions are shown, while the "slump production" in the "slump state" is executed. It is configured to indicate the execution and remaining number of executions of a plurality of performance units in the "slump presentation".

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the dummy hold command transmitted from the main controller 110, it adds 1 to the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 37). In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 ends the "first effect" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation"), which is the first effect unit of the "slump effect". When the timing is reached and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than "0", 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1113 in FIG. 36).

That is, in the "slump state", when the "slump effect" is started based on the start winning of the ball to the special prize winning openings 77a, 78a, "6 Seconds later, the ball retained in the retaining device 73 is released toward the dummy winning opening 75 and enters the dummy winning opening 75. - 特許庁Then, the main controller 110 transmits a dummy hold command to the audio lamp controller 113 when it detects that the ball has entered the dummy winning hole 75 . The audio ramp control device 113 receives a dummy hold command from the main controller 110 at a stage of about "6 seconds" from the start of the "first effect" in the "slump effect", and based on the reception, the number of dummy hold balls. One is added to the value of the counter 223c. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display pending ball number command based on the total value of the added value of the dummy pending ball counter 223c and the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b, and the display control device 114 Send to

In addition, the audio ramp control device 113 measures the timing at which one performance unit ends from the start of the "slump effect", that is, the timing at which one "gase quasi-continuous" effect ends with a slump effect timer 223g, which will be described later. At the timing when the "guess pseudo-run" effect of 1 ends (according to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, which will be described later), the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display pending ball number command based on the total value of the subtracted value of the dummy pending ball counter 223c and the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b, and the display control device 114 Send to

As described above, when the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub pending ball number counter 223b and the dummy pending ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The reserved symbols corresponding to the value of the number-of-balls counter 223c and the executed symbols indicating the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. so that it controls the drawing of the image.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a larger number of reserved symbols than the actual number of reserved balls in the variable effect in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)), and to execute the actual variable effect. Even when the ``slump presentation'' is performed more times, consistency between each presentation unit of the ``slump presentation'' and the reserved pattern can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the performance of the lottery for winning or losing is performed more times than the actual number of variable performances without any discrepancies in the performance.

It should be noted that the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c is configured to be incremented by 1 in a series of "slump effects", and to be decremented by 1 with execution of 1 unit of effect in the "slump effect". is configured to That is, the value of the dummy ball number counter 223c becomes "1" at the maximum with the series of "slump effect", and is configured so as not to become "2" or more.

The pending change counter 223d is a counter that randomly determines whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" in the pending symbols and the execution symbols in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the "suspension change notice", the display colors of the pending symbols and the executed symbols are changed from the normal display mode of white to the blue display mode of "blue" and the green display mode. or "red" in the display form of red.

As described above, the sound ramp control device 113, according to the pending ball number command received from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot Prefetching can be performed based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead processing based on the command of the number of reserved balls, the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the command of the number of reserved balls is grasped, and based on the performance mode, the "reservation change notice" is performed by the retention change counter 223d and the reservation change table 222e. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not

Further, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process based on the dummy hold command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command. In the pre-reading process based on the dummy pending command, whether the "slump effect" to be executed is appropriate or not, and based on the appropriateness, the pending change counter 223d and the pending change table 222e are referred to determine whether or not to perform the "suspended change notice". is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the "suspension change notice" even in the suspension pattern related to the "slump effect" and to enrich the variations of the effect.

This pending change counter 223d is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter updating process (see S1118 in FIG. 36) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value from "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the pending change counter 223d is updated (eg, incremented by 1) once each time the main process loops (see S1117 in FIG. 36).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a pending ball number command or a dummy pending command is received from the main controller 110, a pending display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed, and the pending ball number command is The production mode of the variable production shown or the validity of the "slump production" indicated by the dummy hold command is grasped, and based on the grasped content, the value of the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e are referred to. Whether or not execution of "prediction of change" and display mode are determined. Then, whether or not to execute the determined "holding change notice" and the display mode are stored in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c. be. Details of the pending display information storage area 223e will be described later.

Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a pending ball number command or a dummy pending command from the main controller 110, it refers to the pending change table 222e based on the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time, and performs "holding change It is determined whether or not to perform "notice" and the change color (display mode) of "notice of pending change". As shown in FIG. 18, the pending change table 222e is grouped based on the appropriateness of the effect to be executed and the selected effect mode.

Specifically, for "slump effect" at the time of loss, for "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss, for "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, and for "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, For the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing, for the "slump production" at the time of the big hit, for the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, for the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, and for the "special" at the time of the big hit It is divided into the "reach" effect mode and the "special variation" effect mode at the time of the big hit. A possible value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each divided group.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of "green" of the "hold change notice" is a production mode including one of the "reach display" (that is, "normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode, or production element of "Which reach" as "slump production"), or production mode in which "jackpot display" occurs (for example, "special fluctuation" production mode) is configured to be selected for In other words, as the "holding change notice", when the reserved pattern or the execution pattern of the display mode of "green" is displayed, in the variable production or "slump production" corresponding to the reserved pattern or the execution pattern, at least either It is configured to determine that the performance mode including the "ready-to-reach display" is executed. By configuring in this way, when the reserved pattern in the display mode of "green" appears as the "hold change notice", the player is convinced that at least the "ready to win display" in which a big win can occur will be executed. Until the start of the variable performance or ``slump performance'' corresponding to the reserved pattern, the player's mood can be lifted based on the expectation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "red" display mode of the "holding change notice" is only in the case of the "super reach" production mode, the "special reach" production mode, or the "special fluctuation" production mode. configured to be selected. In other words, as the "suspension change notice", when the "red" display mode of the pending pattern or the execution pattern is displayed, in the variable production or "slump production" corresponding to the holding pattern or the execution pattern, "super reach ' effect mode, 'special reach' effect mode or 'special change' effect mode is determined to be executed. With this configuration, when the reserved pattern of the display mode of "red" appears as the "prediction of change of reservation", the player is convinced that the performance mode in which a big win is likely to occur will be executed. Until the start of the variable performance or "slump performance" corresponding to the reserved pattern, the player's mood can be raised based on the expectation, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pending change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of losing, the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol as the "suspended change notice" is 1 of "none" which does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Only one display mode is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the display mode. That is, in the case of the "slump effect" at the time of losing, the display mode of "none" is selected without omission. In the first embodiment, when "none" is selected in which the color of the reserved design or the executed design does not change, the display mode of the reserved design or the executed design remains "white", and the reserved design or the executed design is "suspended". "Change notice" is not executed.

That is, in the "slump effect" at the time of losing, the color of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is changed to "blue", which changes to blue, "green", which changes to green, and "red", which changes to red. is not selected, the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated.

This is because, as the first reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "suspension change notice", if the color of the pending symbol or the execution symbol is "green" or "red", the pending symbol Or it is a specification that determines that one of the "ready-to-win display" is executed in the variable effect indicated by the execution pattern. For this reason, in the "slump effect" at the time of losing, which does not necessarily mean that the "ready-to-win display" is executed, even though the reserved pattern or the executed pattern in the display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed, If the "ready-to-win display" is not executed in the "slump effect" corresponding to the reserved symbol or the executed symbol, the contents of the effect may be inconsistent and the player may be confused.

Therefore, in the reserved pattern or the executed pattern corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the reserved pattern or the executed pattern of the display mode of "none (white)" that does not cause inconsistency even if the "ready-to-win display" is not executed is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance without causing unnecessary confusion for the player.

In addition, as the second reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect obtained based on the start winning of the ball to the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is "reach display". In the case of the effect mode including, since the ball reserved in the reservation device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, the reserved pattern or the execution pattern as the dummy reserved display is not displayed, instead (dummy winning opening At the timing when the ball will enter 75), the display mode of "holding change notice" is increased by 1 rank (for example, the display mode is changed from "none" to "blue"). there is Therefore, if the display mode of the highest order (that is, the display mode of "red") is selected as the display mode of the pending pattern or the execution pattern, the display mode cannot be increased by one rank, and the effect Content may be inconsistent. In addition, when the display mode changes from "blue" to "green", or when the display mode changes from "green" to "red", the expected jackpot of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern As a result, there is a risk that the player will have excessive expectations for a big win despite the "ready-to-win display" that is a failure.

Therefore, even if the display mode is one rank up in the reserved pattern or the execution pattern corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of failure, the "ready-to-reach display" is not confirmed for the "blue" display mode. It is not intended to incite the expectation of a big hit excessively. Therefore, by displaying the reserved pattern or the executed pattern in the display mode of ``none (white)'' which does not cause any discrepancy in the content of the performance, the player is provided with an easy-to-understand performance without causing unnecessary confusion. can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of production units are executed in the "slump production", but the "suspended change notice" of the "slump production" is a reserved symbol or It is configured to collectively determine the display mode of the executed symbols. By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to perform a lottery for the ``suspension change notice'' for each performance unit of the ``slump effect'', and the control regarding the ``suspension change notice'' during the ``slump effect'' can be simplified. , which facilitates the creation of programs and reduces the processing load.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the suspension change counter 223d in the "slump effect" at the time of failure and the "suspension change notice" are associated with "0 to 99" for the display mode of "none". there is Since values are not assigned to the display modes of "blue", "green" and "red", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of failure is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 100%, the display mode of "blue", "green" and "red" is 0%, is set to be selected at a rate of

Therefore, in the "suspended change notice" selected at the time of "slump effect" at the time of loss, only the display mode of "none" is selected, and only when the display mode of the suspended pattern or the execution pattern is increased by one rank, the "suspended change A notice” is generated, and the setting is such that it is difficult for the “holding change notice” itself to occur.

In the pending change table 222e, the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of losing is "none" in which the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol as the "suspended change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). , and "blue" which changes to blue are selectably prepared, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

It should be noted that the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated with the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of losing so that the display modes of "green" and "red" are not selected. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "holding change notice", if the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "green" or "red", the reserved symbol or This is because it is a specification that determines that any of the effects modes including the "ready-to-win display" is executed in the variable effects indicated by the execution symbols. Therefore, in the "non-ready-to-win" effect mode in which none of the "ready-to-win display" is executed, the "green" or "red" display mode of the "hold change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "non-reach" production mode at the time of losing and the "holding change notice" is "0 to 98" for the "none" display mode, It is "99" for the display mode of "blue". Since no values are assigned to the display modes of "green" and "red", they are indicated as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 99%, "blue" display mode is 1%, "green" and "red ” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the “hold change notice” selected in the “non-reach” production mode at the time of losing, the “none” display mode is likely to be selected (99%), and the “hold change notice” itself is less likely to occur. It is set.

In the pending change table 222e, three display modes of "none", "blue" and "green" of "hold change notice" are selectably prepared for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of losing, and each display mode is prepared. is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d. In addition, in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode does not appear. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of "red" is not selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "holding change notice" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing is "0 to 79", " "80 to 89" for the display mode of "blue" and "90 to 99" for the display mode of "green". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 80%, "blue" display mode is 10%, and "green" display mode is "10%" and "red" are set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "none" display mode is more likely to be selected (80%), but the "blue ” is set (1%→20%) so that the display mode is easily selected. In addition, in the ``suspension change notice'' selected in the ``normal reach'' presentation mode at the time of failure, the ``green'' display mode, which is not selected in the ``non-reach'' presentation mode at the time of failure, is set to be selected. Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of failure is performed, it can be said that the "hold change notice" is more likely to be executed than when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of failure is performed.

In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" of "hold change notice" are selectable for the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing. , and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "super ready-to-win" production mode at the time of failure and the "holding change notice" are associated with "0 to 19" for the display mode of "none", "20 to 79" for the "blue" display mode, "80 to 89" for the "green" display mode, and "90 to 99" for the "red" display mode.

That is, when the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 60%, and the display mode of "green" is set to be selected at a rate of 10% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "blue" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss (20% → 60% ). In addition, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "red" display mode that is not selected in the "non-reach" production mode and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of failure is selected. It is set. On the other hand, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is selected rather than the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss or the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss. setting (99% or 80%→20%). Therefore, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of failure is performed, compared with the case where the "non-reach" effect mode or the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of failure is performed, the "hold change notice" is easily executed. It can be said that there is.

In addition, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, compared to the case where the "non-reach" production mode and "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss are performed, "green" or " The display mode of "red" is configured to be easily selected. As described above, the "super reach" production mode is a production mode in which the "jackpot display" is more likely to appear than the "normal reach" production mode. At the stage when the display mode appears, it is possible to foresee the occurrence of the ``super reach'' production mode in which the ``big win display'' can be expected, and to make the player have a sense of expectation for the ``jackpot display''. can improve the interest of

In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" of "hold change notice" are selectable for the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing. , and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "special ready-to-win" rendering mode at the time of losing and the "holding change notice" is "0 to 9" for the display mode of "none", "10 to 59" for the "blue" display mode, "60 to 79" for the "green" display mode, and "80 to 99" for the "red" display mode.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of losing is selected, the "hold change notice" is "none" display mode is 10%, "blue" display mode is 50%, and "green" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 20% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss (respectively 10% → 20%). In addition, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, similar to the "super reach" production mode, it is not selected in the "non-reach" production mode and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss. The setting is such that the display mode of "red" is selected. On the other hand, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, " The setting (99%, 80% or 20%→10%) makes it difficult to select the display mode of "none". Therefore, when the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss is performed, compared to the case where the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode or the "super reach" production mode is performed, the "hold change notice ” can be said to be a configuration that can be easily executed.

In addition, in the "hold change notice" selected during the "special reach" production mode when losing, compared to the case where the "non-reach" production mode, "normal reach" production mode, and "super reach" production mode are performed when losing Therefore, the display mode of "green" or "red" can be easily selected. As described above, the "special reach" production mode is a production mode with a higher possibility of "jackpot display" appearing than the "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode, so as a "suspension change notice" At the stage when the ``green'' or ``red'' display mode appears, the occurrence of the ``special reach display'', which is the ``ready-reach display'' in which the ``jackpot display'' can be most expected, is foreseen, and the ``jackpot display'' is displayed. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the hold change table 222e, three display modes of "no", "blue" and "green" of the "hold change notice" are selectably prepared for the "slump effect" at the time of the big win. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith. Since no value is assigned to the display mode of "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no suspension change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "green" is 10%. %, the display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of "red" is not selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, this is obtained based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", similar to the case where the "slump effect" at the time of losing is selected. When the given variable performance is a performance mode including "ready-to-win display", the ball held in the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, so that the holding pattern or the execution pattern as the dummy holding display is displayed. Instead, the display mode of "pending change notice" is increased by one rank (for example, the display mode is changed from "none" to "blue"). Therefore, if the display mode of the highest order (that is, the display mode of "red") is selected as the display mode of the pending pattern or the execution pattern, the display mode cannot be increased by one rank, and the effect Content may be inconsistent. Therefore, in the reserved pattern or the execution pattern corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, even if the display mode is ranked up by 1, the display mode other than the highest level (that is, "none (white) , 'blue' or 'green' display modes) are displayed so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "slump effect" at the time of the big win and the "holding change notice" is "0 to 9" and "blue ", and "90 to 99" for the "green" display mode. Since no value is assigned to the display mode of "red", it is written as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no suspension change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "green" is 10%. %, and the display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the ``suspension change notice'' selected in the ``slump performance'' at the time of the big win, the display mode of ``blue'' or ``green'' which is not selected in the ``slump performance'' at the time of losing is set to be selected. On the other hand, in the "holding change notice" that is selected during the "slump effect" at the time of the big win, the display mode of "none" is less likely to be selected than the "slump effect" at the time of losing (100% → 10%). there is Therefore, when the "slump effect" is performed at the time of the big win, it can be said that the "hold change notice" is more likely to be executed than when the "slump effect" is performed at the time of the loss.

In addition, in the ``suspension change notice'' selected during the ``slump effect'' at the time of the big win, the display mode of ``blue'' or ``green'', which is not selected in the ``slump effect'' at the time of losing, is selected. . Therefore, by executing the ``slump effect'' after the appearance of the ``blue'' or ``green'' display mode as the ``pending change notice'', the occurrence of the ``jackpot display'' can be foreseen. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "suspended change notice" of the "slump effect" collectively determines the display mode of the pending symbols or the execution symbols corresponding to the plurality of effect units. is configured to By configuring in this way, there is no need to perform a lottery for the "suspension change notice" for each of a plurality of performance units in the series of "slump effects", and the control regarding the "suspension change notice" during the "slump effect" can be simplified. This makes it easier to create a program and reduces the processing load. In addition, when a ``slump performance'' of a big hit is performed, and when the execution lottery of ``suspension change notice'' is won, ``suspension change notice'' may occur continuously in a plurality of reserved patterns or execution patterns. Therefore, if "reservation change notice" occurs in multiple reserved patterns or execution patterns, and "reach display" etc. do not occur in the production element corresponding to the previous reserved pattern, "jackpot" It is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for the "display" and improve the amusement of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" are selectably prepared for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win. is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "holding change notice" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 9", " "10 to 19" for the display mode of "blue", "20 to 49" for the display mode of "green", and "50 to 99" for the display mode of "red".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the "holding change notice" is 10% of the display mode of "none", 10% of the "blue" display mode, and 10% of the "green" display mode. 30%, and the display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the ``suspension change notice'' selected in the ``normal reach'' performance mode at the time of big win, the ``red'' display mode which is not selected in the ``normal reach'' performance mode at the time of losing is set to be selected. On the other hand, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the setting (80% → 10%) that the "none" display mode is less likely to be selected than the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing. It's becoming Therefore, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of big win is performed, it can be said that the "hold change notice" is more likely to be executed than when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed.

In addition, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the display mode of "green" or "red" is selected compared to the case where the "normal reach" production mode at the time of losing is performed. In particular, it is set to select the “red” display mode that is not selected in the “normal reach” production mode at the time of losing. Therefore, after the “red” display mode appears as the “suspension change notice”, the variable performance to be targeted does not develop into the “super reach” performance mode, and the variable performance ends only with the “normal reach” performance mode. In that case, the "jackpot display" is confirmed at that time. Since the display mode of "red" of "hold change notice" is a configuration that is likely to be selected in the "super reach" production mode or "special reach" production mode, the player can When the display mode is recognized, occurrence of a "super reach" performance mode or the like in which a "super reach" performance element is generated after a "normal reach" performance element is performed is foreseen. However, contrary to the foresight, by making the ``big win display'' appear in the ``normal reach'' effect element, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, when the effect element of "normal reach" is being executed in a state where the display mode of "red" is displayed, the "big win display" is displayed by ending the variable effect with the effect element of "normal reach". Therefore, during the execution of the effect element of "normal reach", the player does not develop into the effect element of "super reach", etc., and creates a game property such as whether or not the variable effect ends as it is. can improve the interest of

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" are selectably prepared for the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big win. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "super ready-to-win" presentation mode at the time of the big win and the "holding change notice" is "0 to 9" for the display mode "none", "10 to 19" for the "blue" display mode, "20 to 59" for the "green" display mode, and "60 to 99" for the "red" display mode.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "green". is set to be selected at a rate of 40% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "holding change notice" selected in the "super reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "super reach" production mode at the time of losing (respectively 10% → 40%). That is, even with the same "super reach" effect mode, the selection rate of "suspension change notice" is changed at the time of losing and at the time of big win, and especially at the time of big win, the display mode of "green" or "red" is changed at the time of losing. Make it easier to select. Then, after displaying the "green" or "red" display mode, by executing the "super reach" production mode in which a "jackpot display" can be expected from the "normal reach" production mode, the "suspension change notice" is executed. Together with the display contents, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the "big win display", and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" are selectably prepared for the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big win. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "holding change notice" in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 9" for the display mode of "none", "10 to 29" for the "blue" display mode, "30 to 69" for the "green" display mode, and "70 to 99" for the "red" display mode.

That is, when the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit is selected, the "holding change notice" is 10% of the display mode of "none", 20% of the display mode of "blue", and 20% of the display mode is "green". is set to be selected at a rate of 40% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of the big hit, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "special reach" production mode at the time of losing (respectively 20%→40% or 30%). That is, even with the same "special reach" effect mode, the selection rate of "suspension change notice" is changed at the time of losing and at the time of big win, and in particular, the display mode of "green" or "red" at the time of losing Make it easier to select. Then, after displaying the ``green'' or ``red'' display mode, the ``special reach'' performance mode in which a ``jackpot display'' can be expected from the ``normal reach'' performance mode or the ``super reach'' performance mode is executed. Together with the display contents of the "pending change notice", the player can have a sense of anticipation for the "big win display", and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green" and "red" are selectably prepared for the "special variation" effect mode at the time of the big win. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated therewith.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "holding change notice" in the "special change" production mode at the time of the big win is "0 to 69" for the "none" display mode, "70 to 79" for the "blue" display mode, "80 to 89" for the "green" display mode, and "90 to 99" for the "red" display mode.

That is, when the "special variation" production mode at the time of the jackpot is selected (when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won), the display mode of "no pending change notice" is 70%, and the display of "blue" The mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, the "green" display mode at 10%, and the "red" display mode at 10%.

Therefore, in the "suspended change notice" selected in the "special change" production mode at the time of the big win, the "none" display mode is likely to be selected (70%), and the "blue", "green" or "red" display mode is likely to be selected. are set to be selected evenly (10%), it is difficult for the "holding change notice" to occur.

In this way, the sound lamp control device 113, when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, grasps the propriety of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command and the effect mode, and based on the propriety and the effect mode It is configured to determine whether or not execution of the "suspension change notice" and the display mode for the suspension symbol, which is the main suspension display, is performed. By configuring in this way, the result of the variable performance is suggested to the player by the pending symbol before the variable performance is executed, and the variable performance suspended by the player is displayed until the variable performance is executed. By predicting whether or not a jackpot will be achieved, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when receiving a dummy hold command from the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the same pre-reading process as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command for the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display. It is configured to determine whether or not to execute "hold change notice" and the display mode. By constructing in this way, in a series of "slump effects", before the execution of the effect element corresponding to the dummy pending display, the result of the effect element is suggested to the player by the pending symbol, and the effect element is executed. The interest in the game can be enhanced by making the player predict whether or not one performance unit of the 'slump performance' reserved until the game will become a big win.

Furthermore, by executing the same “hold change notice” in the fluctuation production and the “slump production”, it is difficult to distinguish between the fluctuation production and the “slump production”, and the “slump production” is executed to obtain To make it difficult for a player to distinguish between a variable performance and a ``slump performance'' even when the dynamic performance time of a third pattern in a third pattern display device 81 is lengthened beyond the fluctuation time of the variable performance. , the effect of executing the "slump effect" can be maintained.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The pending display information storage area 223e is an area for storing pending change information indicating the display mode of "holding change notice" of pending symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)). be.

Details of the pending display information storage area 223e will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending display information storage area 223e. As shown in FIG. 19, the pending display information storage area 223e has six areas, an execution pending display area 223e0 and first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5. The execution suspension display area 223e0 and the first to fifth suspension display areas 223e1 to 223e5 (hereinafter, the execution suspension display area 223e0 and the first to fifth suspension display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are referred to as "each suspension display area 223e0 to 223e5"). There is a case) stores the presence or absence of a variable effect or a "slump effect" and the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice".

The execution pending display area 223e0 is an area for storing pending change information corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" currently being executed. Also, the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are areas for storing pending change information corresponding to maximum five suspended variable effects and "slump effects", respectively.

Specifically, the execution pending display area 223e0 is an area corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved display area 223e1 is an area corresponding to the temporally first reserved variable effect or "slump effect" among the reserved variable effects or "slump effects". Further, the second reserved display area 223e2 is an area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable effect or "slump effect" among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects". Further, the third pending display area 223e3 is an area corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" that is suspended the third oldest in terms of time among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects". Furthermore, the fourth pending display area 223e4 is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest suspended variable effect or "slump effect" among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects". In addition, the fifth reserved display area 223e5 is an area corresponding to the temporally fifth oldest suspended variable performance or "slump performance" among the suspended variable performance or "slump performance".

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving the pending ball number command from the main control unit 110, grasps the propriety of the variable effect indicated by the pending ball number command and the effect mode, Based on this, it is configured to determine and store whether or not execution of the "suspension change notice" and the display mode for the pending symbol which is the main pending display is performed. In addition, when receiving a dummy hold command from the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the same pre-reading process as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command for the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display. It is configured to determine and store whether or not execution of "suspended change notice" and display mode are determined.

Specifically, upon receiving the pending ball number command, the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b is updated based on the pending ball number included in the pending ball number command, and when the dummy pending command is received, the dummy pending ball number Update the value of the counter 223c. Then, based on the values of the pending change table 222e and the pending change counter 223d, the pending change information is extracted to determine the display mode of the "holding change notice", and the extracted pending change information is the updated sub-holding ball. Stored in one of the first to fifth reservation display areas 223e1 to 223e5 corresponding to the sum of the value of the number counter 223b and the value of the dummy ball number counter 223c.

In addition, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command meaning the start of the variation production from the main control device 110, or recognizes that it is the start timing of the "slump production", each Shift processing is executed in the reserved display areas 223e0 to 223e5.

That is, the performance unit of the suspended variable performance or "slump performance" is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance or "slump performance" suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first suspension is performed. The pending change information stored in the first pending display area 223e1 corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" is displayed in the execution pending display area 223e0 corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed (starting execution). move to

Also, the pending change information stored in the second pending display area 223e2 is moved to the first pending display area 223e1, and the pending change information stored in the third pending display area 223e3 is moved to the second pending display area 223e2. to move the pending change information stored in the fourth pending display area 223e4 to the third pending display area 223e3, and move the pending change information stored in the fifth pending display area 223e5 to the fourth pending display area 223e4. Let

As a result, the execution suspension display area 223e0 stores the suspension change information regarding the variable performance or the "slump performance" being executed (executed), and the first suspension display area 223e1 stores the most Reservation change information corresponding to the old suspended variable performance or "slump performance" is stored, and the second suspension display area 223e2 corresponds to the second oldest suspended variable performance or "slump performance" in terms of time. Suspension change information is stored, and in the third suspension display area 223e3, suspension change information corresponding to the temporally third oldest suspended variable effect or "slump effect" is stored, and in the fourth suspension display area 223e4 stores pending change information corresponding to the fourth-oldest suspended variable effect or "slump effect" in terms of time, and the fifth pending display area 223e5 stores the fifth-oldest suspended variable effect in terms of time Alternatively, hold change information corresponding to "slump effect" is stored.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "slump state", the "slump effect" that performs more effect units than the acquired variable effect execution count is executed. 1") and the maximum pending number (that is, "4"), which is greater than the total number (that is, "5") (that is, "6", which is the maximum number of executions of each production unit in the series of "slump production" ) are provided, and only information (that is, pending change information) regarding the display mode of the pending symbols and the executed symbols is stored in the respective pending display areas 223e0 to 223e5. Based on the information stored in each of the reserved display areas 223e0 to 223e5, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) is configured to display the executed symbols and the reserved symbols. By constructing in this way, the player is made to feel as if he or she is getting many lottery opportunities by executing more variable effects than actually obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game. can do. In addition, since the execution patterns and the reserved patterns can be displayed while matching with the number of effects, the dynamic performance state in the third pattern display device 81 can be lengthened and the player does not feel uncomfortable. performance can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The sub-slump flag 223f is a flag for determining whether or not the audio ramp control device 113 is in a "slump state". Since the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that it is in a "slump state." Then, when the command related to the variation performance transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the audio ramp control device 113 determines the setting status of the sub-slump flag 223f, and outputs the variation performance in the third symbol display device 81. or "slump effect".

The sub-slump flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Then, when the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 receives a slump command described later from the main control device 110, it sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON (see S1202 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, when the "slump effect" (variable effect) is executed for the first time in the "slump state", that is, when the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on and the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, The sub-slump flag 223f is set to OFF (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

In this way, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the "slump state" using the sub-slump flag 223f. Then, when the MPU 221 receives a command related to the variable effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 determines whether to execute the variable effect or the "slump effect", Effect control to be executed can be performed based on the determination result.

The slump effect timer 223g is a timer for measuring the effect time after the "slump effect" is started. By referring to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 grasps the effect time of the entire series of "slump effects", and the first effect unit after the start of the "slump effect". (That is, “first effect”. Hereinafter, the effect unit of the “slump effect” that follows the “first effect” is referred to as “second effect”, and thereafter, the n-th (n is a natural number) line The performance unit of the "slump performance" that is executed is called "nth performance") so that the end timing can be grasped.

The slump effect timer 223g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the start of the "slump effect", that is, when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the "slump state", a value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the slump effect timer 223g.

Specifically, when the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 in a "slump state", that is, in a situation where the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is " Determine whether it is a variation pattern including “reach display”. In the case of a variation pattern that does not include "ready-to-reach display", a lottery is drawn for the extension time in order to set the effect time to be additionally performed as "slump effect". Then, a value corresponding to the extension time acquired by lottery is set in the slump effect timer 223g (see S1408 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern including "reach display", it is a relatively long variation pattern including "reach display", so there is no need to perform additional effects, so according to the variation pattern "slump effect , the extension time is not set by lottery, and the value is not set to the slump effect timer 223g (see S1406: Yes in FIG. 39).

Next, the MPU 221 adds the variation time of the acquired variation pattern to the value of the slump effect timer 223g regardless of the presence or absence of the "reach display" (see S1410 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g set by the extension time and the variable time, a slump effect table 222f, which will be described later, is referred to, and a “pseudo-continue” effect or a “gase pseudo-continue” effect in the “slump effect” and / Or select "development propriety effect". The selected "slump effect" is stored in a slump effect storage area 223h, which will be described later. Details will be described later.

In addition, the MPU 221 is during the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0", when there is a new start prize in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, the "slump effect" The progress is determined, and if the effect other than the extended time in the "slump effect" is being performed, the value for the extended time is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

The reason for performing the above control is that when a new start winning occurs during a series of "slump effects", an additional "slump effect" effect unit is performed for the effect unit of the "slump effect" being executed. In order to match each effect element, the extension time set for performing the additional effect element is once reset, and the effect content of the effect element is newly set. Also, in performing the above control, the reason why it is limited to during the execution of effects other than the effects during the extended time is that the effects other than the effects during the extended time, that is, during the stage before the effects based on the extended time For example, even if the part of the production corresponding to the acquired extended time is not executed and the extended time is reset once and the production content of the "slump production" is set again, there will be no discrepancy in the production content. be.

Further, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set after setting the "slump effect" based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223g when the variation pattern acquired in the "slump state" includes "reach display". , "0" (see S1413 in FIG. 39). This is because the variation pattern including the "ready-to-win display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the subsequent special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, so the variation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In the case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the variation pattern including "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized, and until the "slump state" is entered again, instead of the "slump state", the " The following production is performed as "normal state". Further, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this stage, it is no longer necessary to grasp the progress of the "slump effect", and it is no longer necessary to perform the shift control of the pending symbols including the dummy pending display. The control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern that does not include the "reach display" has only a maximum execution time of 15 seconds, and ends in a relatively short time, so there is a possibility that a new start prize will occur during that time. is low, so if the variation pattern of the variable production that first started in the "slump state" was a "non-reach" mode that did not include "reach display", the "slump state" was maintained and additional Even when a starting prize is generated, an effect (that is, an additional "slump effect") matching the series of "slump effects" is executed.

On the other hand, when a value is set in the slump effect timer 223g, that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than “0”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set to the main value of the audio lamp control device 113. Each time 1 millisecond elapses in the process (see S1101: Yes in FIG. 36), the value is decremented by 1 (S1110 in FIG. 36).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the subtracted value of the slump effect timer 223g reaches a predetermined value (in the first embodiment, a value obtained by subtracting "10000" from the set value), When the reserved pattern, which is the dummy reserved display, is displayed, that is, when the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than "0", one effect unit in the series of "slump effects" (that is, "pseudo fake 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, and shift processing is executed in the reserved display information storage area 223e. By configuring in this way, the start and end of one performance unit in a series of "slump performance" are displayed while matching the shift display of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern, so that the variable performance is completed once. It is possible to execute a "slump performance" composed of performance elements of a greater number of times than the number of actual variable performances without a sense of incongruity.

The slump effect storage area 223h is an area for storing effect information regarding the content of the effect and stop pattern information regarding the stop pattern for each effect unit (effect element) that constitutes the entire series of "slump effects". be. The MPU 221, based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump state", the effect contents of each effect unit in the series of "slump effect" and the stop pattern (temporary stop pattern) for each effect unit ) is determined, and information (that is, effect information and stop symbol information) regarding the determined contents is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h. In addition, the effect unit in the "slump effect" means that each third pattern displayed in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) of the third pattern display device 81 is stopped and displayed (including temporary stop display). .The same applies hereinafter.) It means the unit of effect from the start of the variation from the state where the variation is stopped after that until the third symbol is stopped and displayed again in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Details of the slump effect storage area 223h will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slump effect storage area 223h. As shown in FIG. 20, the slump effect storage area 223h has seven storage areas from a first effect area 223h1 to a seventh effect area 223h7.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute the "slump effect" based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a from the "slump state", but the first in the "slump state" The variable effect based on the starting prize is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode of losing, and the variable time of ""high speed change (long)" effect element + "low speed change" effect element" is "15 seconds." ”, and the variable effect based on the next start winning during the “slump effect” is a “special reach” effect mode with a big hit, and “high-speed change (long)” effect element + “pseudo change” effect element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" production element + "pseudo-variation" production element + "special reach" production element + "re-fluctuation" production element" total time of "55 seconds", which is the fluctuation time, It becomes the maximum production possible time of "slump production". Further, in the first embodiment, when executing the "slump effect", each effect unit is configured to be within "10 seconds". Therefore, in order to be able to execute a maximum of "70 seconds" as a series of "slump effects", the slump effect storage area 223h stores the entire series of "slump effects" (i.e., the first effect to the seventh effect). ), the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 are provided in order to respectively store the effect information of the seven effect units and each stop symbol information.

Specifically, the first effect area 223h1 is an area corresponding to the “first effect” that is executed first in the “slump effect”, and the effect contents of the first effect (“gase pseudo-ren” effect, “ Either “pseudo-continuous performance”, “development possibility performance” or “whichever reach” (hereinafter the same)) and the stop pattern in the performance content (gase chance pattern, chance pattern, losing pattern, jackpot Any one of the symbols (the same applies hereinafter) and stop symbol information relating thereto are stored. In addition, the second effect area 223h2 is an area corresponding to the "second effect" to be performed after the "first effect", and effect information relating to the effect content of the "second effect" and stoppage in the effect content. It stores stop design information related to the design. Furthermore, the third effect area 223h3 is an area corresponding to the "third effect" to be performed after the "second effect", and includes effect information regarding the effect content of the "third effect" and stoppage of the effect content. It stores stop design information related to the design. In addition, the fourth effect area 223h4 is an area corresponding to the "fourth effect" to be performed after the "third effect", and includes effect information related to the content of the fourth effect and a stop symbol in the content of the effect. Stop symbol information is stored. Furthermore, the fifth effect area 223h5 is an area corresponding to the "fifth effect" to be performed after the "fourth effect", and includes effect information related to the effect content of the "fifth effect" and stoppage of the effect content. It stores stop design information related to the design. Further, the sixth effect area 223h6 is an area corresponding to the "sixth effect" to be performed after the "fifth effect", and includes effect information relating to the effect content of the "sixth effect" and stoppage of the effect content. It stores stop design information related to the design. Furthermore, the seventh effect area 223h7 is an area corresponding to the "seventh effect" to be performed after the "sixth effect", and includes effect information relating to the content of the effect of the "seventh effect" and a stoppage in the content of the effect. It stores stop design information related to the design.

As described above, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the "slump state", it sets the value of the slump effect timer 223g and also sets the slump effect timer 223g. and the slump effect table 222f, the effect situation at the time of receiving the variation pattern command based on the start winning (for example, whether the "slump effect" is already being executed, whether it is an extended time part of the "slump effect", etc. ) and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command (that is, whether or not the variation time and the “ready-to-reach display” are included), the effect content and the stop pattern of the “slump effect” are determined, and the determined detection Information about contents and stop symbols (that is, effect information and stop symbol information) is stored in the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump effect storage area 223h in the execution order of effects.

Here, the slump effect table 222f and the "slump effect" selected based on the slump effect table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG.

FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the slump effect table 222f.

Also, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variation effect and the "slump effect" when the variation pattern command is received in the "slump state", and FIG. Fig. 22(b) is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when the variable effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the winning; is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when various ready-to-win variable performances are acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state".

In addition, FIG. 23 shows a variation effect and a "slump effect" when a variation pattern command is received at the timing during execution of a "slump effect" and the "slump effect" is executing a effect other than an effect based on an extension time. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the corresponding relationship between the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the variable effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode based on the start winning during the "slump effect" other than the extended time. FIG. 23B is a timing chart showing the variable time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" in the case, and FIG. It is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the variable performance is acquired.

Also, FIG. 24 shows the variation effect and the "slump effect" when the variation pattern command is received at the timing when the "slump effect" is being executed and the effect based on the extension time is being executed. FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between and FIG. 24(a) is a case where the variable effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the start winning during the “slump effect” based on the extended time. 24B is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect", and FIG. It is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variable effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when the effect is acquired.

As described above, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 during the "slump state" or during the "slump effect", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is calculated based on the variation pattern command. is set (updated), and the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the slump effect table 222f are referenced to determine the effect contents and the stop pattern of the "slump effect". As shown in FIG. 21, the slump effect table 222f is grouped based on the effect situation at the time of receiving the variation pattern command, and based on the variation pattern (variation time) based on the variation pattern command for each group Slump production” is associated with the entire production content.

Specifically, as the effect situation when the variation pattern command is received, the "slump state" that is in the "slump state" and the "slump effect" that is being executed and the effect other than the extended time is being executed " It is divided into a use during slump production (other than extended time) and a use during slump production (during extended time) during execution of production based on the extended time during slump production. Then, for each of the divided groups, the production mode ("non-reach (long)" production mode, "normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, or "special reach") based on the received variation pattern command A series of effects of "slump effect" are associated with each "effect mode".

In the first embodiment, when the received variation pattern command indicates the "special variation" effect mode, the "slump effect" is not executed. The item of "slump effect" corresponding to the effect mode of "variation" is not provided. In addition, in the first embodiment, the "non-reach" effect mode acquired during the "slump state" or during the execution of the "slump effect" has the number of pending balls of the variable effect "0" or "1". Therefore, it is configured to always be in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 21, the "slump effect" in the variation pattern including the "pseudo-continuous" effect and the "re-fluctuation" effect mode only increases the number of effect elements. '' effect and ``slump effect'' corresponding to the variation pattern excluding the effect mode of ``re-fluctuation'' will be described.

First, referring to FIGS. 21 and 22, the setting contents of the "slump effect" when the variation pattern command is received during the "slump state" will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(a), for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and "5 seconds" is selected as the extension time. In this case, the effect total time is "20 seconds", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set to "20000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" is set to the first "gase pseudo run 1", and the "second effect" is set to "gase pseudo run 2". set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, "gase pseudo-run 1" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-variation"; the same applies hereinafter) .) and stop symbol information related to the false chance symbols (for example, "788"; the same shall apply hereinafter) are stored. Also, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information related to "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop pattern information related to the false chance pattern are stored.

Then, based on the effect information and the stop pattern information stored in the first and second effect areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the "slump effect" is performed (see FIG. 43(a)) and acquired. Finally, the stop pattern of the Gasechan eye pattern, which is the pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the variable production (“non-reach (long)” production mode, so “loss display”), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slumps” are displayed. Effect” ends (see FIG. 43(f)). While this "slump effect" is being performed, if a new starting prize occurs in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the transition to the "normal state" does not occur, while a new starting prize does not occur. If it is, it will be in a "slump state" again.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after about "6 seconds" have passed since the "slump effect" "gase pseudo-run 1" was executed (that is, before the execution of "gase pseudo-run 2") stage), the ball held in the holding device 73 described above is configured to enter the dummy prize winning opening 75, and with the prize winning, the holding pattern, which is a dummy holding display, is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6(b)). ))) (see FIG. 43(a)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a larger number of reserved symbols than the acquired execution count of the variable performance in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)), Even when the ``slump performance'' is performed with a large number of execution times of the performance unit, the consistency between the performance unit and the reserved pattern in the ``slump performance'' can be obtained. As a result, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the number of performance units in which the winning lottery is performed without any discrepancies in the performance is performed more than the number of acquired variable performances. It should be noted that, hereinafter, when the "gase pseudo-run 1" in the "slump effect" is executed, the same effects and control as the above-described "gase pseudo-run 1" are executed, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each performance unit of the series of "slump effects" is configured in units of "10 seconds", and among them, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" of "5 seconds" is displayed. and the production element of "pseudo-fluctuation". Therefore, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect ends (that is, when "15 seconds" have passed since the winning prize 1), the "fast fluctuation (short)" effect of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" in the "slump effect" It is configured such that when the element ends, the variation of the third symbol in the left symbol row Z1 stops (hereinafter referred to as "first stop"). That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the timing of the first stop of the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" are configured to be synchronized. Therefore, the stop timing of any third symbol (that is, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1) of the "slump effect" performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 can be synchronized with the stop timing. That is, in the "normal state", the stop timing of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and the stop timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are synchronously related to each other. It is configured. Therefore, in the same way that the variable effect and the dynamic display in the "normal state" are synchronized, even in the "slump state", the "slump effect" of the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 Relevance (synchronization) can be provided, and the player can be made aware of the end of the variable presentation even during execution of the "slump presentation". In the following, effects and controls are executed so that the timing of the first stop of the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" in the "slump effect" is synchronized with the end timing of the variable effect, but the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(a), the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, and "10 seconds" is set as the extension time. When selected, the total effect time is "25 seconds", and "25000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" is set to "gase pseudo run 1", and the "second effect" is set to "gase pseudo run 2", In the "third effect", a "development propriety effect" corresponding to the remaining effect time (that is, "5 seconds") of the "slump effect" is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information related to "gase pseudo run 1" and stop symbol information related to the false chance symbol are stored. Also, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information related to "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbol information related to the false chance symbols are stored. Furthermore, in the third effect area 223h3, effect information regarding a effect that fails to develop to the next effect (hereinafter referred to as "development failure"), which is a effect element of the "development possible/impossible effect", and false chances are displayed. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored.

Then, based on the effect information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the "slump effect" is performed (see FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e)). ), the stop symbol of the gacha chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect (“non-reach (long)” effect mode, so “losing display”), is finally stopped and displayed, A series of "slump effects" ends.

Incidentally, since the effect time of the effect element of the above-mentioned unsuccessful development "development propriety effect" as the "third effect" is "5 seconds", the "second development propriety effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the ``second development propriety effect'' of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 does not break in a pseudo manner, and the ``second effect'' of ``gase pseudo-continuation 2'' is stopped and displayed. The third symbol stopped and displayed as the false chance symbol is fixedly displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the effect total time is "20 seconds", and the slump "20000" is set to the value of the production timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the first "pseudo run 1" is set in the "first effect", and the effect element of "whatever reach" is set in the "second effect". is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, "pseudo-run 1" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-variation". The same applies hereinafter. ) and stop symbol information related to chance symbols (for example, “778”; the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information related to the effect element of "Which reach" and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect (stop symbol corresponding to "losing display" or "big hit display" The corresponding stop symbol (the same applies hereinafter) is stored.

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first and second performance areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is performed, corresponding to the stop pattern of the acquired variable performance. The "losing display" or "big win display" is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect obtained based on the start winning of the ball into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the effect mode including the "ready-to-win display". In this case, the balls held in the holding device 73 are not allowed to flow into the dummy winning hole 75.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, in the "slump effect", when performing a "pseudo-continuous" effect that does not consume the reserved pattern instead of a "gase pseudo-continuous" effect that consumes the reserved pattern, the actual fluctuation effect is executed. Even when the same number of "slump effects" are performed, the consistency between the number of times of "slump effects" and the number of reserved symbols can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any discrepancies in the effect.

In the first embodiment, even if the "jackpot display" is won in the "slump effect", the extended time is not acquired in the case of the variable effect including the "reach display", and the series of the "slump effect" is not acquired. The performance time of is the same as the variable time of the acquired variable performance. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the "slump effect" are synchronized. Therefore, even if a command (that is, an opening command) related to an effect related to a big win (that is, an opening effect) or the like (that is, an opening command) is transmitted from the main controller 110 at the end timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, It is possible to match the end of the ``slump performance'' with the start of the big win performance in the 3-symbol display device 81, and to provide a performance without discomfort from the end of the ``slump performance'' to the start of the big win performance. .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "super reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the total effect time is "30 seconds", "30000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" is set to "pseudo-run 1", the "second effect" is set to "pseudo-run 2", and the "second effect" is set to "pseudo-run 2". 3 effect” is set with the effect element of “Which reach”.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information related to "pseudo run 1" and stop symbol information related to the chance symbols are stored. Also, in the second effect area 223h2, effect information related to "pseudo-run 2" and stop symbol information related to the chance symbols are stored. Furthermore, in the third effect area 223h3, effect information related to the effect element of "Which reach" and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to third performance areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is performed, corresponding to the stop pattern of the acquired variable performance. The "losing display" or "big hit display" is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "special reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the total effect time is "40 seconds". "40000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" is set to "pseudo-run 1", the "second effect" is set to "pseudo-run 2", and the "second effect" is set. "Pseudo ream 3" is set in "3rd effect", and the effect element of "Which reach" is set in "4th effect".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, effect information related to "pseudo run 1" and stop symbol information related to the chance symbol are stored. In addition, the second effect area 223h2 stores effect information related to "pseudo-run 2" and stop symbol information related to chance symbols. Furthermore, in the third effect area 223h3, effect information related to "pseudo-run 3" and stop symbol information related to the chance symbols are stored. Also, in the fourth effect area 223h4, effect information relating to the effect element of "Which is reach" and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

Then, based on the effect information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, a "slump effect" is performed (see FIG. 44(a)) and acquired. Finally, the "losing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol of the variable effect is stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" is completed (see FIG. 44(f)).

As described above, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command in the "slump state", it extracts the extension time based on the variation pattern command (including whether or not it is present), and extracts the extension time and the variation. The effect time of the entire "slump effect" is set based on the variable time based on the pattern command. Then, based on the performance time of the entire "slump effect", detailed effect contents and each stop pattern of the "slump effect" are set, and the "slump effect" is executed based on the set contents. there is By configuring in this way, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the variation time of the acquired variable effect, the effect time performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is performed by the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to reduce the number of situations that have not been done so that the player does not lose interest.

Next, referring to FIGS. 21 and 23, "non-reach (long )” effect mode (the “non-reach (long)” effect mode executed based on the winning prize 1 is referred to as “non-reach (long) 1”) and the extension time “5 seconds” were selected. ``Slump effect'' (that is, ``gase pseudo-continuation 1'' and ``gase pseudo-continuation 2'') that is executed when the The setting contents of the "slump effect" when a new variation pattern command is received at the timing (that is, the first half of "false pseudo-run 1" or "false pseudo-run 2") will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(a), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (other than extended time)", effect other than extended time of "slump effect" being executed based on winning 1 During the execution of (in the example of FIG. 23 (a), during "gase pseudo-ren 2"), a new start winning (hereinafter referred to as "winning 2") to the special prize winning opening 77a, 78a "Non When a variable effect of "reach (long)" production mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long) 2") is acquired, "non-reach (long) 2" additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "15 seconds", and "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed, in performing the additional "slump effect" based on the winning prize 2, each In order to match the production time of the ``slump production'' with the fluctuation time of the acquired variable production, the extension time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and the production based on the ``slump production'' based on the extension time It is configured to re-set the effect contents of the subsequent 'slump effect' for the variable time of the variable effect obtained based on the winning 1 and winning 2 without executing the elements. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extension time set based on the win 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). Also, the MPU 221 adds the variable time value (that is, "15000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(a), the total production time of the entire "slump production" converted from the start time of the first production element of the "slump production" is "30 seconds". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g converted from the start time is "30000". Then, as an effect unit of a series of "slump effects" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, "pseudo continuation 3" is additionally set in the "third effect".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. Since information and information are respectively stored, at this stage, the third performance area 223h3 stores the performance information related to the "gase pseudo run 3" and the stop pattern information related to the false chance pattern. Further, the pending symbol corresponding to the effect element of "Gase pseudo-ren 3" is displayed in the cockpit display area Db at the timing when the winning prize 2 occurs.

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to third performance areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. Finally, the stop symbol of the gacha chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", so "losing display"), is stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" is completed. .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (other than extended time)", the "slump effect" is executed based on winning 1 in the "slump state". ” during the execution of the production other than the extended time, the production time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is “20 seconds”. Yes, "20000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is being executed), When the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired in order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect" based on the winning prize 2 from that state (Fig. 23 (a )), the extension time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and the performance contents of the subsequent ``slump performance'' are set again based on the winning prize 1 and the winning prize 2.例文帳に追加Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . Also, the MPU 221 adds the variable time value (that is, "20000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total production time of the entire "slump production" converted from the start of the "slump production" is "35 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump production". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is "35000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "gase pseudo-continuation 1" and the "gase pseudo-continuation 2”), a “development propriety effect” is set as a “third effect”, and a effect element of “whatever reach” is set as a “fourth effect”.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. Since the information and information are respectively stored, at this stage, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. Therefore, the remaining rendering time of the “slump rendering” is “15 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the fourth effect area 223h4 in which the stop pattern is finally displayed, the effect information related to the effect element of "Where do you reach?" information is stored. Then, as the remaining "five seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 has the effect element of "development possibility effect", which is the effect element of the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which reach?"). Effect information related to a successful effect (hereinafter referred to as "successful development") and stop pattern information related to a ready-to-win formation pattern suggesting development to the next effect are stored.

Note that the effect element of the above-mentioned "development availability effect" for successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", so the "second development availability effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The Gasechan eyes pattern is replaced with the reach formation pattern (for example, "788" → "7 ○ 7 (○ is changing)"), and the production element of "Which reach" which is the "fourth production" Develop.

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fourth performance areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "loss display" or "big win display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for 'during slump effect (other than extended time)', the 'slump effect' is executed based on winning 1 in the 'slump state'. ” during execution of the production other than the extended time, the production time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is “30 seconds”. , and "30000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is being executed), From that state, in performing an additional "slump effect" based on winning prize 2, in order to match each "slump effect", a "non-reach (long)" effect mode or a "normal reach" effect mode is acquired. (See FIG. 23(a) or FIG. 23(b)), the extension time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and the subsequent "slump effect" is produced based on the winning prize 1 and the winning prize 2. It is configured to reset the content. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value of the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . Also, the MPU 221 adds the variable time value (that is, "30000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total production time of the entire "slump production" converted from the start of the "slump production" is "45 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump production". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is "45000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "gase pseudo-continuation 1" and the "gase pseudo-continuation 2”), the “development possibility effect” is set as the “third effect”, the “quasi-continuous 1” is set as the “fourth effect”, and the “fifth effect” is set to “which The production element of "da reach" is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. Therefore, the remaining rendering time of the “slump rendering” is “25 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop pattern is finally displayed, the effect information related to the effect element of "Where do you reach?" information is stored. Next, as the remaining "15 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, effect information related to "Pseudo Ren 1" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach") ) and stop pattern information related to the reach forming pattern suggesting that the game will develop to ) are stored. Then, as the remaining "five seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 shows the effect information regarding the "development propriety effect" of the successful development and suggests that the next effect (i.e., "pseudo continuation 1") develops. Stop symbol information related to the chance symbol to be played is stored.

Note that the effect element of the above-mentioned "development availability effect" for successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", so the "second development availability effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol is replaced with the chance symbol (for example, "788"→"778". See FIGS. 46(e) and (f).), and the game goes to "Pseudo-run 1" which is the "fourth production". (See FIG. 47(c)).

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fifth performance areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "losing display" or "big win display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for 'during slump effect (other than extended time)', the 'slump effect' is executed based on winning 1 in the 'slump state'. ” during execution of the production other than the extended time, the production time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is “40 seconds”. , and "40000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is being executed), In performing an additional "slump effect" based on the winning prize 2 from that state, in order to match each "slump effect", a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode or a "super reach" effect 23(a) or 23(b)), the extended time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and based on the winning prize 1 and the winning prize 2, It is configured to reset the production contents of the "slump production". Therefore, at this stage, the value for the extended time set based on winning 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total production time of the entire "slump production" converted from the start of the "slump production" is "55 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump production". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223g is "55000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "gase pseudo-continuation 1" and the "gase pseudo-continuation 2”), a “development possibility effect” is set as a “third effect”, a “pseudo-continuation 1” is set as a “fourth effect”, and a “fifth effect” is set as a “pseudo "Ten 2" is set, and the effect element of "Which reach" is set as the "sixth effect".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. Therefore, the remaining rendering time of the “slump rendering” is “35 seconds”. Therefore, first, in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop pattern is finally displayed, the effect information related to the effect element of "Where do you reach?" information is stored. Next, as the remaining "25 seconds" effect, the fifth effect area 223h5 contains effect information related to "pseudo-ren 2" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach"). ) and stop pattern information related to the reach forming pattern suggesting that the game will develop to ) are stored. Next, as the remaining "15 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, effect information regarding "pseudo-run 1" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, "pseudo-run 2") develops. Stop symbol information related to the chance eye symbol suggesting to play is stored. Then, as the remaining "five seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 shows the effect information regarding the "development propriety effect" of the successful development and suggests that the next effect (i.e., "pseudo continuation 1") develops. Stop symbol information related to the chance eye symbol to be played is stored.

Note that the effect element of the above-mentioned "development availability effect" for successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", so the "second development availability effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol is replaced with the chance symbol (for example, "788"→"778". See FIGS. 46(e) and (f).), and the game goes to "Pseudo-run 1" which is the "fourth production". (See FIG. 47(c)).

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to sixth performance areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "losing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" is completed (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113, in the "slump effect" that is executed based on the winning 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state", other than the extension time of the "slump effect" When a variable effect is acquired based on a new winning 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during execution of the effect, the "slump effect" other than the extended time based on the winning 1 is being executed. Therefore, in performing an additional "slump effect" based on the winning prize 2, in order to match each "slump effect", the extended time set based on the winning prize 1 is once reset, and the winning prize 1 and the winning prize are reset. 2, the contents of the subsequent "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not give the player a sense of incongruity without causing any discrepancies in the performance. As a result, when the ``slump effect'' is executed based on the start winning in the ``slump state'', there is a gap between the end timing of the series of ``slump effects'' and the end timing of the acquired variable effect. Since it is configured to be able to match the contents of the production even when a new start winning prize occurs during the production, even if the "slump production" is executed longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable production, the production It is possible to execute an effect that is longer than the variation time of the acquired variable effect while configuring so as not to cause any inconsistency in the content.

Also, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and furthermore, when resetting The remaining remaining time less than the execution time of one performance element (that is, less than 10 seconds) is a performance that does not cause a sense of incongruity even if the performance is interrupted in the middle, and the performance time is flexible. (There is a range) Set to compensate with "development possibility production". By configuring in this way, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized, and a performance can be provided that does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player without causing a discrepancy in the performance.

Next, referring to FIGS. 21 and 24, based on winning 1, "non-reach (long) 1" and extension time "5 seconds" are selected. During the execution of the "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2"), and the "slump effect" is during the execution of the effect based on the extension time (i.e., the second half of the "gase pseudo-run 2") The setting contents of the "slump effect" when a new variation pattern command is received will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(a), in the slump production table 222f for "during slump production (during extended time)", based on winning 1 to special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in "slump state" Especially during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the "slump effect" being executed (in the example shown in FIG. When the variable effect of "non-reach (long) 2" is acquired based on the new winning 2 to the winning openings 77a and 78a, "non-reach (long)" additionally acquired based on the winning 2 2" is "15 seconds", and the value "15000" of the slump effect timer 223g is added (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the ``slump effect'' of ``20 seconds'' based on the winning prize 1, since the ``slump effect'' is being executed in the extended time, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and from that state it is based on the winning prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining extension time obtained based on the winning prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the variable time value (that is, "15000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24( a ), the “slump effect” performed from the start time of the “slump effect” to the winning prize 2 is “19 seconds”, and at the time of the winning prize 2, the remaining “slump effect” is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variable time of the variable effect obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "15 seconds", "15000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), the "third effect" is set to "development possibility effect", and the "fourth effect" is set to "fake effect". Pseudo-ream 3” is additionally set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2", the remaining "slump effect" will be The value is determined to be "14000" by subtracting "1000" from "15000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets "10 seconds" in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed as the "slump effect" to be performed after the "third effect". Effect information of "gase pseudo-run 3" to be performed and stop pattern information related to the gase chance pattern are stored. Then, as the remaining "four seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 is displayed with the effect element of "development propriety effect", and the development to the next effect (i.e., "gase pseudo-ren 3") fails. Rendering information about the development failure and a false chance pattern suggesting that the next rendering will not be developed are stored.

Note that the effect element of the above-mentioned "development success/failure effect" for the failure of development as the "third effect" is performed for "4 seconds", so the "second development progress effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the ``second development propriety effect'' of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 does not break in a pseudo manner, and the ``second effect'' of ``gase pseudo-continuation 2'' is stopped and displayed. The drawn Gasechan eyes pattern continues to be displayed as it is.

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fourth performance areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. Finally, the stop symbol of the gacha chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", so "losing display"), is stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" is completed. .

By configuring in this way, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized, and a performance can be provided in which the player does not feel a sense of incongruity without causing a discrepancy in the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump production table 222f for "during slump production (during extended time)", winning a prize 1 to special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in "slump state" During the execution of the production based on the extended time of the "slump production" being executed based on (in the first embodiment, "gase pseudo-ren 2") Based on the new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a When the variable effect of the "normal reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "20 seconds", and the value "20000" of the slump effect timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the ``slump effect'' of ``20 seconds'' based on the winning prize 1, since the ``slump effect'' is being executed in the extended time, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and from that state it is based on the winning prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining extension time obtained based on the winning prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the variable time value (that is, "20000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24B, the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning prize 2 is "19 seconds", and at the time of the winning prize 2, the remaining "slump effect" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variable time of the variable effect obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "20 seconds", "20000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), the "third effect" is set to "development propriety effect", and the "fourth effect" is set to "which one". A production element of "da reach" is additionally set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2", the remaining "slump effect" will be The value is determined to be "19000" by subtracting "1000" from "20000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets "10 seconds" in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed as the "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect". Effect information related to the effect element of "Which da reach" to be performed and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Then, as the remaining "9 seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 develops the effect information regarding the "development propriety effect" of the successful development and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which reach"). The stop pattern information about the ready-to-win formation pattern suggesting that is stored.

In addition, since the effect element of the above-mentioned "development yes/no effect" of the successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development yes/no effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The drawn Gasechan eyes pattern is replaced with the ready-to-win pattern (for example, "788" → "707 (○ is fluctuating)". See Figs. 46(d) to (f).), "Fourth production" (See FIG. 47(e)).

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fourth performance areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "losing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" is completed (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump production table 222f for "during slump production (during extended time)", winning a prize 1 to special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in "slump state" During the execution of the production based on the extended time of the "slump production" being executed based on (in the first embodiment, "gase pseudo-ren 2") Based on the new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a When the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "30 seconds", and the value "30000" of the slump effect timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the ``slump effect'' of ``20 seconds'' based on the winning prize 1, since the ``slump effect'' is being executed in the extended time, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and from that state it is based on the winning prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining extension time obtained based on the winning prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the variable time value (that is, "30000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24B, the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning prize 2 is "19 seconds", and at the time of the winning prize 2, the remaining "slump effect" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variable time of the variable effect acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "30 seconds", "30000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), the "third effect" is set to "development availability effect", and the "fourth effect" is set to "pseudo". 1", and the effect element of "Which reach" is additionally set in the "Fifth effect".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2", the remaining "slump effect" will be The value is determined to be "29000" by subtracting "1000" from "30000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets "10 seconds" in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed as the "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect". Effect information related to the effect element of "Which da reach" to be performed and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Next, as the remaining "19 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, effect information related to "Pseudo Ren 1" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach") ) and stop pattern information related to the reach forming pattern suggesting that the game will develop to ) are stored. Then, as the remaining "9 seconds" effect, the third effect area 223h3 shows the effect information regarding the "development propriety effect" of the successful development and suggests that the next effect (i.e., "pseudo-ream 1") develops. Stop symbol information related to the chance symbol to be played is stored.

In addition, since the effect element of the above-mentioned "development yes/no effect" of the successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development yes/no effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol is replaced with the chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figs. 46(d) to (f).), and the game goes to "Pseudo Ren 1" which is the "fourth production". (See FIG. 47(c)).

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to fifth performance areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "losing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" is completed (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump production table 222f for "during slump production (during extended time)", winning a prize 1 to special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in "slump state" During the execution of the production based on the extended time of the "slump production" being executed based on (in the first embodiment, "gase pseudo-ren 2") Based on the new winning 2 to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a When the variable effect of the "special reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "40 seconds", and the value "40000" of the slump effect timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the ``slump effect'' of ``20 seconds'' based on the winning prize 1, since the ``slump effect'' is being executed in the extended time, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and from that state it is based on the winning prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining extension time obtained based on the winning prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the variable time value (that is, "40000") obtained based on the win 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24B, the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning prize 2 is "19 seconds", and at the time of the winning prize 2, the remaining "slump effect" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variable time of the variable effect acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "40 seconds", "40000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), the "third effect" is set to "development availability effect", and the "fourth effect" is set to "pseudo". “Ten 1”, “Pseudo-Ten 2” in the “Fifth effect”, and the effect elements of “Which reach” are additionally set in the “Sixth effect”.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" and stop symbols related to the "gase pseudo-run 2" are already stored. information is stored, so at this stage, an effect of "20 seconds" has already been set. For this reason, since the remaining value is the same as the above-mentioned remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2", the remaining "slump effect" will be The value is determined to be "39000" by subtracting "1000" from "40000". Therefore, based on the determination result, the MPU 221 first sets "10 seconds" in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed as the "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect". Effect information related to the effect element of "Which da reach" to be performed and stop pattern information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored. Next, as the remaining "29 seconds" effect, in the fifth effect area 223h5, effect information related to "pseudo ream 2" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach") ) and stop pattern information related to the reach forming pattern suggesting that the game will develop to ) are stored. Then, as the remaining "19 seconds" effect, the fourth effect area 223h4 develops the effect information related to "pseudo-run 1" to be performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, "pseudo-run 2"). Stop symbol information related to the chance eye symbol suggesting that is stored. Next, as the remaining “9 seconds” effect, the third effect area 223h3 shows the effect information regarding the “development propriety effect” of the successful development and suggests that the next effect (i.e., “pseudo-ream 1”) develops. Stop symbol information related to the chance symbol to be played is stored.

In addition, since the effect element of the above-mentioned "development yes/no effect" of the successful development as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development yes/no effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development propriety effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner, and the "second effect" of "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol is replaced with the chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figs. 46(d) to (f).), and the game goes to "Pseudo Ren 1" which is the "fourth production". (See FIG. 47(c)).

Then, based on the performance information and the stop pattern information stored in the first to sixth performance areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump performance storage area 223h, the "slump performance" is continuously performed, and the additionally acquired variable performance is performed. The "losing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" is completed (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the audio ramp control device 113, in the "slump effect" being executed based on the winning 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state", in the extended time of the "slump effect" When a variable effect is acquired based on a new winning 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during execution of the based effect, the extended time "slump effect" based on the winning 1 is being executed. For this reason, in performing an additional "slump effect" based on the winning prize 2, in order to match each "slump effect", the remaining amount of the extension time acquired based on the winning prize 1 is temporarily stored ( See S1422 in FIG. 39), and then the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the winning prize 2, the contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not cause a player to feel a sense of incompatibility.

Also, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and furthermore, when resetting The remaining remaining time less than one performance unit is supplemented with ``development possibility performance'' which is a performance that does not cause discomfort even when the performance is interrupted in the middle and is flexible (with a range) in the performance time. set as Also, the maximum effect time of this "development possible/impossible effect" is configured to be equivalent to the obtainable extension time. By configuring in this way, in the situation where the "slump effect" longer than the acquired variable effect is executed, that is, during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, a new "slump effect" is generated. Even if a variable performance is added due to the start winning, the consistency of the performance time can be taken by the "development possibility performance" that can be executed in a width less than the extension time, and the acquired variable performance Since the end timing can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire 'slump performance', the performance is not inconsistent and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The pending information storage area 223i stores information for prefetching, that is, a jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning and transmitted by the pending ball number command. This is an area for storing values of C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1.

The sound lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform prefetch processing (hold display setting processing ( See FIG. 38)) is executed.

The execution information storage area 223j is information for performing a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, that is, the jackpot acquired from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable production, the first area for holding information storage of the above-mentioned holding information storage area 223i (Fig. 25 ), the information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for performing the variable effect stored in the memory area 223j is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j.

Details of the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j.

The execution information storage area 223j includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223j1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223j2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. and a variation type counter storage area 223j4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

In addition, the pending information storage area 223i has four areas of pending information storage first to fourth areas. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1 in which the value of the random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223i2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and a stop pattern selection counter in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored. At least a storage area 223i3 and a variation type counter storage area 223i4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223j is an area corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed, and the pending information storage first area is the variable performance that is first suspended in terms of time among the suspended variable performances. It is an area corresponding to performance, the second area for storing reserved information is an area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the third area for storing reserved information is: This is an area corresponding to the temporally third oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the fourth area for storing the suspension information is the fourth temporally suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances. It is an area corresponding to the variable performance.

When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control unit 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is changed from the pending ball number command. Extract. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of pending balls included in the number of pending balls command among the first to fourth areas for storing the pending information. Stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223i4.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls included in the pending ball number command is X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4), the number of variable effects suspended at that time is X, and the pending ball count command The values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the X-th suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, so each counter storage area of the X-th storage area for storage of suspension information. The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223i1 to 223i4 are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved No. X area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. That is, the same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the reservation information storage X area.

Further, in the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 performs prefetching processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 38) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223i1 to 223i4 of the holding information storage X area. ), and the pending change information generated based on the result of this prefetching process is stored in the aforementioned pending display information storage area 223e (see FIG. 19). That is, the information about the variable effect is stored in the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j, the effect information of the "slump effect" and the stop pattern information are stored in the above-described slump effect storage area 223h, and the variable effect or the "slump" is stored. The pending number of "effect" and the pending change information are stored in the pending display information storage area 223e.

On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command that mean the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, shift processing is performed in the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j. That is, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance suspended first in terms of time is started, so that the first area for storing the suspended information corresponding to the first suspended variable performance is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed.

Also, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the first pending information storage area to store the pending information. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second area for holding information storage, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third hold information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223j stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, the same values as the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the first to fourth holding information storage areas. will be That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j and the hold information storage area 223i. be.

The sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of pending variable effects (the number of pending balls) from the sub-holding ball number counter 223b when performing the look-ahead processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 38)). Then, based on the number of pending balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variable performance is suspended among the first to fourth storage information storage areas are read in advance, and the variable performance, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a big win is achieved in one performance unit (that is, the performance element to be executed last) in the "slump effect", and the fluctuation time and the like. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls of the variable effect is 1, so for the holding information storage first area, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored Read ahead the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is "4", since the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is four times, the number of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the fourth reservation information storage area is Read ahead the value and make a decision.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp controller 113, and the voice ramp controller 113 accesses the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and the like. can't. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a pending information storage area 223i, and stores the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects put on hold by the main control device 110 also in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, by referring to the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process.

That is, when the suspended variable performance or "slump performance" is executed, what will be the result of the variable performance or "slump performance" (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variable time, etc.) The audio ramp control device 113 can determine whether to execute various effects by judging before executing the variable effect or the "slump effect".

The above-described shift processing in the holding information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j is based on the number of held balls when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the update based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command is performed. Based on the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before being set), the data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the suspended variable effect among the first to fourth storage information storage areas.

For example, when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before updating is "4", and all areas of the reservation information storage area 223i (reservation information storage first to fourth areas ) is stored with data. In this case, the data in the first hold information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j, the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data in the third hold information storage area is held. The data is shifted to the second information storage area, and the data in the fourth pending information storage area is shifted to the third pending information storage area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reservation information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. , the data in the second hold information storage area is shifted to the first hold information storage area, and the data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the third and fourth storage information storage areas where the variable effect is not suspended, the number of data shifts can be reduced. Control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first to fourth areas for holding information storage is shifted to an area with an area number smaller by 1 (the execution information storage area 223j or the first to third areas for holding information storage). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (reserved) for each of the first to fourth reservation information storage areas, thereby facilitating the creation of a program.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description continues. The effect conversion flag 223k is a flag for changing the effect of 1 in the "slump effect" to the effect element of the "development possibility effect" in the ON state. In the first embodiment, when a series of "slump effects" are performed, when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the ball is not entered into the dummy winning opening 75 and the holding pattern, which is the dummy holding display, is not displayed. . For this reason, if the "slump effect" including the "gase quasi-continuous" effect that digests 1 reserved pattern is executed as it is, the number of effects in the "slump effect" and the number of reserved patterns cannot be matched. . Therefore, when the ball is not won in the dummy winning opening 75 based on the fact that the ball is not reserved in the holding device 73, the ``gase quasi-run'' effect, which is the ``slump effect'' for digesting one reserved symbol, is suspended. It is configured to convert the pattern into an effect element of the "development propriety effect" that does not digest the pattern, and execute a series of "slump effect".

The effect conversion flag 223k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a pending rank-up command for raising the display mode of the pending pattern or the executed pattern by one rank is received from the main control device 110, that is, the starting winning prize in the "slump state" (the previous starting winning prize (winning prize 1), and In the case where the variation pattern of the variation effect based on the starting winning (including any of the starting winnings (winning 2)) includes "ready-to-win display", or when the ball is not held in the holding device 73 , the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

On the other hand, the effect conversion flag 223k is configured to be set to OFF after setting the effect content in the "slump effect" in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) (see S1418 in FIG. 39).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when setting the effect content of the "slump effect" based on the start winning in the "slump state", in the situation where the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON, the start When the variation pattern of the variable effect acquired based on the winning does not include the "ready-to-win display", the effect information of the 1 "gase pseudo-run" effect set in the slump effect storage area 223h is It is configured to be converted into the effect information of the effect element of "effect". By configuring in this way, the number of effects (the number of units of effect) of the "slump effect" and the number of reserved symbols can be consistent, and the effect can be provided that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. can.

It should be noted that this production conversion flag 223k is turned on when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, and is output when the fluctuation pattern of the acquired fluctuation production includes "reach display". Since it is set to ON even when a command is received (see S1205 in FIG. 37), regardless of whether or not the "reach display" is included, the "slump effect" is initialized each time the effect content is set ( That is, it is configured to be turned off. Specifically, in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39), in the case where the variation pattern of the acquired variation effect includes "ready-to-reach display", the "slump effect" in which the "gase pseudo-run" effect is not executed Even if there is, or even if the "reach display" is not included in the variation pattern of the acquired variation effect, even if it is a "slump effect" in which the "gase pseudo-ren" effect is executed, the "slump effect is set to OFF after the setting of the effect content of "" (see 1418 in Fig. 39). By configuring in this way, even when a new start winning (that is, winning 2) occurs during execution of the "slump effect" and the content of the "slump effect" is additionally changed (updated), At that timing, since the setting contents of the effect conversion flag 223k are initialized, when resetting the effect contents based on the new starting winning prize (that is, winning prize 2), the previous starting winning prize (that is, winning prize 1) Consistent production setting is possible without being affected by the setting contents of the "slump production" based on

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 37) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, command setting for the display control device 114, etc.) is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect related to the third pattern and " It controls "slump effect" or "reserved change notice" in reserved symbols and execution symbols.

This display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

An audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 instructs the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113 via the input port 238. A command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 . MPU 231 , program ROM 232 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are also connected to input port 238 via bus line 240 . A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237 and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the sound lamp control device 113 . The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs.

The character ROM 234 has a character storage area (not shown) in which image data of each sprite such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored. In order to reduce the amount of data to be stored in the character storage area, the image data is stored in compressed form. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression consists of about 1024 megabytes, and the image data of about 1024 megabytes is compressed to about 768 megabytes and stored in the character storage area.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of frame buffer areas for storing one frame of images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

The image controller 237 generates one frame of image data in accordance with the drawing list, writes it into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and reads the one frame of image data written into the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. , and outputs the read image data to the third pattern display device 81 through the output port 239, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to continuously display a plurality of frame images.

The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified in the drawing list from the character storage area (not shown) in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and decompresses (decompresses) the image data. After that, processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the drawing list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame of image data into one of the frame buffer areas and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. do. When one frame of image data has been read out from the other frame buffer area, the previously written one frame of image data is read out from the one frame buffer area. Image data for the next one frame is written into the frame buffer area of .

By alternately writing image data into and reading out image data from one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images can be continuously displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 26 to 34. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into start-up processing (see FIG. 33) that is started when the power is turned on, main processing (see FIG. 34) that is executed after the start-up processing, and periodic processing (see FIG. 34). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) which is started at a period of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) which is started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, based on various processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a command for the number of pending balls set in the later-described starting winning process (see FIG. 27). In addition, it transmits to the sound ramp controller 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 28) and the variation start process (FIG. 29) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, it transmits to the launch control device 112 a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the launch control process (see S110 in FIG. 26), which will be described later.

Next, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the big win process for executing the process at the time of the big win of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed (S103). .

Next, a second symbol control process is executed for executing processes related to variable display of the second symbol and drive control of the electric accessory 79 (S104). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67, the second symbol display device 83 variably displays the second symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, the second symbol When a winning symbol (for example, a "○" symbol) appears and the winning state is reached, the electric accessory 79 is driven to be opened for a predetermined time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 and 73g connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches 208 and 73g, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. In addition, after recognizing whether or not the ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection information of the holding ball detection switch 73g, start winning processing (S108) and holding device control processing (S111), which will be described later, are performed. Execute.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the hit random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the first embodiment , respectively ("899", "99", "99", "199", "99") are cleared to "0". Also, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot random number counter C4. It is read as a value, and its initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM203.

Next, start winning processing accompanying winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is executed (S108). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the process for dynamically displaying the first design by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S108) Variation processing for setting the variation effect of the third symbol by 81 or the variation pattern (effect pattern) of the "slump effect" is executed (S109). Details of the change processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the variation process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110). This shooting control process (S110) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of determining on/off of the firing of the . Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

After executing the firing control process (S110), the holding device control process is executed (S111). In the holding device control process, processing is performed as to whether or not to release (release) the balls held in the holding device 73 based on the setting contents of the holding device driving flag 203f and the value of the holding device driving timer 203g. will be Details of the holding device control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the holding device control process (S111), the dummy winning process is executed (S112). In the dummy winning process, a winning ball command for the payout control device 111 and a dummy holding command for the sound lamp control device 113 are set depending on whether or not the ball has won the dummy winning hole 75 . Details of the dummy winning process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the dummy winning process (S112), other processes to be executed periodically are further executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process ends.

Next, the starting winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S108). The start winning process determines whether or not the ball has won a prize to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and if there is a prize, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (reserved process). Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The MPU 201, in this starting winning process (S108), first determines whether or not the ball has won (starting winning) the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (S201). Here, a special figure entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process Based on the output signal, the ball entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26).

When it is determined that the balls have entered the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a (there has been a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the payout control device 111 is instructed to pay out three prize balls. A command is set (S202), and the process proceeds to S203. The command for three prize balls set in the process of S202 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Inside, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls in the special figure prize-winning ports 77a, 78a and the dummy prize-winning port 75 is the same, which is three. By constructing in this way, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based only on the number of awarded balls. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is during the variable effect in the "normal state" or the "slump effect" in the "slump state" based only on the number of awarded balls. Since it is not possible to discriminate whether it is ", it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity and losing interest in the game even when a "slump performance" is performed for a longer time than the actual variation time of the variable performance. can do.

In the process of S203, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the number N of active pending balls for the dynamic display of the first symbol suspended in the main controller 110 (variation effect of the third symbol)) is the upper limit value (the first In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4") (S203). Then, even if there is a prize to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, if the number of balls N<4 is not activated (S203: No), this starting prize winning process (S108) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (Fig. 26 reference).

On the other hand, if the number N of activated balls N<4 (S203: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number N of activated retained balls) is incremented by 1 (S204). Then, the process proceeds to S205.

In the process of S205, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8), and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and variation type counter storage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the number of pending balls counter 203a among the first to fourth holding areas Each is reserved (stored) in the area 203c4 (S205).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S204 based on the winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is "1", each storage area of the first pending area 203c1-203c4 hold the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1, respectively. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", it is stored in each of the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the second pending area, and if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", it is stored. In each storage area 203c1 to 203c4 of the third area, if the value of the number of pending balls counter 203a after addition is "4", in each storage area 203c1 to 203c4 of the fourth area, counters C1 to C3, CS1 Value is reserved.

Next, the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition by the process of S204 (operation pending ball number N); , the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, in order to transmit the pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. (S206). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) to be executed next.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pending ball number command in the process of S206 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203b in the process of S205, or stored in the pending ball in the process of S205. A read value stored (reserved) in the area 203c may be used.

After execution of the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the starting prize is the starting prize during the "slump state", that is, whether or not the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0" (S207). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is not greater than "0" (S207: No), that is, if the value of the main slump counter 203e is "0", the starting prize is awarded. is not a start-up win in a "slump state" but a start-up win in a "normal state". Therefore, since there is no need to perform control related to the "slump effect" based on the starting winning, the starting winning processing (S108) is terminated and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S207, if it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0" (S207: Yes), the starting prize is the starting prize during the "slump state", so the "slump The process proceeds to S208 in order to perform control related to "effect".

In the processing of S208, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the main slump counter 203e (S208), and then it is determined whether or not the held ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209). As a result of determination, if the held ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209: Yes), the ball is held in the holding device 73, and then a held pattern consistent with the "slump effect" is displayed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S210 in order to determine whether or not there is a variation pattern that causes the reserved ball to enter the dummy winning hole 75 or not.

In the process of S210, whether or not the variation pattern of the variation effect acquired based on the start winning includes "ready-to-win display", that is, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern counter that are obtained this time. C3 and the value of the variable type counter CS1 determine whether the selected variable effect is the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, the "special reach" effect mode or the "special change" effect mode. (S210).

As a result of determination, if it is not a variation pattern including "reach display" (S210: No), each performance unit of the series of "slump effects" to be executed from now on is the number of executions of the acquired variable effects (number of pending patterns). Since the "guess quasi-run" effect is executed one more time (that is, twice), the suspension device drive flag 203f is set to ON (S211), and the suspension device drive flag 203f is set to ON in order to ensure consistency in the display of the suspension symbols. The value of the device driving timer 203g is set to "1500" (S212), and the starting winning process (S108) is terminated. By configuring in this way, the ball held in the holding device 73 can be made to flow into the dummy winning prize opening 75, and the holding pattern, which is the dummy holding display, can be displayed, and the performance unit in the series of "slump production" can be displayed. Consistency between the number of performances and the number of reserved symbols can be obtained. It should be noted that after the end of the starting winning process, it returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In the process of S209, if the reserved ball detection switch 73g is not turned on (S209: No), no ball is reserved in the holding device 73, and therefore there is no ball to be introduced into the dummy winning hole 75. Without performing the processing of S210 to S212, the pending rank-up command is set (S213), and this starting prize winning processing (S108) ends.

In addition, in the process of S210, if the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S210: Yes), a "pseudo run" that does not digest the pending symbol is performed in the "slump effect", and "whatever reach" is performed. Since the effect element is executed, in this case also, the processing of S211 and S212 is not performed, and the subsequent game state is first returned to the "normal state" and the "slump effect" is set based on the additional start winning. The value of the main slump counter 203e is cleared to "0" (S214). Then, similarly to the case where the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding rank-up command is set (S213), and the starting winning process (S108) is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the voice ramp control device 113 that has received the pending rank up command, if it is a variation pattern including the "reach display", the number of effects of the "slump effect" and the number of display of the pending pattern match, the "slump effect" is executed with the initially set effect content. On the other hand, if it is a variation pattern that does not include "reach display", the number of effects of "slump effect" and the number of display of reserved patterns do not match, so in the initially set effect content, 1 reserved pattern is digested " It is configured to execute a series of ``slump effects'' by changing the ``guess quasi-continuous effect'' effect to the effect element of the ``development yes/no effect'' that does not digest one reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the number of times of the "slump effect" and the number of display of the reserved symbols, and even when the "slump effect" is performed longer than the actual fluctuation time, the player will feel uncomfortable. It can provide a performance that does not exist.

Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing this variation processing. This variation processing controls dynamic display in the first pattern display device 37 and variation performance performed in the third pattern display device 81, and when variation performance is not performed in the third pattern display device 81, It sets the demonstration display and sets the "slump state".

In this variation process (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the variation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the dynamic display on the first pattern display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display was stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). As a result, the stationary symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stationary symbols. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the motion of the first symbol reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N of balls to be activated for the target display (variation effect) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing dynamic display of the first symbol (fluctuation effect of the third symbol). 1 is subtracted from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (S305). This is because execution of dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display of the first symbol (variation effect of the third symbol) is started by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later. , the number of reserved balls for dynamic display of the first symbol is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203c toward the reserved ball execution area 203d. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203d, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the data shift process. (S307), returning to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). Note that the fluctuation start processing (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the ball count counter 203a (the number of ball counts of pending balls N) is "0" (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is performing a demonstration effect. It is determined whether or not it is in a state, ie, whether or not it is being demonstrated (S308). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the pending ball counter 203a (operation pending ball number N) is determined to be greater than "0". The period between is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26).

The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the demo on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control is performed to display the production.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the variable effect is not started even after the predetermined time has passed after the stop of the variation, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S308, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S308: Yes), then after the demonstration is in progress, the maximum extension time (i.e., , "10 seconds" after entering the demonstration period) is determined (S310). As a result of determination, if the maximum extension time has passed (S310: Yes), the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2" in order to set the game state from "normal state" to "slump state". (S311). Here, by setting the value of the main slump counter 203e to "2", it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the player is in the "slump state" at the timing of subsequent start winning. Then, in order to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that it has entered the "slump state", a slump command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is started. return. Note that the audio ramp control device 113 can recognize the occurrence of the "slump state" by receiving the demo command, so it may be configured not to set the slump command itself.

The slump command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 .

When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the slump command, it sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON. processing becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the process of S310, if it is determined that the maximum extension time has not elapsed after entering the demonstration (S310: No), the processes of S311 and S312 are skipped and the "slump state" is set. This change processing (S109) ends without performing

This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the series of "slump effects" is obtained during the maximum extension time ( That is, it is configured to be executed for a maximum of "10 seconds"). Therefore, of the series of "slump effects", during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, that is, during the demo period, at the timing when a new start prize occurs, a new "slump effect" is generated as a "slump state". ” requires setting processing to ensure consistency with the “slump effect” being executed, and there is a risk that the setting processing for achieving this consistency will be complicated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, the main controller 110 side will restart the "slump state" until the extension time in the "slump effect" ends. Without setting, change to "slump state" at the stage when a series of "slump effects" are completed. That is, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, it means that the fluctuation time of the variable effects has passed, and even if the state is internally in the demonstration effect, it will be changed to the "slump state" for a while. is awaited. Therefore, in the main controller 110, a series of "slump effects" is completed, and then the "slump state" is set and the "slump effect" is set again. It is no longer necessary to perform complicated control for consistency with the performance, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the slump performance.

Next, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed. (S313). The display time during the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display If the time (fluctuation time) has not passed (S313: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In the first embodiment, in the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, the central segment of the 7-segment display 37b blinks until the fluctuation time elapses after the dynamic display is started. The display mode to be displayed is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S313: Yes), the first symbol display device 37 displays a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol. is set (S315). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the process of S306. After the big win, it is determined whether it is a "15R probability variable jackpot" pattern, a "15R normal jackpot" pattern, or a "2R probability variable jackpot" pattern.

In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is achieved after the jackpot, the symbol "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is achieved, the 7-segment display 37b. , the pattern of "3" is displayed, and in the case of "2R probability variable jackpot", the pattern of "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, if it is a loss, only the center segment of the 7-segment display 37b is displayed (that is, "-").

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the 7-segment display device 37b of the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S316) in order to perform a confirmation display in synchronism with the display of (S316), and this variation processing (S109) is terminated. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the audio ramp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a confirmation command for display to the display control device 114 if it is the end timing of the "normal state" or the "slump effect", and executes the "slump effect". If the timing is in the middle (that is, during the execution of “Gase pseudo-continuation 2”), the first stop command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stopped symbol by receiving the confirmation command for display. On the other hand, by receiving the first stop command for display, the left symbol row Z1 of the "slump effect" of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped, and the "slump effect" is being performed by the stop. It is configured to suggest the end of the variable production in . In this way, by providing a relationship between the end of the variable effect and the content of the "slump effect", it is possible for the player to recognize the end of the variable effect even while the "slump effect" is being executed. becomes.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307).

In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, a lottery (jackpot lottery) for a big hit or a loss is performed, and a dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37 is performed. dynamic pattern and stop type, as well as the variation pattern and stop type of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S307), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)). A jackpot lottery (win/fail determination) process for determining whether or not is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time reduction state"), "7,307 , 582” is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state ("probability fluctuation state"), "28, 122, 298, 390, 486, 567, 656, 750, 866" is a big hit. Specified as a random value.

In the process of S401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is awarded. It is determined that As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the jackpot is won (S401: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 9B). Based on, the display mode (type of jackpot) at the time of jackpot is set (S402).

In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot. "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to "15R normal jackpot" that shifts to "time reduction state" after the maximum number of rounds hits 15 rounds, or "probability fluctuation state" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds hits 2 rounds It is determined whether it is a "2R probability variable jackpot" that shifts. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the light-emitting diode 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, as the display result of the variable effect or "slump effect", in order to stop and display various jackpot patterns corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type ("15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot" , “15R normal jackpot”) is set as the stop type as it is, thereby setting the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d A performance mode is selected based on the selected performance mode, and the variation time of the variable performance is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d. In determining the variation pattern at the time of the big win, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11 or 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the big win.

Then, in the process of S402, when "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4). A performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 12(a)).

Specifically, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, in the group of "E6: normal reach" of the big hit variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14), it is stored in the held ball execution area 203d. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" of "20 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" of "25 seconds" " + "re-fluctuation"", "30 seconds" "fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach"", or "35 seconds ” of ““fast fluctuation (long)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “fast fluctuation (short)” + “pseudo fluctuation” + “normal reach” + “re-fluctuation”” is selected (see FIG. 14) . Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 14).

Further, when the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the group "E7: super reach" of the big hit variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" of "30 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + " "Super reach"", "40 seconds" of ""fast fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "fast fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach"", or "45 seconds" A fluctuation pattern of "'fast fluctuation (long)'+'pseudo fluctuation'+'fast fluctuation (short)'+'pseudo fluctuation'+'super reach'+'re-fluctuation'" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 14).

Further, when the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the group "E8: special reach" of the big hit variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" of "40 seconds", "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + " Special reach"", "50 seconds" "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach"", or "55 seconds" A variation pattern of "'fast variation (long)' + 'pseudo variation' + 'fast variation (short)' + 'pseudo variation' + 'special reach' + 're-fluctuation'' is selected (see Fig. 14). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 14).

Also, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the holding ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (E table 202d5) Select an effect mode associated with the value. That is, when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot", the "special variation" effect mode is selected without exception. Then, referring to the selected effect mode and the big hit variation pattern table 202e2, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d is selected. In the first embodiment, only "movie" is selected in this case (see FIG. 14). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 14).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode for losing is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the suspended ball execution area 203d and the suspended ball number counter 203a are set. and the current gaming state, the effect modes to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 are a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, a "non-reach (short )” effect mode, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state", each effect The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2, or C table 202d3) is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the mode differs.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until stop display of the missing symbol is determined. At this time, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal game state", the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, or the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the reserved ball number at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a One of the C tables 202d3 (see FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c)) is selected. Further, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or "probability fluctuation state", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the number of pending ball counter 203a. Alternatively, one of the C tables 202d3 (see FIG. 11(b) or 11(c)) is selected.

Then, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the process of S404, the "E0: non-reach (long)" group of the change pattern table 202e1 for loss has a reserved ball execution area 203d. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in . That is, in this case, only "high speed fluctuation (long)"+"low speed fluctuation" of "15 seconds" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is set as the production mode in the process of S404, the holding ball execution area 203d is included in the "E1: non-reach (middle)" group of the losing variation pattern table 202e1. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in . That is, in this case, only "high speed fluctuation (short)"+"low speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the holding ball execution area 203d is included in the "E2: non-reach (short)" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e1. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in . That is, in this case, only ``fast fluctuation (short)'' of ``5 seconds'' is selected, and no other fluctuation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

When the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the group "E3: normal reach" of the change pattern table 202e1 for losing (see FIG. 13). Select the variation pattern associated with the value of That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" of "20 seconds" or "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "30 seconds" A fluctuation pattern of "fast fluctuation (short)"+"pseudo fluctuation"+"normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the holding ball execution area 203d in the "E4: super reach" group of the change pattern table 202e1 for losing (see FIG. 13). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" of "30 seconds" or "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" of "40 seconds" +"fast fluctuation (short)"+"super reach"" is selected (see Fig. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the "E5: special reach" group of the change pattern table for losing 202e1 (see FIG. 13). A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" of "40 seconds" or "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" of "50 seconds" +"high-speed fluctuation (short)" +"special reach"" is selected (see Fig. 13). Then, the variable time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variable time (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big win and the setting processing of the performance mode and the variation pattern at the time of losing are determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. , the program can be shared, and the number of man-hours required for development can be reduced.

Next, in the processing of S406, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command is set to notify the sound ramp control device 113 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. (S406). Specifically, for example, winning a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is a "15R probability variable jackpot", and a variation pattern of the "30 seconds" "super reach" production mode (that is, "high speed variation (long )” + “low speed variation” + “super reach””) is selected, a variation pattern command indicating “super reach” of jackpot, “15R probability variable jackpot”, and “30 seconds” is set. In addition, if you lose the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of the "30 seconds" "super reach" effect mode is selected, a variation pattern command that indicates the loss / "30 seconds" "super reach" is set. be done.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting together the propriety of the variable effect and the contents of the rough variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the sound ramp control device 113 can achieve the effect mode including the propriety. and the variation time, and based on these information, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation effect or the "slump effect" in detail.

Also, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process returns to the change process (see FIG. 28).

Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variable jackpot", without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol etc.) A stop type command indicating "15R probability variable jackpot" is set. In addition, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" pattern, etc.) is not specified, and "15R normal jackpot" is selected. Set a stop type command that indicates that

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) is not specified, and the " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" production mode (so-called front and back loss). In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737" etc.) is not specified, and the "normal reach" at the time of losing is selected. ” Set a stop type command indicating that it is in the production mode (so-called loss other than front and back). Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) is not specified, and " Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" production mode (so-called complete loss).

Thus, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variable effect to the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the propriety, Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stop result of the variable effect or the "slump effect" in detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the next timer interrupt processing (see S101 in FIG. It is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command, or a display slump variation command and a display slump pattern command based on it, and controls the display. Send to device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the holding device control processing (S111), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing a holding device control process.

In this holding device control process (S111), as described above, the timing for releasing (flowing down) the balls held (stored) in the holding device 73 during the "slump effect" is counted, and the timing is reached. In this case, the holding device solenoid 73f is driven to release the balls held in the holding device 73 and flow the balls into the dummy winning opening 75.例文帳に追加

In the holding device control process (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501). As a result of determination, if it is determined that the retaining device driving flag 203f is not turned on (S501: No), the condition for releasing the ball retained in the retaining device 73 is not established, so this retaining device control is performed. Terminate the process and return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the holding device driving flag 203f is turned on (S501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding device driving timer 203g (S502), and then the subtracted holding device It is determined whether or not the value of the drive timer 203g has become "0" (S503). By executing these processes, the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 (that is, the start of the “slump effect”, the ball held in the holding device 73, and the acquired variable effect When the variation pattern does not include the "ready-to-win display") is established, the timing of making the ball held in the holding device 73 flow into the dummy winning hole 75 can be counted.

In the process of S503, if it is determined that the value of the holding device driving timer 203g is not "0" (S503: No), the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 has not yet reached. In order to continue counting release timings, the processes of S504 and S505 are skipped, the holding device control process (S111) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that the value of the holding device driving timer 203g is "0" (S503: Yes), it is time to release the ball held in the holding device 73. The holding device solenoid 73f is set to be driven ON for "2000 milliseconds" (S504), the holding device drive flag 203f is set to OFF (S505), and this holding device control process (S111) is terminated. .

In this way, by controlling the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the holding device driving flag 203f and the holding device driving timer 203g, even if the "slump effect" is being executed, A ball is made to flow into the dummy winning opening 75 before the execution of the effect element (that is, "gase pseudo-run 2"), and before the execution of the corresponding effect element, the reserved symbol, which is the dummy reserved display corresponding to the effect element, is displayed. can be displayed.

Next, the dummy winning process (S112), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing dummy winning processing.

In this dummy winning process (S112), it is determined whether or not a ball has flowed (won a prize) into the dummy winning hole 75, and if a ball has won into the dummy winning hole 75, the ball is sent to the payout control device 111. A prize ball command to be played is set, and a dummy hold command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set.

In the dummy winning process (S112), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the dummy winning hole 75 (S601). Here, based on the output signal of the dummy winning hole switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75, read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process. Then, the entry of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). As a result of determination, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the dummy winning hole 75 (S601: No), this dummy winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interruption process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S601, when it is determined that the ball has won the dummy winning opening 75 (S601: Yes), based on the winning to the dummy winning opening 75, the prize equivalent to the special drawing winning opening 77a, 78a In order to pay out the balls, a 3 prize balls command for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out 3 prize balls is set (S602), and the process proceeds to S603. The command for three prize balls set in the process of S602 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Inside, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 .

By constructing in this way, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based only on the number of awarded balls. In addition, when playing a game, the player can use the special symbol winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 to perform the effects (fluctuation effects, "slump effects", or holding effects performed by the third symbol display device 81). (symbols, etc.), and does not pay much attention to the winning mode of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a and the dummy winning opening 75. Therefore, with only the number of paid out prize balls, the player can determine whether the effect (holding pattern) corresponding to the prize balls corresponds to the variable effect in the "normal state" or the "slump state". It cannot be determined whether it corresponds to the production unit of "Slump production". As a result, the player feels a sense of incongruity even when performing a ``slump effect'' in which the effect element is performed longer than the variation time of the acquired variable effect and more times than the number of times of the acquired variable effect. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the process of S603, a dummy hold command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to display a hold symbol corresponding to the dummy hold display is set (S603), the dummy winning process (S112) is terminated, and timer allocation is performed. Return to the loading process (see FIG. 26). The dummy pending command set in the process of S603 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When receiving the dummy hold command, the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the dummy hold ball counter 223c, and the value of the dummy hold ball counter 223c after the addition and the value of the sub-hold ball counter 223b. Based on the total value, the command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114, based on the reception of the number of reserved balls for display command, displays the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81. In (see FIG. 6(b)), control is performed to display the reserved symbols (and the executed symbols).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols that is one more than the number of reserved balls in the actual variable effect in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)), and to execute the actual variable effect. Even when the "slump effect" is performed more times than the number of times, the consistency between the number of effect units in the "slump effect" and the reserved symbols can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the performance of the lottery for winning or losing is performed more times than the actual number of variable performances without any discrepancies in the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power failure occurrence information settings (S701). ), ending the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, the MPU 201 first executes an initial setting process upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Also, an initial operation is performed to determine whether electronic components such as the holding device solenoid 73f operate normally. Even when the holding device solenoid 73f performs the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in such a manner that the ball is held in the holding ball holding portion 73b of the holding device 73. It is configured. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing ("1 second" in the first embodiment) ) is executed (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S811.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will also be described in S906 of FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S811, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S811). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S812, S813).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S812, S813). Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S812, S813) is similarly executed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S812, S813), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S812), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S813). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S808). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S810, interrupts are permitted (S810). Then, the process shifts to the main process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, the MPU 201 first determines whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S901: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S902, S903).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S902). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" and "99" in the first embodiment) , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S903) by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 26), and the process proceeds to S901.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 26 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals ("4 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big win, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning hole 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the variable display of the second pattern by the second pattern display device 83 is performed. Display control is performed. Also, in the jackpot lottery that is executed when the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained depends on whether the state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state. different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S902 and S903, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, randomness can be achieved in updating the jackpot random number counter C1 and the winning random number counter C4 using these as initial values for updating. can have

In addition, in the process of S901, if information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S901: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 32 has been executed, so the power-off process after S904 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S904), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (S905). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S906), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S907), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S901 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S902 and S903 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished, and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S901 after the start-up process (see FIG. 33) ends. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S801). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S901 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the first embodiment, processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), and in the main processing (see FIG. 34), each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is However, part or all of the processing that was executed in the timer interrupt processing is configured to be executed in the main processing every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). You may For example, in the first embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing ( S105), start winning process (S108), variation process (S109), launch control process (S110), holding device control process (S111), dummy winning process (S112), part or all, instead of timer interrupt process , may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 34) to determine whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has passed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, the process is executed at predetermined time intervals. , and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing (see FIG. 35) started upon power-on and main processing (see FIG. 36) executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 35, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, the MPU 221 first executes an initial setting process upon power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S1122 (see FIG. 36) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1119 in FIG. 36), it executes power-off processing in S1122. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1122 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1122. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), it will transfer to S1004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1122 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1122, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1122 is executed (see S1121 in FIG. 36). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1122 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1122 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1010), an interrupt Permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 36). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 36).

The reason why the clearing process of S1009 is skipped is that when the process of S1008 is reached from S1004 via the process of S1006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, the MPU 221 first determines whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101 : No), the process proceeds to S1116 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1115. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1102 to S1115 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the command determination processing of S1116 is performed. This is because the variation effect processing of S1117 is preferable to be executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1116 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1117 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay. Further, by executing the processing of S1102 to S1115 every 1 millisecond, it is possible to accurately count various control timings.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. If the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 35, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the processing of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1103 to S1117 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

Also, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect and the "slump effect" are not being executed, or during the period of the effect element of the "high-speed change", a process for changing the stage is performed, and the frame button operation command is executed. Instead, a back image change command to the display controller 114 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed.

Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable performance or the ``slump performance'', the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the big win due to the current variation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the ``reach display''. By doing so, the performance can be changed to give a feeling of anticipation for the big win, or the frame button 22 can be used as a decision button for selecting one ready-to-win performance among a plurality of ready-to-win performances presented on the screen. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1105) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1106), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the variable effect or the "slump effect"). In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1107, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect or "slump effect" performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1106 is executed, and the sound editing/output process of S1107 is also performed by the third symbol display device 81. Executed at a time synchronized with the required time.

In the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1109). This determination is for grasping the progress of the "slump effect", and at the timing when one effect unit of the "slump effect" ends, shift processing of the reserved pattern is performed in accordance with the start of the next effect unit. .

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not greater than "0" (S1109: No), that is, if the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "0", the "slump effect , the processing of S1110 to S1115 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1109: Yes), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is changed because the "slump effect" is in progress. 1 is subtracted (S1110), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined, and it is determined whether or not "10 seconds" have passed since the "slump effect" was started (S1111).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "slump effect" can occur when the variable effect of the third symbol is not suspended and the variable effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81. is. Therefore, when the variable effect of the "non-reach" effect mode that does not include the "reach display" is acquired based on the start winning during the "slump state", the effect mode of the variable effect is "15 seconds" without exception. Reach (long)” effect mode is selected.

Here, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected based on the starting prize in the "slump state", at least the two production elements of "gase pseudo run 1" and "gase pseudo run 2" Slump effect” is executed. In addition, since each production unit in the "slump production" is performed based on "10 seconds", the first production unit in the "slump production" (i.e., "gase pseudo-continuation 1") starts "10 seconds ', the first effect unit ends, and execution of the next effect unit in the 'slump effect' (that is, 'gase pseudo-run 2') is started.

Therefore, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, the end of the first production unit in the "slump production" and the start of the next production unit are suggested, and the execution status of each production unit In order to ensure consistency with the display contents of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols, the execution displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the execution status of the above-mentioned effect unit. It is necessary to erase the pattern and shift the display of the reserved pattern (hereinafter, erasing the displayed execution pattern and shifting the display of the reserved pattern is simply referred to as "shift display"). Therefore, the process of S1111 measures the end timing of the first effect unit in the "slump effect", and when the end timing is reached, the process of S1114 changes the display contents of the pending symbols and the executed symbols.

In addition, when the effect mode including "reach display" is selected based on the starting winning in the "slump state", the pending pattern and the execution pattern are used as the "slump effect" corresponding to the effect mode including the "reach display". A “pseudo-ream” production that does not consume is executed.

Therefore, when a production mode including "ready display" is selected, since the reserved pattern and the execution pattern are not consumed in the production unit in the "slump production", the execution status of each production unit and the display contents of the reserved pattern and the execution pattern In order to maintain consistency, the executed symbols and reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as they are according to the execution status of the above effect unit. keep doing

By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure consistency between the execution status of each performance unit in the "slump effect" and the display contents of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols. As a result, even if a series of "slump effects" are executed for a longer period of time than the actual variable effects, it is possible to provide effects that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the processing of S1111, whether or not "10 seconds" have passed since the "slump effect" was started is configured to be determined based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the acquired extension time. ing. Specifically, when the acquired variable effect is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "5 seconds", the slump effect timer 223g at the stage when the remaining value of is "10000", that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to "20000", it is determined that "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect". is configured to Further, when the acquired variable effect is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "10 seconds", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is At the stage when the remaining time is "15000", that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to "25000", it is determined that "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect". It is configured.

Therefore, in the processing of S1111, if it is determined that "10 seconds" have not passed since the start of the "slump effect" (S1111: No), the shift timing of the pending symbol (that is, the Since the end timing) has not arrived, the processing of S1112 to S1115 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect" (S1111: Yes), then the value of the dummy ball count counter 223c is greater than "0". It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a reserved symbol, which is a dummy reserved display, is being displayed (S1112). In this case, if the ball is not held in the holding device 73 or the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the dummy holding command is not received from the main control unit 110, and the holding pattern, which is the dummy holding display, is displayed. This is because in such a case, the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are not to be shift-displayed.

In the process of S1112, if it is determined that the value of the dummy ball number counter 223c is not greater than "0" (S1112: No), that is, if the value of the dummy ball number counter 223c is "0" and the dummy When the reserved design which is the reserved display is not displayed, the processing of S1113 to S1115 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than "0" (S1112: Yes), the reserved symbol that is the dummy reserved display is displayed. Since it is the shift display timing of the reserved symbols, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c (S1113), and the data stored in the reserved display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1114).

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution pending display area 223e0. Area 223e0, second reservation display area 223e2→first reservation display area 223e1, third reservation display area 223e3→second reservation display area 223e2, fourth reservation display area 223e4→third reservation display area 223e3, fifth reservation display area The data in each of the areas 223e0 to 223e5 are shifted in the order of 223e5→fourth reserved display area 223e4.

After the data shift processing in S1114, the display pending ball number command is set based on the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b and the pending change information stored in the pending display information storage area 223e by the data shift process. (S1115), and the process proceeds to S1116. The command for the number of pending balls for display set in the process of S1115 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1102) executed next. sent to.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball number command is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third pattern display device 81. And, the executed symbols are displayed, and the display mode (display color) of the corresponding reserved symbols or the executed symbols is controlled based on the reserved change information included in the reserved ball number command for display.

In the process of S1116, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1116), and the process proceeds to S1117. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S1117, after the processing of the command determination processing (S1116), the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation effect or the "slump effect" on the third pattern display device 81 A variable performance process, which is a process for starting a variable performance or a "slump performance", is executed. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a counter update process is executed to update various counters such as the pending change counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1118), and the process proceeds to S1119. Specifically, in this counter update process, for example, the pending change counter 223d is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both "99" in the first embodiment). . The pending change counter 223d updated in this way is used for executing the "pending change notice" and selecting the display mode.

In the process of S1119, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power-off occurrence information (S1119). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1119 (S1119: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1121), and the power-off processing is executed (S1122). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1123), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S1119 (S1119: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1120), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1120: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1120: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call a pachinko hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S1116) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. This command determination process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

In the command determination process (S1116), the MPU 221 first reads and analyzes the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, It is determined whether or not a slump command has been received (S1201). If it is determined that a slump command has been received (S1201: Yes), the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON (S1202), this command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). The MPU 221 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON based on the reception of the slump command, so that the audio lamp control device 113 side can recognize the "slump state".

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the slump command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending rank up command has been received from main controller 110 (S1203). Then, when it is determined that the pending rank up command has been received (S1203: Yes), the pending change information in the pending display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b and the dummy pending ball number counter 223c is displayed. The rank is increased by one (S1204).

Specifically, in the process of S1204, for example, the holding change information corresponding to "none (white)" is displayed in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub holding ball number counter 223b and the dummy holding ball number counter 223c. is stored, the hold change information is updated to hold change information corresponding to "blue". In addition, if the holding change information corresponding to "blue" is stored in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the dummy holding ball number counter 223c, the holding change information is Update to pending change information corresponding to "green". In addition, if the holding change information corresponding to "green" is stored in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the dummy holding ball number counter 223c, the holding change information is displayed. Update to pending change information corresponding to "red".

By configuring in this way, the display mode of the reserved symbols and the executed symbols corresponding to each performance unit of the "slump effect" can be raised by one rank, and the number of effects of the "slump effect" and the reserved symbols and the executed symbols can be increased. The interest in the game can be improved by enriching the variation of the content of the presentation while maintaining consistency with the number of displays.

After the process of S1204, the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (S1205), the command determination process (S1116) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). By setting the effect conversion flag 223k to ON based on the reception of the pending rank up command, in the "slump effect" on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the effect of "gase quasi-continuous" capable of digesting the pending symbol is executed. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the reserved pattern is converted into a production element of "development possibility production" that does not digest. By configuring in this way, it is possible to ensure consistency between the content of the performance unit in the "slump performance" and the consumption status of the reserved symbols and the execution symbols, and to prevent the occurrence of discrepancies in the performance contents. .

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that no pending rank-up command has been received (S1203: No), then it is determined whether or not a dummy pending command has been received (S1206). As a result of the determination, if the dummy reserve command is received (S1206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the dummy reserve ball number counter 223c (S1207), and then the reserve display setting is performed to set the display mode of the reserve symbols. Processing is performed (S1208), and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). In this pending display setting process, control relating to "holding change notice" is performed based on the value of the dummy pending ball number counter 223c updated in S1206 and the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b at that time. The details of this pending display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1206, if it is determined that the dummy reserve command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserve ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1209). As a result of the determination, if the pending ball number command is received (S1209: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect The number of pending balls) is extracted and stored in the sub pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1210).

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), so every time there is a starting winning, the process of S1210 Thus, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

After the processing of S1210, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command is extracted, and the pending information storage area 223i is held. Of the first to fourth information storage areas (see FIG. 25), the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b updated by the process of S1210 is stored in the first to fourth reservation information storage areas (S1211).

That is, when the value (number of retained balls) of the sub-retained ball number counter 223b is X (1≤X≤4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the variation type counter storage area 223i4 of the X-th area for storing the pending information.

The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holding-balls command are obtained from the counter buffer 203b in the main controller 110 when the balls win the special prize-winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning). is the value stored in the X-th reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 when the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X. In other words, the same information (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 is stored in the reserved information storage area 223i of the sound ramp controller 113. FIG.

The sound lamp control device 113 refers to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, thereby executing pre-reading processing in the hold display setting processing (see FIG. 38), which will be described later. ing. That is, when the suspended variable effect or "slump effect" is executed, what will be the result of the variable effect or "slump effect" (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable effect or the "slump effect", and the control to determine the execution of various effects, or to determine whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode is performed by the audio lamp control device 113 can be run

After the processing of S1211, in order to determine the display mode of the reserved pattern based on the various information indicated by the number of reserved balls command received this time, the reserved display setting processing (S1208) is performed in the same manner as in the case of receiving the dummy reserved command. , return to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

In the processing of S1209, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). Then, when it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1212: Yes), variation setting processing is performed to set a variation effect or "slump effect" based on the variation pattern command (S1213), and main processing is performed. (See FIG. 36). In this variation setting process, a variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the received variation pattern command, and the detailed content of variation performance or "slump performance" is set based on the variation pattern. This variation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1212, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). As a result of determination, if a stop type command is received (S1214: Yes), a symbol setting process is performed to set a stop symbol for a variable effect or a "slump effect" based on the stop type command (S1215), Return to main processing (see FIG. 36). In this pattern setting process, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, and the detailed stop pattern of the variable effect or "slump effect" is set based on the stop type. This pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S1214, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1214: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from main controller 110 (S1216). As a result of the determination, if a confirmation command has been received (S1216: Yes), a confirmation setting process is performed (S1217) in order to perform display processing for a variable effect or a "slump effect" based on the confirmation command, and the main process (Fig. 36). In this confirmation setting process, based on the received confirmation command, if the variable production is being executed, the fixed display of the variable production is performed, and if the "slump production" is being executed, the left symbol column is displayed in the "slump production". Perform stop display of Z1. This confirmation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S1216, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1216: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1218) and returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1218, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (Fig. 36)) to the display control device 114.

Next, the pending display setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the pending display setting process. As described above, this pending display setting process is executed when a pending ball number command or a dummy pending command is received from the main control device 110, and determines whether or not to execute the "holding change notice" in the holding pattern. At the same time, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is set according to the content of the determination.

In the pending display setting process (S1208), the MPU 221 first sets the "slump effect" executed based on various information indicated by the pending ball number command received this time or at the timing of receiving the dummy pending command received this time. ”, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery for “holding change notice” is won (S1301). As described above, the execution lottery for the "holding change notice" is performed in each of the holding information storage area X where the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to X (1 ≤ X ≤ 4) in the "normal state". Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223i1 to 223i4, the success or failure and effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted success/failure and effect mode, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e (see FIG. 18) are referred to, and whether or not the "holding change notice" can be executed and displayed. determine the mode.

Also, if the "slump effect" based on only one starting prize (that is, win 1) is in progress, the success or failure of the "slump effect" being executed is stored in each of the counter storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. are extracted based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Also, if a "slump effect" based on an additional start win (that is, win 2) after one start win (that is, win 1) is being executed, the propriety of the "slump effect" that is being executed is Extraction is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 and 223i1 to 223i4 of the first reservation information storage area. Then, based on the extracted right or wrong, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e are referred to determine whether the "hold change notice" can be executed and the display mode.

As a result of the process of S1301, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is won (S1301: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue") that is the result of the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" The change information is stored in the holding display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1301, if the execution lottery for the "hold change notice" is not won (S1301: No), the hold change information (that is, Null data) indicating that the "hold change notice" will not be executed is The sum of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is stored in the reserved display information storage area 223e (S1303), and the process proceeds to S1304. Thus, it is possible to store in the pending display information storage area 223e whether or not to execute the "suspended change notice" for each effect unit of the variable effect of the "normal state" and the "slump effect".

In the process of S1303, by writing Null data to the corresponding pending display information storage area 223e, for example, redundant use of information related to "pending change notice" stored in the pending display information storage area 223e before writing is prevented. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy in the production (for example, the “hold change notice” is “red” despite the variable production of the “non-reach” production mode). can.

Next, in the process of S1304, the display control device 114 displays the sum of the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c, and the reservation change information stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e. (S1304), the pending display setting process (S1208) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The display pending ball number command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). sent. As a result, the display control device 114, which has received the command for the number of reserved balls for display, displays the reserved pattern according to the number of reserved balls and the information on the reserved change indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display in the cockpit of the third pattern display device 81. A process of displaying in area Db (see FIG. 6B) is executed.

Next, the variation setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the variation setting process. This variation setting process is, as described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the game state at that time (that is, , ``Normal state'' or ``Slump state''), the setting of the contents of the variation presentation or the ``Slump presentation'' is performed.

In this variation setting process (S1213), the MPU 221 first extracts a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command (S1401), and shifts the process to S1402. The fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1402 to S1418 are performed based on the fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 is a variation pattern indicating "2R probability variable jackpot", ie, "special variation" effect mode (S1402). As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern indicates "2R probability variable jackpot" (S1402: Yes), in order to execute the variation effect with the variation pattern in any game state, the processing of S1404 to S1423 is performed. Instead, the sub-slump flag 223f is set to OFF (initialized) (S1403), and the variation setting process (S1213) is terminated. After completion of the variation setting process, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the variation pattern does not indicate "2R probability variable jackpot" (S1402: No), then it is determined whether or not the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404). As a result of the determination, if the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404: Yes), since the variation pattern command is received during the "slump state", the sub-slump flag 223f is first set to OFF (S1405), Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1406).

In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include "ready-to-reach display" (S1406: No), that is, if it is determined to be the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "slump effect" The extension time is selected by lottery (S1407), the extracted extension time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1408), the extracted extension time is stored in the RAM 223 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. . On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when it is determined that the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S1406: Yes), the process of S1407 to S1409 is skipped in order to perform the "slump effect" without acquiring the extension time. Then, the process proceeds to S1410. By configuring in this way, an extension time is obtained for the ``slump performance'' in the variation pattern not including the ``ready-to-reach display'', and the dynamic performance of the third pattern longer than the actual variation time of the variation performance is executed. be able to.

In the process of S1410, based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401, the variable time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is "15 seconds" of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation", "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. , If the fluctuation pattern is ""Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach"" with a fluctuation time of "50 seconds", "50000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. In the first embodiment, a series of "slump effects" is executed based on the value set in the slump effect timer 223g in S1408 and the value added to the slump effect timer 223g in S1410.

In the process of S1411, again, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1411). As a result of determination, if the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S1411: Yes), in the newly set or additionally set "slump effect", the "pseudo-run" effect is developed. In order to execute the "reach display", the situation at the time of winning (when receiving the fluctuation pattern command) (that is, during the "slump state", during the execution of "slump effect" based on other than the extended time, "slump based on the extended time , the value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and/or S1410, and the value of the slump effect (extended time) in S1422 described later. Based on the remaining value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only when it is a variation pattern command during execution, the effect element of the "pseudo-continuation" effect and/or the "development possibility effect" and the effect of "whatever reach". Each effect unit with the effect element is set in the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump effect storage area 223h (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. In the process of S1412, if the state at the time of winning is in the "slump state" or the "slump effect" based on other than the extended time is being executed, the remaining value is not set, so The content of the "slump effect" is set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

Next, in the process of S1413, since it is the "slump effect" in which the "reach display" is performed, an additional "slump effect" is set based on the reception of a new variation pattern command during execution of the "slump effect". In order to prevent this, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1417.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include the "ready-to-reach display" (S1411: No), in the "slump effect" newly set or additionally set this time, winning The situation of time (at the time of receiving the variation pattern command), the value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and/or S1410, and the variation during execution of the "slump effect (extended time)" in S1422 described later. Based on the remaining value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only in the case of the pattern command, each effect unit of the effect elements of the "gase pseudo-continuation" effect and/or the "development propriety effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h. The first to seventh rendering areas 223h1 to 223h7 are respectively set (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415. In the process of S1414, if the state at the time of winning is in the "slump state" or the "slump effect" based on other than the extended time is being executed, the remaining value is not set. The content of the "slump effect" is set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

Next, in the processing of S1415, it is determined whether or not the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415). As a result of the determination, if the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415: Yes), in the currently set "slump effect", one "gase quasi-run" effect that consumes the reserved pattern (execution pattern) is suspended. The slump effect storage area 223h is updated by converting the symbol (executed symbol) into the effect element of "development possible/impossible effect" that does not consume the symbol (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1417. On the other hand, if the effect conversion flag 223k is not turned on (S1415: No), the process of S1416 is skipped without converting the set "slump effect", and the process proceeds to S1417. By configuring in this way, the execution number of the performance unit in the "slump performance" and the display number of the reserved symbols are made to match, and by providing a consistent performance, the player can feel comfortable without feeling uncomfortable. A game can be executed.

In the process of S1417, the residual value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 is cleared to "0" only when the variation pattern command is during execution of "slump effect (extension time)" in S1422 described later (S1417). , the effect conversion flag 223k is set to OFF (S1418), and this variation setting process (S1213) is terminated. After completion of the variation setting process, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37). In this way, when one variation pattern command is received, by initializing the remaining value obtained (set) based on the reception of the variation pattern command and the effect conversion flag 223k, each received variation pattern command Therefore, it is possible to execute a setting process of a precise variation effect or a "slump effect".

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the sub-slump flag 223f is not turned on (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1419). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1419: Yes), the variation pattern command is received during the execution of the "slump effect". The start winning (that is, winning 2) that caused the pattern command is during the variable time of the variable performance based on the previous variable pattern command (that is, winning 1) in the "slump effect" (including during the fixed display. Same below. ), it is determined whether or not it is a starting prize (S1420). This determination is made when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is smaller than the value corresponding to the extension time stored in the RAM 223 in S1409 at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time. It is determined that it is not during the variation time of the variation performance based on the variation pattern command. On the other hand, at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time, if the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than the value corresponding to the extension time, the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command in the "slump effect" It is determined that it is during the variable time.

As a result of the determination in S1420, when it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time was during the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: Yes), based on other than the extension time Since the variation pattern command is received while the "slump effect" is being executed, it corresponds to the extension time stored in S1409 in order to set the additional "slump effect" based on the received variation pattern command. The value (that is, "5000" or "10000") is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1421), and the process proceeds to S1410.

On the other hand, in the process of S1420, if it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time is not during the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: No), that is, based on the extension time " Since the variation pattern command is received in a situation where the "slump effect" is being executed, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is temporarily set in order to additionally execute the "slump effect" based on the received variation pattern command. The remaining value of the "slump effect" is stored in the RAM 223 (S1422), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423), and the process proceeds to S1410.

Then, in the processing after S1410, first, in S1410, the value corresponding to the variation pattern is again added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g reset in S1421 or S1423 (S1410), and in S1412 or S1414, etc. An additional "slump effect" is set based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g added at S1410 and the remaining value of the "slump effect" stored in the RAM 223 at S1422.

In addition, in the processing of S1419, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not greater than "0" (S1419: No), that is, by the value of the slump effect timer 223g being "0", " Since it is not during execution of "slump state" and "slump effect", but "normal state", this change setting process (S1213) is terminated in order to execute the change effect based on the reception of the change pattern command, Return to the determination process (see FIG. 37).

In this way, the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the extension time, or the remaining value of the extension time is set for each situation at the time of winning (when receiving the variation pattern command), and based on these set values, the "slump Effect" can be set, and the program capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the symbol setting process (S1215) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the pattern setting process. In this symbol setting process, as described above, when a stop type command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command, and the stop type A change pattern corresponding to the command A stop pattern in the "slump effect" is set based on the change pattern indicated by the command and the setting state of the slump effect storage area 223h.

In the symbol setting process (S1215), first, the stop type (effect mode) is extracted from the stop type command (S1501), and the process proceeds to S1502. The stop type extracted in the process of S1501 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1502 to S1506 are performed based on the stop type.

In the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the stop type extracted in S1501 is a stop type indicating "2R probability variable jackpot", that is, a "special variation" presentation mode (S1502). As a result of the determination, if the stop type indicates "2R probability variable jackpot" (S1502: Yes), in order to execute the variable effect with the stop type in any situation, the processing of S1503 to S1506 is performed. Then, the process proceeds to S1507.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, if it is not a stop type indicating "2R probability variable jackpot" (S1502: No), then it is determined whether data related to "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h ( S1503). As a result of determination, if data related to "slump effect" is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: No), the stop type command is received in the "normal state", so the process is related to "slump effect". The process proceeds to S1507 without performing the processes of S1504 to S1506.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1503, if the data related to the "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: Yes), a variation setting process is performed to set the stop symbol for each effect unit in the "slump effect". It is determined whether or not the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 at S1401 in (see FIG. 39) includes "reach display" (S1504).

As a result of determination in S1504, if it is determined that the variation pattern includes "ready-to-win display" (S1504: Yes), the chance symbol corresponding to the number of "pseudo-run" effects in the "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect. Along with setting in the area 223h, according to the stop type extracted in S1501, the stop pattern (jackpot pattern or losing pattern) in the production element of "Which reach?" Move to

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern including "reach display" (S1504: No), that is, if it is a variation pattern of "loss display", the "gase pseudo-continuation" production A false chance pattern corresponding to the number of times is set in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1506), and the process proceeds to S1507. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the stop pattern for each effect unit of the "slump effect", and even when the "slump effect" is performed, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command can be displayed. can be displayed.

In the processing of S1507, in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 42) described later, the variation in the third symbol display device 81 is based on each setting content in the variation setting processing (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting processing (S1215) described above. In order to start the effect or "slump effect", the fluctuation start flag 223a is set to ON (S1507), and this symbol setting process is terminated. After completion of the pattern setting process, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the confirmation setting process (S1217) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the confirmation setting process. As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), when the confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, the confirmation setting process is performed by the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command is received. The third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set based on the situation (that is, whether it is during a variable effect or during a "slump effect").

In this confirmation setting process (S1217), first, it is determined whether or not the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601). This determination is made depending on whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0". As a result of the determination, if the "slump effect" is not being executed (S1601: No), since the confirmation command is received during the execution of the variable effect, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the fixed effect of the variable effect. is set (S1602), the confirmation setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36). . In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display described later is corresponded. By stop-displaying the third pattern, the third pattern in the variable performance is fixedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601: Yes), the "slump effect" is being executed and the first stop timing of the "gase pseudo-continuation 2" is determined. Since the confirmation command is received in , the display first command for instructing the display control device 114 to stop the first stop of the "slump effect" "gase pseudo-run 2" (that is, stop the left symbol row Z1) A stop command is set (S1603), this confirmation setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The first stop command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (see S1102 in FIG. 36). be done. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first stop command for display, the third pattern display device 81 is executing the "slump effect" of the "gase pseudo-run 2", and the left symbol row Z1 is displayed. 3 Stop the design. After that, according to the performance information stored in the slump performance storage area 223h and the stop symbols, after the "slump performance" is performed for a predetermined time, the right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol are stopped and displayed. As a result, the third symbol in the "slump effect" is determined and displayed.

In this way, when the confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, depending on whether the variable performance is being executed or the "slump performance" is being executed, the performance being performed by the third symbol display device 81 is supported. The command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and the effect without any discrepancy can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation effect processing (S1117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the variable effect processing. This variation effect processing is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the above-described variation setting processing (see FIG. 39) and symbol setting processing (see FIG. 40) are performed. Executes the processing for starting the variable performance or "slump performance" set in and.

The MPU 221 determines whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is ON in the fluctuation effect process (S1117) (S1701). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, is off) (S1710: No), at least a stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation The rendering process is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is ON (S1701: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, either the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" First, the change start flag 223a is turned off (S1702), and then the data contained in the pending information storage first area provided in the pending information storage area 223i is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. (S1703), furthermore, the data contained in the second to fourth hold information storage areas provided in the hold information storage area 223i are shifted to the first to third hold information storage areas (S1704), and the process proceeds to S1705. Move to

That is, in this case, the suspended variable performance is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable performance or the "slump performance" is started based on the information regarding the variable performance suspended first in terms of time. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the holding information first area corresponding to the variable performance held in , are stored in the variable performance being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the pending information storage second area and various information (data) are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third pending information storage area are stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area. , the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the fourth pending information storage area and various information (data) are stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i1 of the third pending information storage area. 223i4.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223j of the sound ramp control device 113 stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the ball holding execution area 203d of the main control device 110. In the first to fourth holding information storage areas provided in the holding information storage area 223i of the lamp control device 113, the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored. The same values as those of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705), and if data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: Yes), "slump effect" is set, the process moves to S1708, and when data is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: No), the process moves to S1706 to set the variable effect.

In the process from S1706, in order to execute the variable effect in the "normal state", the variation patterns of the variable effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j are sent to the display control device 114. In order to notify, a display variation pattern command is set (S1706). Then, similarly, a stop type command for display is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j (S1707). , the process proceeds to S1711.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1706 and the display stop type command set in the process of S1707 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the main command to be executed next. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation pattern and the stop pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. to control the variation performance of the third symbol.

Regarding the execution of the variation effect, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are always paired and generated and transmitted within a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the command is not normally generated or transmitted due to noise, disconnection, etc. when executing the variation effect. Therefore, it recognizes that some kind of abnormality has occurred, switches the effect in the third pattern display device 81 from the variable effect to an error display corresponding to the abnormality (for example, default change), and controls the display of the error display. Start.

Here, the default variation means that the third symbol is rapidly variably displayed until the determination command (display determination command) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is received, and the determination is performed. This is a variable performance that determines a fixed special stop pattern (for example, a pattern displayed as '9', '8', and '7' in order from the left column) as a stop pattern that indicates a failure according to the reception of the command.

On the other hand, in the processing from S1708, in order to execute the "slump effect", in order to notify the display control device 114 of each effect unit of the "slump effect" based on each effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, A display slump variation pattern command is set (S1708). Then, in order to notify the display control device 114 of each stop symbol of "slump effect" based on each stop symbol information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, a display slump symbol command is set (S1709), and the slump effect is performed. The storage area 223h is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711.

The display slump variation pattern command set in the process of S1708 and the display slump pattern command set in the process of S1709 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and then executed. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

When the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump pattern command and the "slump effect" is not started in the third symbol display device 81, the display slump variation pattern command And, based on the effect pattern and the stop pattern indicated by the display slump symbol command, the control relating to the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump pattern command and the "slump effect" has already started on the third pattern display device 81, the " The contents of the "slump performance" are matched with the performance pattern and the stop pattern indicated by the received slump variation pattern command for display and the slump pattern command for display, and the "slump performance" of the third pattern is controlled. Specifically, one effect unit being executed in the "slump effect" is performed based on the preceding display slump variation pattern command and display slump pattern command, while the effect unit being executed is shifted from the next effect unit. is performed based on the subsequent display slump variation pattern command and display slump pattern command.

Regarding the execution of the "slump effect", the display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump pattern command are always paired for a predetermined time (for example, , 20 ms). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump pattern command, when executing the “slump effect”, the command is normally generated or generated due to noise, disconnection, or the like. Since it is not transmitted, it is recognized that some kind of abnormality has occurred, and the effect in the third pattern display device 81 is switched to an error display (for example, default variation) corresponding to the abnormality instead of the "slump effect", and the error Starts display control of the display.

Next, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether or not the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than "0" (S1711). This determination is the start timing of the variable effect or "slump effect", and with the start, the reserved design (execution design) is consumed (that is, the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 The timing of shift display of the pending pattern according to the variable effect or "slump effect" setting corresponding to ), or the pending pattern that is the dummy pending display while the "slump effect" is being executed At the present stage, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift display the reserved pattern.

As a result of the process of S1711, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is not greater than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and " Since the "slump effect" is not being executed and the reserved pattern which is the dummy reserved display is not displayed, the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is first subtracted by 1 ( S1714). Then, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the pending display information storage area 223e (S1715).

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution pending display area 223e0 in the same manner as the shift process of the main process (see S1114 in FIG. 36). 1st suspension display area 223e1→Execution suspension display area 223e0, 2nd suspension display area 223e2→1st suspension display area 223e1, 3rd suspension display area 223e3→2nd suspension display area 223e2, 4th suspension display The data in the areas 223e0 to 223e5 are shifted in the order of area 223e4→third reserved display area 223e3, fifth reserved display area 223e5→fourth reserved display area 223e4, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S1715, the display pending ball number command is set based on the value of the sub pending ball number counter 223b and the pending change information stored in the pending display information storage area 223e by the data shift process. Then (S1716), this variation effect processing (S1117) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). The command for the number of pending balls for display set in the process of S1716 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36) of the main process to be executed next. , and transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball number command is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third pattern display device 81. And, the executed symbols are displayed, and the display mode (display color) of the corresponding reserved symbols or the executed symbols is controlled based on the reserved change information included in the reserved ball number command for display.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1713, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is greater than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is "1", Since the "slump effect" is being executed and the reserved pattern which is the dummy reserved display is displayed, the processing of S1714 to S1716 is skipped in order not to perform the shift display of the reserved pattern at the present stage. Then, the variable effect processing (S1117) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 36) is returned to.

Thus, when the voice ramp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the third symbol display device 81 determines the effect to be executed, and performs the variation effect or "slump effect". However, it is possible to provide an effect having consistency between the content of the effect and the reserved design.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, execution examples of various effects such as variable effects or "slump effects" in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 43, each effect unit of the "slump effect" in the third pattern display device 81 will be described (see FIG. 23(a) for a time chart). FIG. 43(a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, and shows a state just before the chance symbol development symbol appears. FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the knock-off pattern has stopped in the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation" in "gase-pseudo-run 1" from the state of FIG. 43(a), FIG. 43(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the pending symbol is shifted from the state in FIG. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the "pseudo change" effect element in "gase pseudo-run 2" from the state of FIG. 43(c) is stopped, and FIG. FIG. 43(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the pending symbol is shifted and the effect element of "high-speed change", which is "false pseudo-run 3", is executed, and FIG. 43(f) is FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which a series of "slump effects" is completed after the "pseudo change" effect element in the "pseudo change 3" state from the state of (e). In addition, in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(f), the display mode of the third pattern is omitted (the same applies to the description of FIGS. 44 to 47 below).

As the game state of FIG. A new starting prize (that is, prize 2) occurs during the execution of the first production unit of the “slump effect”, “Gase pseudo-ren 1”, and even in the prize 2, “non-reach (long) ' effects are extracted, and an additional 'slump effect' is set and executed based on the winning 2 and the previous winning 1 (see FIG. 23(a)).

Specifically, in FIG. 43(a), in the left display area Dm1 (left symbol row Z1; hereinafter the same) of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed. In the display area Dm3 (right symbol row Z3; the same applies hereinafter), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is immediately before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the middle display area Dm2 (the middle symbol row Z2; the same applies hereinafter). , the third symbol is still unrecognizably changed at high speed. That is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to as (sometimes simply referred to as "high-speed fluctuation" production element) is being executed, and just before the so-called "7" symbol and "8" symbol appear. state.

In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in a forewarning mode suggesting that the chance development pattern will appear in a situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the central small region Ds2. is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Here, when the chance eye development pattern is stopped, the effect element of "pseudo change" is started, and the effect element of "pseudo change" is the same pattern in the middle display area Dm2 as in the left display area Dm1. An effect is performed as to whether the "7" symbol stops and the chance symbol appears, or the symbol different from the left display area Dm1 (for example, "8" symbol) stops and the false chance symbol appears. .

In the cockpit display area Db, an executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the second reserved symbol indicates that each effect unit of the "slump effect" is reserved. It indicates that the number is 2 times.

Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 are the actual reservation displayed at the timing when the ball wins the winning openings 77a and 78a. On the other hand, the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 is a dummy reserved display displayed at the timing when the ball wins the dummy winning opening 75.例文帳に追加When the player recognizes this situation, he/she grasps that the performance unit performed by the third symbol display device 81 exists three times including the performance unit being executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(b), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The "7" pattern in the area Dm1 and the "8" pattern in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests a state as if the 1 production unit of 1 ends with "failure display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43(b), the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends in the main display area Dm, and the effect unit of 1 of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(c), a new variation (performation unit) is started again from the "788" gacha chance symbol that was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 43(b). , all the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 are changed at high speed invisibly.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode similar to that of FIG. 43(b) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, the state of FIG. , the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased from the second The reserved design displayed in the reserved design display area Db2 is shifted to the first reserved design display area Db1 and displayed as a reserved design. Since the reserved design displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2 is shifted and displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1, the reserved design is not displayed in the second reserved design display area Db2.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a dummy pending display, and the main display area Dm is in a state where the effect unit based on the dummy pending display is executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(d), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The "7" pattern in the area Dm1 and the "8" pattern in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests a state as if the 1 production unit of 1 ends with "failure display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43(d), the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends in the main display area Dm, and the effect unit of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(e), a new variation (performation unit) is started again from the "788" gacha chance symbol that was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 43(d). , all the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 are changed at high speed invisibly.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode similar to that of FIG. 43(d) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, the state of FIG. The execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased from the display area Db0, and the reserved design displayed in the first reserved design display area Db1 is shifted to the execution design display area Db0 and displayed as the execution design. Since the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 are shifted and displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is the final reserved display, and the main display area Dm is in a state where the effect unit based on the final reserved display is executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(f), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The "7" pattern in the area Dm1 and the "8" pattern in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests a state as if the 1 production unit of 1 ends with "failure display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43(f), the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends in the main display area Dm, and the effect unit of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Here, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db are erased after the completion of the above-described effect units, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a plurality of "pseudo-run" effects performed in the "slump effect" in the third pattern display device 81 (as a time chart, the "special reach" in FIG. ”). FIG. 44(a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 44(b) is a diagram showing a state just before the development of the chance symbol appears. FIG. 44(c) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44(b) is being executed. FIG. 44(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element is executed from the state of FIG. 44(c). 44(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44(d) is executed, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state just before the ready-to-win formation pattern appears in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of FIG.44(e).

Specifically, in FIG. 44(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "8" is displayed. It is immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably changed at high speed. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and "8" symbol, which is the "high-speed fluctuation" production element.

In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in a forewarning mode suggesting that the chance development pattern will appear in a situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the central small region Ds2. is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the suspension symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth suspension symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that each of the variable effect and the "slump effect" is executed. This indicates that the number of pending balls in the performance unit is 0.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(b), from the state of FIG. 44(a), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and the left display area Dm1 and the left display area Dm1 are displayed. It is assumed that the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 determine the chance symbol, and that the appearance of the chance symbol develops (continues) the "slump effect". suggesting. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44(b), the player recognizes that the "pseudo run" does not end in the main display area Dm and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. Since the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db continues the "pseudo-run", the executed symbols are not erased and are the same as the state of FIG. 44(a).

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(c), the chance symbol "778" that had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. shows a state in which is rapidly fluctuating invisibly.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the right small area Ds3 displays the "x2" symbol indicating that the appearance of the chance symbol has led to the second "pseudo run" effect. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a maximum of five "pseudo-run" effects in the "slump effect", and the greater the number of executions of the "pseudo-run" effect, the greater the selection at the time of the jackpot. Therefore, by clearly displaying the number of executions of the "pseudo-run" effect in the right small area Ds3, the player can always recognize the degree of expectation for the big win in the effect being executed. can. In addition, the display mode of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG. 44(b), since the "pseudo-running" continues, the executed symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(d), from the state of FIG. 44(c), the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and then in the right display area Dm3. The third symbol "8" is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2. It suggests that the chance symbol by the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 is confirmed again, and that the appearance of the chance symbol will develop (continue) the present "slump effect". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44(d), the player recognizes that the "pseudo run" does not end in the main display area Dm and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. Since the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db continues the "pseudo-run", the executed symbols are not erased and are the same as in the state of FIG. 44(c).

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(e), the chance symbol "778" which had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. shows a state in which is rapidly fluctuating invisibly.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a "x3" symbol is displayed in the right small area Ds3 to indicate that the third "pseudo-run" effect has developed due to the appearance of the chance symbol. The display mode of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG. 44(d) without erasing the executed symbols since the "pseudo run" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(f), from the state of FIG. 44(e), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and the right display area Dm3 is displayed. , the third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably being changed at high speed. That is, it shows a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the reach forming pattern by the "7" pattern during the execution of the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation", that is, the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" pattern. . The display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG. 44(e).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44(f), the appearance of the "ready-to-win display" in the third "pseudo-run" effect causes a plurality of "pseudo-run" effects to be performed. To improve the amusement of a game by executing some kind of ``ready-to-win display'' above, so that attention can be drawn to subsequent performances (namely, ``ready-to-win'' display) in a state where expectations for a big win are high. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of the effect element of the "development propriety effect" performed in the "slump effect" of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "first development propriety effect" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. ), and FIG. 45(c) shows a state in which the "third development permission/inhibition effect" is executed from the state in FIG. 45(b). It is the figure which showed the state where it is.

Specifically, in FIG. 45(a), first, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and then the third symbol "8" is displayed in the right display area Dm3. 3 symbols are stop-displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle display area Dm2, the "7" symbol in the left display area Dm1, and the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3. 8” symbol appears in a pseudo manner, suggesting that the appearance of the false chance pattern will result in a “losing display” in this variable presentation.

Further, on the front side of the third symbols stopped and displayed in each of the display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the liquid crystal screen of the central portion (mainly the middle display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81 cracks in a pseudo manner. , a state in which the effect element of the "first development propriety effect" is being executed as if the liquid crystal screen were to break.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo crack of the liquid crystal screen spreads further from the effect element of this "first development propriety effect" and develops (successfully) into the effect element of the "second development propriety effect" described later. ), or the screen is pseudo-divided from the state of the production element of the "first development propriety production", and develops (success) into the production element of "pseudo ream" or "Which reach", or "second Four production patterns are prepared for whether the production (that is, the "slump production") ends (development failure) with the production element of "1 development propriety production".

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45(a), the effect being executed (i.e., the "slump effect") is changed to the "second development possibility" without fixing the false chance pattern. To make a player maintain an expectation for a big win by continuation of the performance by speculating that it will develop into a performance element of "performance", a "pseudo-ream" performance, or a performance element of "Which reach". can be done. In addition, this "first development availability effect" is configured to be performed within a period from the beginning of the "development availability effect" (that is, "0 seconds") to "3 seconds".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45(b), the display areas of the pseudo crack are the left display area Dm1, the right display area Dm3, and the sub display area from the effect element of the "first development propriety effect" of FIG. 45(a). It shows a state in which the effect element of the “second development propriety effect” expanded to Ds is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo crack of the liquid crystal screen spreads further from the effect element of this "second development propriety effect" and develops (successfully) into the effect element of the "third development propriety effect" described later. ), or the screen is pseudo-divided from the state of the effect element of the “second development propriety effect”, and develops (successfully) into a “pseudo-continuous” effect or a “Which reach” effect element, or “second Four production patterns are prepared for whether the production (that is, the "slump production") ends (development failure) with the production element of 2 development propriety production".

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45(b), the effect being executed (that is, "slump effect") is changed to "third To make a player maintain an expectation for a big win by continuation of the performance by speculating that it will develop into a performance element of "performance", a "pseudo-ream" performance, or a performance element of "Which reach". can be done. It should be noted that this "second development propriety effect" is configured so that it can be performed within a period of "3 seconds" to "7 seconds" in the "development propriety effect".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45(c), the effect element of the "third development propriety effect" in which the display area of the pseudo-crack is further expanded from the effect element of the "second development propriety effect" of FIG. 45(b). is running.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the liquid crystal screen cracks in a pseudo manner from the effect element of the "third development propriety effect" to the state of the effect element of the "third development propriety effect". 3, whether to develop (success) the production or the production element of "Which reach?" Two production patterns are prepared.

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45(c), the effect being executed (i.e., the "slump effect") is changed to the "pseudo-run" effect without confirming the false chance pattern. Alternatively, it is possible to presume that it will develop into an effect element of "whatever reach", and to keep the player's expectation for a big win by continuing the effect. It should be noted that this "third development propriety effect" is configured so that it can be performed within a period of "7 seconds" to "10 seconds" in the "development propriety effect".

It should be noted that each of the effect elements of the "development propriety effect" in the first embodiment is configured to display cracks in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds as if the liquid crystal screen were cracked. On the other hand, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that the above-mentioned cracks do not occur (they do not reach or are displayed on the rear side). This is because the effect element of the “development possibility effect” is a effect of whether or not the stop result of the “slump effect” being executed changes, and the pending effect (fluctuation effect or “slump effect”) is It is not meant to change. Therefore, the display mode of the cockpit display area Db, which cannot be changed by this "development possibility effect", should be maintained as it is even if the effect elements of the "development possibility effect" are successfully developed. No cracks are displayed up to the cockpit display area Db, indicating that there is no change.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" and the effect element of "progress possibility effect" performed in the "slump effect" in the third pattern display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24(b)). FIG. 46(a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, and shows a state just before the appearance of the chance symbol development symbol. FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing the state of whether or not the chance symbol is stopped in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of FIG. 46(a), and FIG. 46(c). ) is a diagram showing a state in which the gachachan eyes pattern appears in the "pseudo-fluctuation" production element from the state of FIG. 46(b), and FIG. FIG. 46(e) is a diagram showing a state suggesting the end of the variable effect by the appearance of the "pseudo-fluctuation" effect element and the appearance of the quasi-chance pattern. FIG. 46(f) shows a state in which the "third development permission/inhibition effect" is successfully developed from the state in FIG. 46(e). It is the figure which showed the state where the chance eye design appeared.

Specifically, in FIG. 46(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "8" is displayed. It is immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably changed at high speed. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and "8" symbol, which is the "high-speed fluctuation" production element.

In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in a state in which the "slump effect" is being executed in the central small area Ds2, and the character pattern is displayed in a forewarning mode suggesting that the chance development pattern will appear. there is Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the suspension symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth suspension symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that each of the variable effect and the "slump effect" is executed. This indicates that the number of pending balls in the performance unit is 0.

Next, in FIG. 46(b), from the state of FIG. 46(a), the third symbol "8" is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, and the symbol "7" is displayed in the left display area Dm1. symbol and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 are determined, and the "pseudo change" effect element is executed in the main display area Dm.

In the effect element of this "pseudo change", in the middle display area Dm2, the "7" symbol, which is the same symbol as the left display area Dm1, stops and a chance eye symbol appears, or a symbol different from the left display area Dm1. (For example, "8" symbol) is stopped, and an effect is performed as to whether the gasechan eyes symbol appears. The display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 46(a).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(c), from the state of FIG. 46(b), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "8" is shown to be stopped and displayed. there is That is, while the "pseudo-fluctuation" is being executed, a so-called gacha chance pattern appears with the "7" pattern in the left display area Dm1 and the "8" pattern in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3. It shows the state just before (just before). The display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those shown in FIG. 46(b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(d), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. The "7" pattern in the area Dm1 and the "8" pattern in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. suggests a state as if it ends with "losing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46(d), the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends in the main display area Dm, and the player guesses that the "slump effect" ends. .

Also, the character pattern in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the pseudo appearance of the "failure display" in the "slump effect". The other display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as in the state of FIG. 46(c).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(e), a state is shown in which the effect element of the "third development propriety effect" is executed from the state of FIG. 46(d).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46(e), the effect being executed (i.e., the "slump effect") is changed to the "pseudo-run" effect without confirming the false chance pattern. Alternatively, it is possible to presume that it will develop into an effect element of "whatever reach", and to keep the player's expectation for a big win by continuing the effect. In addition, the display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG. 46(d) without erasing the execution symbol since the "development possible/impossible effect" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(f), from the state of FIG. 46(e), the liquid crystal screen of the third pattern display device 81 is cracked in a simulated manner in the effect element of the "third development propriety effect", and the beat is cracked. 46(e) shows a state in which the fake chance symbol (that is, "788") displayed in the main display area Dm is replaced with a chance symbol (that is, "778").

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46(f), the player feels a sense of happiness from having guessed correctly in the state of FIG. 46(e), and the effect continues for the player. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the big hit by.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" and the effect element of "Which reach" performed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 24(b)). FIG. 47(a) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, and is just before the chance eye development symbol stops in the main display area Dm. FIG. 47(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance eye symbol appears in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of FIG. 47(a), and FIG. 47(c) ) is a state in which the “pseudo-fluctuation” effect element is executed after all the symbols have changed again from the state of FIG. FIG. 47(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the ready-to-win formation pattern appears from the state of FIG. FIG. 47(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element "Which reach" is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47(d), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the state which the big-hit design appeared from the state of FIG.47(e).

Specifically, in FIG. 47(a), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stop-displayed, and in the right display area Dm3, the third symbol "8" is displayed. It is immediately before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably changed at high speed. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and "8" symbol, which is the "high-speed fluctuation" production element.

In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the character pattern is displayed in a forewarning mode suggesting that the chance development pattern will appear in a situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the central small region Ds2. is displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the characters are cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character design or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the suspension symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth suspension symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution pattern indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that each of the variable effect and the "slump effect" is executed. This indicates that the number of pending balls in the performance unit is 0.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(b), from the state of FIG. 47(a), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and the left display area Dm1 and the left display area Dm1 are displayed. It is assumed that the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 determine the chance symbol, and that the appearance of the chance symbol develops (continues) the "slump effect". suggesting. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 47(b), the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" does not end in the main display area Dm, and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. recognize. Since the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db continues the "pseudo-run", the executed symbols are not erased and are the same as the state of FIG. 47(a).

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(c), from the state of FIG. 47(b), in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed, and the right display area Dm3 is displayed. , the third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the medium display area Dm2, the third symbol is still unrecognizably being changed at high speed. That is, it shows a state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the reach forming pattern by the "7" pattern during the execution of the effect element of "pseudo-fluctuation", that is, the appearance of the so-called "reach display" by the "7" pattern. .

However, in the sub-display area Ds, a "x2" symbol is displayed in the right small area Ds3, which indicates that the appearance of the chance symbol has led to the second "pseudo run" effect. The other display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as in the state of FIG. 47(b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(d), in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. This shows a state in which the "ready-to-reach display" is confirmed and the effect element of "whatever reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In the effect element of "Which reach?", first, the entire main display area Dm is displayed as if it were enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped is displayed in an enlarged manner, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at a low speed so that it can be visually recognized. , scrolled at a low speed from the "6" pattern to the "7" pattern).

On the other hand, the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased as the main display area Dm expands based on the occurrence of the effect element of "Which reach", and the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db become invisible. It is in a good state.

This is because the secondary display area Ds mainly has a function of suggesting whether or not the "ready-to-win display" will occur due to the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" in the main display area Dm. is generated, the significance of the existence of the sub-display area Ds is diminished. Further, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the "ready-to-win display" is the "big win display" or the "losing display". There is, and the attention to the display contents of the sub-display area Ds suggesting the occurrence of the "ready-to-reach display" fades away. Therefore, when the "ready-to-win display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged so that the player can easily recognize the contents of the "ready-to-win display" that the player focuses on. is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds is erased along with the enlargement.

In the state of FIG. 47(d), the "x2" pattern is displayed in the portion corresponding to the right small region Ds3 of the sub-display region Ds, as in the display state of FIG. 47(c). Therefore, as in FIG. 47(c), it indicates that the second "pseudo-continuation" effect is being developed.

This is because the "x2" symbol suggests to the player the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed, and the "x2" symbol during the variable effect or "slump effect". By making the player confirm, whether or not the variable performance or the "slump performance" being executed will result in a big hit can be made predictable to the player, and the player is given interest based on the prediction.

In addition, the cockpit display area Db is a display that indicates how many variable effects or "slump effects" are pending. When this occurs, the player determines whether the variable performance or the "slump performance" being executed will be the "jackpot display" or the "losing display" rather than the number of pending (waiting) variable performances or "slump performances". I'm paying attention to what it will be.

Therefore, the player does not pay attention to the reserved symbols and the executed symbols indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect or the "slump effect", and the reserved symbols and the executed symbols are displayed in the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the "ready-to-win display". is displayed, the player cannot concentrate on the "ready-to-win display" effect, and the player may feel annoyed by the display of the pending symbols and the executed symbols.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relation to the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed. . Furthermore, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are different from the display control of the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed (that is, the variable effect process (see FIG. 42)). The display is controlled by system processing (holding display setting processing (see FIG. 38) in the sound lamp control device 113). During the execution of the "reach display", various additional effects are executed for many sprites by displaying various character patterns and displaying many effects on each character pattern. The processing load of display control is increasing. In such a situation, if the display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed is performed, the number of sprites of each reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The processing load related to overall display control increases, and display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Furthermore, the execution symbols displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db take over (inherit) the display mode of the pending symbols changed by the "suspension change notice", and the execution symbols are displayed in that display mode. In order to indicate the degree of expectation for the big hit of the variable performance, it has a direct relationship with the variable performance or "slump performance" being executed. However, the "suspended change notice" suggests the expected degree of appearance of the "jackpot display" and the expected degree of appearance of the "ready-to-win display". Therefore, when the "ready-to-reach display" appears, the indication of the degree of expectation for appearance of the "ready-to-reach display" as the "suspension change notice" is fulfilled. In addition, when the "ready-to-win display" appears, it is in a state where the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "jackpot display" is satisfied to a certain extent (for example, half). Furthermore, as described above, when the "ready-to-win display" appears, the player focuses on the effect content of the "ready-to-win display", and the interest in the display mode of the "holding change notice" in the execution pattern is fading. there is

Therefore, during the execution of the "ready-to-win display", the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention of the player are erased, and the effect of the "ready-to-win display" is mainly executed on the display screen, so that the player can be put into the "ready-to-win display". It is possible to draw attention (concentration) to the production of. In addition, by eliminating the reserved symbols and the executed symbols that attract less attention from the player, the load on the display control can be eliminated in advance, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the game, and preventing the dropping of frames and the like. It is possible to prevent display abnormalities from occurring.

Next, in FIG. 47(e), from the state of FIG. 47(d), the main display area Dm performs the "big hit display" or the "losing display" in the "which direction". It shows a state where

In this "which direction" effect, the "7" pattern constituting the "big hit display" and the "8" pattern constituting the "losing display" mutually push the other side out of the display area. be. Then, when the "7" pattern constituting the "jackpot display" pushes out the "8" pattern from the display area and the "7" pattern is displayed in the center of the display area, It is set so that it becomes a big win and "big win display" appears as a display result. On the other hand, if the ``8'' pattern that constitutes the ``losing display'' pushes out the ``7'' pattern from the display area and the ``8'' pattern is displayed in the center of the display area, the result is a failure, and the display result is ``losing display''. is set to appear.

In the state of FIG. 47(e), the reach formation pattern of the "7" pattern, which is the cause of the production element of "Which reach" is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 are displayed. "Which effect" indicates whether the "slump effect" being executed is a "jackpot display" or a "losing display". When "Which is ready-to-win" is performed in a state in which formation symbols are not displayed at all, the player may forget which third symbol caused the "ready-to-win display". On the other hand, if the ready-to-reach formation pattern is displayed in a large size during the execution of "Which is it?" There is a risk that it will be lost.

Therefore, during the execution of the "Which effect", the reach formation pattern of the third pattern that caused the occurrence of the "Which reach" is displayed small in the upper left of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the "ready-to-win display" is occurring without hindering the "which way effect", and to play the type of the third symbol that caused the "ready-to-win display" in the game. It can be clearly suggested to the person.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 47(e), in the portion corresponding to the right small region Ds3 of the sub-display region Ds, as in the display states of FIGS. is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 47(f), from the state of FIG. 47(e), the "7" symbol, which is the same symbol as the reach forming symbol, is displayed in "Which reach", and the "7" symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. It shows a state in which the "jackpot display" by is appearing. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of happiness and satisfaction from the appearance of the "jackpot display" as a result of the "slump effect".

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the When the variable performance of the third pattern is executed based on the winning to the left special figure winning port 77a or the right special figure winning port 78a for the first time from the slump state where the variable performance is not performed, from the actual time of the variable performance The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a long "slump effect". By constructing in this way, the performance time performed by the third pattern display device 81 is lengthened, the situation where the performance is not performed by the third pattern display device 81 is reduced, and the player is prevented from being aroused. can be done.

In addition, based on the winning to the dummy winning hole 75, the dummy reservation display is displayed in the same manner as the actual reservation display, and when the "slump effect" is executed, the dummy reservation display is extinguished (erased). . By configuring in this way, the situation where the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) is actually performed by entering the ball into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75 While making it difficult to identify whether the lottery of the first pattern (third pattern) is actually not performed due to the entry of the ball into the ball, the third pattern is displayed by the "slump effect" executed by the third pattern display device 81. The performance time performed on the display device 81 can be made longer than the actual variable performance time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by executing a greater number of effects than the actually acquired variable effects. Further, since the number of executed symbols and reserved symbols can be matched with the number of effects to be executed and displayed, the dynamic effect state on the third symbol display device 81 can be lengthened and the player can It is possible to provide a performance that does not make the user feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when executing the "slump effect", a special symbol is used to match the displayed execution symbols and reserved symbols with the number of executions of the effect unit of the "slump effect". When a predetermined time elapses after the balls start winning into the winning openings 77a and 78a and the ``slump performance'' is started, the balls retained in the retaining device 73 are made to enter the dummy winning opening 75, and the dummy retaining display is performed. Display the pending symbol as. Then, every time the performance unit of one ``slump performance'' is completed, the execution pattern is erased, the reserved pattern, which is a dummy reserved display, is moved to the execution pattern, and the next ``slump performance'' is performed based on the moved execution pattern. is started, the performance is executed as if the variable performance was completed once. By configuring in this way, while executing the performance unit equal to or more than the number of times of execution of the acquired variable performance, the dynamic performance of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is performed more than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable performance. By lengthening the time and reducing the situation in which the third pattern display device 81 does not perform the dynamic performance of the third pattern, the player is prevented from losing interest and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" production mode, with respect to the fluctuation time of the acquired variable production An extension time for additionally performing an effect is acquired by a lottery, and a "slump effect" is executed during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and the extension time. By configuring in this way, even if it is a variable performance that does not give a big win, the dynamic performance time of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variable performance. However, by reducing the situation in which the third pattern display device 81 does not perform the dynamic performance of the third pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the production mode in which the "reach display" is executed (that is, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, or the "special reach" production mode ), the extension time is not selected by lottery, and one or a plurality of "pseudo-run" effects are executed according to the obtained variable time, and the effect element of "whatever reach" is executed. As a result, when the "ready-to-reach display" is obtained, which has little need to extend the performance time, the extension time is not drawn and acquired, thereby reducing the processing load related to extraction of the extension time. , management of the presentation time of the "slump presentation" becomes easy.

Also, if the production mode of the variable production acquired by the start winning during the "slump production" is the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the extension time is not drawn, and according to the acquired variable time " It is configured such that the production time of "slump production" is added. This is because the extended time has already been acquired in the "slump effect" that has already been executed, and if additional extended time is acquired in that state, the effect time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. In addition, management of the performance time becomes complicated. Therefore, if the variable effect is acquired during the "slump effect", by configuring so as not to additionally extract the extended time, the processing load related to the extraction of the extended time can be reduced and the "slump effect" can be achieved. It becomes easy to manage the production time of.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the performance time (variation time) of all the performance elements of the variable performance that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the performance time in units of "5 seconds" (that is, " 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, or 50 seconds). In addition, in the "slump state", the presentation time of all the presentation elements except for the presentation element of "probability of development" is an integer multiple of the presentation time in units of "5 seconds". The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also an integral multiple of the rendering time in units of "5 seconds". By configuring in this way, when performing a "slump effect" composed of a plurality of effect units in relation to one acquired variable effect, the fluctuation time (and the extension time) of the variable effect and the "slump effect ”, and even if a plurality of “slump effects” are executed in relation to one variable effect (and extended time), the variable time (and extended time) can be matched with the performance time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main controller 110 does not provide variations in the number of variation patterns for the "pseudo-run" effect, and only provides a variation pattern in which the number of times of the "pseudo-run" effect is one. Even in such a case, the variation pattern of the "pseudo-continuous" effect can be executed a plurality of times as the "slump effect". Interest can be improved.

In addition, during the execution of the "slump effect", the ball held in the holding device 73 is made to enter the dummy prize winning port 75 in accordance with the establishment of the predetermined condition, and based on the prize winning, the holding pattern, which is the dummy holding display, is displayed. By displaying in the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to display in the cockpit display area Db a number of reserved symbols that is one more than the number of reserved balls in the acquired variable effect. Also, even when the performance unit of the ``slump performance'' is performed more times than the acquired execution frequency of the variable performance, the consistency between the number of performance units of the ``slump performance'' and the reserved pattern can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the performance of the lottery for winning or losing is performed more times than the actual number of variable performances without any discrepancies in the performance.

Furthermore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead processing based on the dummy hold command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command. In the pre-reading process based on the dummy pending command, whether the "slump effect" to be executed is appropriate or not, and based on the appropriateness, the pending change counter 223d and the pending change table 222e are referred to determine whether or not to perform the "suspended change notice". is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the "suspension change notice" even in the suspension pattern related to the "slump effect" and to enrich the variations of the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of performance units are executed in the "slump performance", but the "suspension change notice" of the "slump performance" collectively determines the plurality of performance units. is configured as By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to perform a lottery for the ``suspension change notice'' for each performance unit of the ``slump effect'', and the control regarding the ``suspension change notice'' during the ``slump effect'' can be simplified. , which facilitates the creation of programs and reduces the processing load.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball into the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" was the effect mode including the "ready-to-win display". In this case, since there is no need to display an additional reserved pattern, there is no need to display an additional reserved pattern in order to perform a “pseudo-continued” effect that does not consume the reserved pattern rather than a “pseudo-continued” effect that consumes the reserved pattern. It is configured not to allow the ball to flow into the dummy prize winning port 75.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, a “pseudo-continuous” effect that does not consume reserved symbols in the “slump effect” is performed, and the same number of times of the actual effect unit (variable effect) is performed. Even in this case, it is possible to ensure consistency between the number of performances for each performance unit of the "slump performance" and the number of pending symbols. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any discrepancies in the effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, even if the "jackpot display" is won in the "slump effect", in the case of the variable effect including the "reach display", the extension time is not acquired, and the series of the "slump effect" is not acquired. The performance time of is the same as the variable time of the acquired variable performance. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the "slump effect" are synchronized. Therefore, even when a command related to a performance related to a big win (that is, an opening performance) or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110, it is possible to match the contents of the performance, and to start the big win performance from the end of the "slump performance". It is possible to provide a performance that does not give a sense of incongruity at the start.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball into the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" was the effect mode including the "ready-to-win display". In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning hole 75, and the holding pattern or the execution pattern as the dummy holding display is not displayed, and instead, the display mode of "holding change notice" is displayed. is increased by one rank (for example, the display mode of "none" is changed to the display mode of "blue"). Here, if the display mode of the reserved pattern or the executed pattern is raised by one rank, the display mode (that is, the display mode of "green" or "red") indicating that the "ready-to-win display" or the like is confirmed. At this time, if the reserved pattern corresponding to the presentation mode in which the "ready-to-win display" does not appear is raised by one rank, there is a possibility that the content of the presentation may be inconsistent. Therefore, in the reserved pattern or the execution pattern corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of failure, even if the display mode is ranked up by 1, the lowest display mode (that is, "none (white)" that does not cause inconsistency in the content of the effect) (display mode)) is displayed so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

In addition, the MPU 221 of the first embodiment is during the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0", when there is a new starting prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, It is configured to discriminate the progress of the ``slump presentation'' and to subtract the value of the extended time from the value of the slump presentation timer 223g if the ``slump presentation'' is in the presentation other than the extended time. . By configuring in this way, when a new start winning occurs during the "slump effect", in performing an additional "slump effect" to the "slump effect" being executed, each "slump effect" In order to match the above, the extension time set for performing the additional effect can be reset once, and the effect content of the "slump effect" can be newly set. This means that if the effect element other than the effect element during the extended time, that is, the effect element that precedes the effect element based on the extended time is being executed, the effect element corresponding to the acquired extended time is executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the contents of a series of "slump effects" are set again, the contents of the effects will not be inconsistent.

Further, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set after setting the "slump effect" based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223g when the variation pattern acquired in the "slump state" includes the "ready-to-reach display". , is configured to be cleared to "0". This is because the variation pattern including the "ready-to-win display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the subsequent special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, so the variation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In the case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the variation pattern including "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized, and until the "slump state" is entered again, instead of the "slump state", the " The following production is performed as "normal state". Further, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this stage, it is no longer necessary to grasp the progress of the "slump effect", and it is no longer necessary to perform the shift control of the pending symbols including the dummy pending display. The control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In addition, when a relatively long fluctuation time is acquired based on the starting prize in the "slump state", the method of not executing the additional "slump effect" based on the subsequent starting prize is limited to the above control contents. However, any control content may be used as long as the control content does not include the execution of the additional “slump effect”.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect", when the reserved pattern that is the dummy reserved display is displayed, that is, the dummy reserved balls counter When the value of 223c is greater than "0", it is regarded as the end timing of one performance unit in "slump performance (that is, "gase quasi-running" performance)", and the value of dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by one. At the same time, it is configured to execute shift processing in the pending display information storage area 223e. By constructing in this manner, the start and end of the "slump effect" and the shift display of the reserved pattern and the executed pattern are displayed while being matched, so that the effect as if the variable effect was completed once. It is possible to execute the "slump performance" more times than the number of actual fluctuation performances without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, the audio ramp control device 113 of the first embodiment, in the "slump effect" being executed based on the previous start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state", the "slump effect" During the execution of the production based on the extended time of When the variable production is acquired based on the new start winning to the special figure winning opening 77a, 78a, the extended time based on the previous start winning "Slump production" is being executed is. For this reason, in order to perform an additional "slump effect" based on a new start prize, in order to match each "slump effect", once the remaining amount of the extension time obtained based on the previous start win is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the variable time acquired based on the new start winning, the effect contents of the "slump effect" are set again. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". To synchronize end timing of variable performance and end timing of "slump performance" without performing complicated control.

Furthermore, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each unit of effect that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and furthermore, when resetting The remaining remaining time less than one performance unit is supplemented with ``development possibility performance'' which is a performance that does not cause discomfort even when the performance is interrupted in the middle and is flexible (with a range) in the performance time. set as Also, the maximum effect time of this "development possible/impossible effect" is configured to be equivalent to the obtainable extension time. By configuring in this way, in the situation where the "slump effect" longer than the acquired variable effect is executed, that is, during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, a new "slump effect" is generated. Even if a variable performance is added due to the start winning, the consistency of the performance time can be taken by the "development possibility performance" that can be executed in a width less than the extension time, and the acquired variable performance Since the end timing can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire 'slump performance', the performance is not inconsistent and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls in the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 is the same three. By constructing in this way, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning opening 75 based only on the number of awarded balls. Therefore, the player can determine whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is during the variable effect in the "normal state" or the "slump effect" in the "slump state" based only on the number of awarded balls. Since it is not possible to discriminate whether it is ", it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity and losing interest in the game even when a "slump performance" is performed for a longer time than the actual variation time of the variable performance. can do.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, until the extension time in the "slump effect" is over, the main controller 110 side again restarts the "slump state". Without setting, change to "slump state" at the stage when a series of "slump effects" are completed. That is, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, it means that the fluctuation time of the variable effects has passed, and even if the state is internally in the demonstration effect, it will be changed to the "slump state" for a while. is awaited. Therefore, in the main controller 110, a series of "slump effects" is completed, and then the "slump state" is set and the "slump effect" is set again. It is no longer necessary to perform complicated control for consistency with the performance, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the slump performance.

In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command from the main control device 110, the production situation in the third symbol display device 81 at the time of receiving the confirmation command ), the setting of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. Specifically, if the "slump effect" is not being executed when the fixed command is received, the fixed command is received during the execution of the variable effect, so the display control device 114 is instructed to display the fixed effect of the variable effect. Set the confirmation command for display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ``slump effect'' is being executed when the confirmation command is received, the ``slump effect'' is being executed and the confirmation command is received at the first stop timing of the ``gase pseudo-continuation 2''. Therefore, the first stop command for display is set to instruct the display control device 114 to first stop the "slump effect" of "gase pseudo-run 2" (that is, stop the left symbol row Z1). . In this way, when the confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, depending on whether the variable performance is being executed or the "slump performance" is being executed, the performance being performed by the third symbol display device 81 is supported. The command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and the effect without any discrepancy can be provided.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an additional start winning occurs during execution of the "slump effect" and the number of suspended variable effects becomes "2" or more, the "slump It is configured to execute the variable production without executing the production. By configuring in this way, in a situation where the effect of executing the "slump production" is poor (that is, in a state where the number of suspensions of the variable production is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable production is executed without executing the "slump production". Since there is no need to perform complicated processing for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a of the first embodiment is formed so as to have a sharp inclined surface, and when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a tilts toward the front passage wall 72a side, the front end portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is inclined toward the front passage wall 72a. The inclined surface is configured to be in surface contact with the front side passage wall 72a of the ball sorting inlet 72 . With this configuration, when the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted, the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a can be tilted further toward the front side passage wall 72a of the sorting ball entrance 72. can be reliably guided into the retaining device 73.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the sorting ball entrance 72 is made difficult to collide with the upper surface side of the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a, and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. By colliding with the surface (that is, the upper right surface of the tilted retaining device opening/closing plate 73a; see FIG. 5(c)), the impact when the ball collides with the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a is reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the retaining device opening/closing plate 73a from being damaged.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the holding device 73 is configured to hold one ball, and the one ball enters the dummy winning hole 75 to give a predetermined game value, while the "slump effect" is performed. By being associated with the performance (display of the reserved pattern which is the dummy reserved display), not only is the game value simply given, but also the winning of the dummy winning opening 75 is associated with the performance, thereby enriching the variation of the game. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the above interest can be achieved with the configuration in which one ball is held in the holding device 73, the structure of the holding device 73 can be made more compact than the conventional holding device in which a plurality of holding balls must be held. can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the installation area of the holding device 73 in the game area and increase the degree of freedom in designing the board surface in the game area.

As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be inferred. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to employ other numerical values.

Further, it is of course possible to combine each configuration of the above-described embodiment with one of the configurations of the modifications shown below. Furthermore, it is of course possible to combine any one of the configurations of the modifications shown below with each configuration of one or a plurality of other modifications. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration. In the following, description will be made based on the reference numerals of the parts used in the explanation of the first embodiment, but it is of course possible to replace them with the reference numerals of the same or similar parts in other embodiments.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described embodiment, regarding the alternate distribution unit 71, the distribution ball entrance 72, the holding device 73, the board surface return port 74, the dummy prize winning port 75, the distribution device 76, the left side route 77, the right side route 78, the left side special drawing prize The opening 77a, the right special figure winning opening 78a, and the like are unitized into one alternate distribution unit 71 and configured. On the other hand, each of the members 72 to 78a may be composed of separate members, or the members 72 to 78a may be unitized so as to be different from the alternate distribution unit 71. FIG. By configuring in this way, although the number of parts is increased, replacement of each member 72 to 78a in the event of failure is facilitated, and the efficiency of maintenance work of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, one ball can be held in the holding device 73 . Alternatively, two or more balls may be held. In this case, when a release condition for the suspended balls is established (for example, a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the start of the "slump effect"), all of the suspended balls are released at once. Alternatively, it may be configured to release a plurality of reserved spheres one by one. In this case, it is possible to display a plurality of reserved patterns, which are dummy reserved displays, in the ``slump presentation'', thereby increasing the performance unit executable in the ``slump presentation'' and enriching variations of presentation.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, in the "slump state", when the ball starts winning in the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a, regardless of the validity of the variable production based on the starting winning, the "slump production" is configured to be executed. was On the other hand, if the obtained variable effect is a big hit, the "slump effect" may not be performed, and only if it is a loss, the "slump effect" may be performed. The variation pattern of the big win has an effect element that is not in the change pattern of the loss, such as the effect element of "re-variation". Therefore, when the "slump effect" is performed so as to match the variation pattern of the big win, the processing becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the control load increases. Therefore, by configuring the "slump effect" to be performed only when the acquired variation effect is the variation pattern of losing, there is no need to match with the variation pattern of the big win, so the processing is simplified and the control is performed. The burden can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the variable effect obtained based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a jackpot, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0 ' is cleared, and the variable effect is performed without performing the 'slump effect'.

<Modification 4>
In the above-described embodiment, in the "slump state", when the ball starts winning the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, regardless of whether the variable effect based on the starting winning is appropriate or not, and it is a case of "reach display". However, it was configured to execute a “slump effect”. On the other hand, when the acquired variable effect is the effect mode for executing the "reach display", the "slump effect" is not performed, and only when the "non-reach" effect mode is performed, the "slump effect" is performed. can be configured to Variation patterns including "reach display" have various "reach display" production elements, and there are a wide variety of variation patterns. Therefore, when the "slump effect" is performed so as to match the variation pattern including the "ready-to-win display", the processing becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the control load increases. Therefore, by configuring the ``slump effect'' to be performed only when the acquired variable effect is the variation pattern of the ``non-reach'' effect mode, matching with the variation pattern of the effect mode for executing the ``reach display'' is performed. Since it is no longer necessary to take , the processing is simplified and the control load can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the variable production obtained based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a production mode including "reach display", the main slump The value of the counter 203e may be cleared to "0", and the "slump effect" may not be performed, but a variable effect may be performed.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when the ball wins the dummy winning hole 75, the reserved pattern is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) as the dummy reserved display. On the other hand, on the condition that the ball enters another winning hole (for example, the general winning hole 63), flows into the out hole 66, passes through the second ball entering hole 67, etc., the reserved symbol is displayed as a dummy reserved display. may be displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to winning (inflow) of the ball, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the "slump effect", or a predetermined effect is performed in the "slump effect" (for example, the pending pattern is divided into multiple effects, etc.) By doing so, it may be configured to display a reserved symbol as a dummy reserved display. By configuring in this way, the holding device 73 and the dummy prize winning opening 75 are not required, so the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, there was no mention of the ``slump effect'' for the variation pattern including the ``pseudo-continuous'' effect and the ``re-variation'' effect element. It may be configured to execute a “slump effect” in the pattern.

<Modification 7>
In the above-described embodiment, the effect element of the "development availability effect" is configured to always start from the "first development availability effect". On the other hand, the start of the effect element of the "development propriety effect" may be configured to start from the "second development propriety effect" or the "third development propriety effect". By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the above-described embodiment, the effect elements of the "development availability effect" are progressively changed from "first development availability effect" → "second development availability effect" → "third development availability effect" in proportion to the passage of time. configured to change. On the other hand, it may be configured so as to change in a manner that is not proportional to the passage of time. Specifically, for example, a pattern that maintains the state of "first development availability effect" all the time, or a pattern that changes to "first development availability effect" after changing to "second development availability effect" , a pattern that suddenly changes from "first development availability effect" to "third development availability effect", or after changing from "first development availability effect" to "second development availability effect" in "2 seconds", " A pattern or the like that changes in "1 second" is exemplified from the "second development propriety effect" to the "third development propriety effect". By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In the above-described embodiment, the degree of development (content) of the "development propriety effect" is set according to the remaining time of the "slump effect". On the other hand, it may be configured to select the degree of development and change pattern of the "development possible/impossible effect" according to the degree of expectation for the big win. By constructing the game machine in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and to change the degree of expectation for a big win according to the contents of development of the ``development propriety performance'', so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Modification 10>
In the above-described embodiment, the "slump effect" has a function of adjusting the time. On the other hand, an effect in which the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution time of the effect changes variably may be adopted as an effect for time adjustment in the "slump effect". Specifically, for example, a blackout effect in which the liquid crystal screen turns dark, a freeze effect in which the liquid crystal screen is stuck on the same screen and does not move, etc., are produced by effects as if the third pattern display device 81 were broken. may be configured to perform In addition, an effect that allows the player to predict that a specific effect will be repeatedly executed, such as an effect in which the fluctuating pattern temporarily stops and continues to swing on the spot until the final stop, or an effect in which the reciprocating motion is repeated. It may be configured to perform the “development permission/inhibition effect” by . By configuring in this way, even if the "development propriety effect" suddenly starts or is interrupted and replaced with another effect, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the time in the "slump effect" is increased. It may be configured to adjust.

<Modification 11>
In the above-described embodiment, the "development possibility effect" and "which reach" are configured as effect elements exclusively for the "slump effect". On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "development possible/impossible effect" and "whichever reach" can be selected even in the "normal state" variable effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 12>
In the above-described embodiment, after the "slump state" has been temporarily entered, the "slump state" is changed to the "normal state" by winning the starting prize. On the other hand, once it becomes a "slump state", the "slump state" may be maintained for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined number of seconds or until the next big win).

<Modification 13>
In each of the above embodiments, only one of the "15R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", or "2R probability variable jackpot" is awarded in the special symbol lottery. On the other hand, a jackpot different from the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, "non-probable variable jackpot", "latent variable jackpot", so-called "suddenly variable jackpot (2R variable jackpot)") and a lottery of "small hit" different from the jackpot may be configured to perform By configuring in this way, when the player wins the jackpot, the game value given to the player is made different, thereby providing variations in the game and realizing various game characteristics, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, when a ``small win'' is provided in the lottery of special symbols, when the small win is won, the opening and closing mode of the big prize opening 65a or the like similar to or similar to the big win to which the ``latency probability variation state'' is given. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the ``normal game state'' and the ``latency probability fluctuation state''. By constructing in this way, a game feature that makes the player guess which game state it is in is created, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the "small win" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a etc. is executed, but unlike the "15R probability variable big win" and "2R probability variable big win", the game state is not changed.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the values of the big hit random number counter C1 and the like are acquired based on the winning timing, and the big winning lottery is performed. On the other hand, in place of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, a plurality of predetermined winning areas are provided, and when a ball flows into the winning area, a game value corresponding to the winning area is given. good too. Specifically, for example, there is a first winning area where a first game value (for example, "7R time-saving jackpot") is given by the inflow of balls, and a higher game value than the first game value by the inflow of balls. A second winning area is provided in which a second game value (for example, "15R probability variable jackpot") is provided. Then, it may be configured such that whether or not the ball flows down to each winning area is differentiated by changing the driving mode of the driving accessory such as the electric accessory according to the game state. In addition, the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the winning areas may be used in combination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the enhancement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above embodiments, only when the "15R probability variable jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" is won, the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. . On the other hand, even if any jackpot is won after the jackpot ends, a so-called ST type game specification may be employed in which a predetermined number of "probability fluctuation states" are provided without omission after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the enhancement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the second symbol is variably displayed based on the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67, and the electric accessory 79 is opened for a predetermined time when the winning result is derived from the variable display. State and was configured. On the other hand, the electric accessory 79 may be displaced to the open state based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entering means. By constructing in this way, a game of how to enter the ball into the ball entering means in order to bring the electric accessory 79 into the open state is created, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Modification 17>
In the above-described embodiment, the stop display of the left symbol row Z1 of the "guise pseudo-run 2" in the "slump effect" is synchronized with the confirmation timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, the stoppage of some symbol variation (for example, the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 or the right symbol row Z3, or the pseudo stop such as a pile-up effect in the "ready-to-win display") is synchronized with the fixed timing of the variable effect. It may be configured as

<Modification 18>
In the above-described embodiment, the "slump effect" and the acquired variable effect are synchronized only by the stop display of the left symbol column Z1 of "Gase pseudo-ren 2" in the "slump effect" and the confirmation timing of the variable effect. Relatedly, the content of the variable production was not suggested in the “slump production” until the final stop pattern appeared. On the other hand, when the left symbol row Z1 of the "guise pseudo-run 2" in the "slump effect" is stopped and displayed, a result suggestive display suggesting the result of the variable effect or the like may be performed. Specifically, when the result of the variable effect is “reach display” or “big hit display”, when the left symbol row Z1 of “Gase pseudo-ren 2” stops, the symbol is a unique stop action (for example, bounce stop etc.).

<Modification 19>
In the above-described embodiment, the first pattern display device 37 performs dynamic display of the first pattern, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the dynamic display performed by the first pattern display device 37 in a decorative effect. It was configured to execute a three-symbol variation effect or a "slump effect". On the other hand, a fourth pattern different from the first pattern display device 37 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and by synchronizing the fourth pattern with the dynamic display and the variation of the variable performance, the first pattern display device 37 may be configured to have the same function. By configuring in this way, a series of pattern effects can be performed by only one display device (the third pattern display device 81), and the number of parts can be reduced. In addition, since this fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the variation of the variable display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the player can For example, even if the variation of the third symbol is temporarily stopped, blacked out, or frozen in the third symbol display device 81, by confirming the execution mode of the fourth symbol, the variation effect (dynamic display ) is being executed. Also, even during the execution of the "slump effect", by synchronizing the variation of the fourth symbol with the dynamic display, it is possible to check the fourth symbol even during the execution of the "slump effect". , it is possible to recognize the start and end of the dynamic display. Furthermore, by displaying the number of pending balls in the third pattern as the fourth pattern, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of pending balls in the variable effect obtained by the start winning.

<Modification 20>
In the above-described embodiment, based on the entry of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75, the reserved symbols, which are the dummy reserved display, are additionally displayed without omission. On the other hand, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be configured to additionally display a reserved symbol, which is a dummy reserved display. Concretely, for example, only when the ball is continuously being shot, a holding pattern, which is a dummy holding display, is displayed based on the entry of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75, or a predetermined advance notice effect is displayed. It may be constructed such that, when the execution lottery is won, a reserved pattern, which is a dummy reserved display, is displayed at the same time as the announcement effect appears. By constructing in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation mode such as the appearance pattern of the reserved symbol which is the dummy reserved display, and improve the amusement of the game.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released at the timing of "6 seconds" after the "first effect" of the "slump effect" is started. Then, the ball is made to enter the dummy prize winning opening 75, and a reserved symbol, which is a dummy reserved display, is displayed. On the other hand, the timing of making the dummy winning hole 75 win a prize may be delayed from the timing described above and set to the timing before the start of the “second effect” of the “slump effect”. If the reserved pattern which is the dummy reserved display is displayed early, the display of the reserved pattern causes the player to stop shooting the ball (so-called stopping shot), and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. There is a risk of Therefore, in the case of displaying a reserved pattern which is a dummy reserved display, it is displayed just before the second performance corresponding to the reserved pattern is executed, thereby preventing the player from stopping and operating the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加A decrease can be prevented.

<Modification 22>
In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, it shifts to the "slump state", and during the "slump state", based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a It was configured to execute a "slump effect". On the other hand, in a situation where a special condition different from the above condition is established, it shifts to a "slump state", and is configured to execute a "slump effect" based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. good too. Specifically, for example, it transitions to a "slump state" every time a predetermined time elapses from the start of the game, or when the game state is changed, it transitions to a "slump state" along with the change in the game state. It may be configured so as to shift to the "slump state" when winning a prize in the prize winning opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, due to the winning of the game ball to the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a, the lottery information of the first symbol (third symbol) which is one special symbol is acquired, Based on the lottery information, the first symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) is configured to display the lottery result of the first symbol (third symbol). On the other hand, the dynamic display (variable performance) of a plurality of special symbols is configured to be executable, the lottery information of the first special symbol is acquired due to the winning to the left special symbol winning opening 77a, and the right special symbol is obtained. The lottery information of the second special symbol different from the first special symbol may be acquired due to the winning to the winning opening 78a, and the lottery may be performed in each case. In addition, as a lottery method for a plurality of special symbols, a lottery method for preferentially executing the lottery for one of the special symbols (so-called priority fluctuation), and a lottery method for executing the lottery in the order of the acquired special symbols (so-called , winning order fluctuation), or a lottery method (so-called simultaneous fluctuation) in which the obtained special symbols are drawn simultaneously and in parallel.

<Modification 24>
In the above-described embodiment, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 during execution of the "slump effect", it is configured to additionally reset the "slump effect". was On the other hand, during the execution of the "slump effect", at the stage of receiving the reserved ball number command output at the time of new start winning from the main control device 110, it is configured to additionally reset the "slump effect". You may Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, at the stage of receiving the pending ball number command (that is, the prefetching process), the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending ball number command and stored in the pending information storage area 223i Based on, etc., control equivalent to S1418 to S1423 in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) is performed, and additional "slump effect" content is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reset the contents of the series of "slump effects" at the time when a new start winning (that is, winning 2) occurs during the "slump effect", and when the variation pattern command is received, It is possible to reduce the control burden in

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is set without considering the fixed display time of the variable effect (that is, setting the fixed display time of the variable effect to "0"). On the other hand, the fixed display time of the variable effect may be set to a predetermined time (for example, "1 second"), and the "slump effect" may be set based on the fixed display time. In this case, by considering the fixed display time in the execution of the variable production, it may be difficult to adjust the execution time and extension time of the production elements of the variable production and the execution time of the "slump production" production unit. By executing the "development availability performance" for adjusting the remaining time, it is possible to adjust the variation time and extension time of the variable performance including the fixed display time and the execution time of the performance unit of the "slump performance". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as interruption (freezing) of the content of the presentation during execution of the "slump presentation". Here, the fixed display time of the production unit in the "slump production" and the fixed display time in the normal variable production are set to be the same or similar (for example, within ±0.5 seconds where it is difficult for humans to perceive the difference). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the production unit of the "slump production" as execution of one variable production. In this case, a plurality of variations (for example, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, and 2 seconds as the fixed display time) may be provided for the fixed display time in the variable effect.

<Modification 26>
In the above-described embodiment, the extension time is added to the variation time of the acquired variation performance, and during the total time of the variation time and the extension time, the third symbol display device 81 performs "slump performance" instead of the variation performance. was configured to run On the other hand, an extension time is acquired for an effect that can be executed (for example, a big win effect, a variable display of normal symbols, a effect by a small win, etc.), and the above effect and It may be configured to execute different alternative effects. By configuring in this way, even in the variable display of normal symbols, the performance by the big win effect and the small win effect, it is possible to execute the effect for a time longer than the acquired execution time, and the third symbol display device 81 operates. It is possible to lengthen the period during which the typical performance is executed and improve the amusement of the game. In this case, a plurality of variations may be provided in the variable display time of the big win effect, the small win effect and the normal symbol.

<Modification 27>
In the above-described embodiment, the actual pending display and the dummy pending display are displayed by the execution symbols and the pending symbols, and the numbers of the actual pending displays and the dummy pending displays are suggested to the player by the number of symbols. On the other hand, the numbers may be used to indicate to the player the number of real pending displays and dummy pending displays. By configuring in this way, there is no need to secure a display area for displaying patterns for suggesting the number of real pending displays and dummy pending displays, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen composition in the third pattern display device 81 is eliminated. can be improved.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the "slump effect" is performed over a plurality of variable effects. On the other hand, a series of effects such as a "slump effect" may be performed across one variable effect and another effect. Specifically, for example, a series of effects may be performed across the variable effect and the jackpot effect, a series of effects may be performed across the variable effect and the demonstration effect, or the variable effect and the small win effect may be performed. A series of performances may be performed across performances. In this case, in the big win performance or the small win performance, a plurality of variations of the opening time are provided, respectively, and a series of performance times are changed according to the opening time, thereby providing variations in the series of performances and playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of

<Modification 29>
In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110 manages the driving timing of the holding device 73, releases the held ball held in the holding device 73 based on the control of the main control device 110, and wins the dummy winning hole 75. I was letting On the other hand, the driving timing of the holding device 73 is managed by the voice ramp control device 113, and the holding ball stored in the holding device 73 is released based on the control of the voice ramp control device 113. good. In this case, for example, an out ball is stored in the holding device 73 and is configured to enter a ball entrance other than the prize winning entrance from which prize balls are generated. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to produce an effect using the reserved balls by the sound lamp control device 113, which has fewer restrictions than the main control device 110, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the production and improving the interest of the game. can be planned.

<Modification 30>
In the above-described embodiment, as the drive timing of the holding device 73, when the start winning occurs in the "slump state", the balls that are stored in the holding device 73 at the timing after the elapse of a predetermined period (6 seconds after the start winning) is released to allow the dummy winning port 75 to win a prize. On the other hand, as the driving timing of the holding device 73, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released at the timing when the start winning is generated or the timing immediately after the occurrence, or the timing when a predetermined effect occurs (for example, the specified The ball stored in the storage device 73 may be released at the timing when an advance notice, "ready-to-reach display", etc. occurs.

<Modification 31>
In the above-described embodiment, the executable time of the "development possibility effect" is shorter than the execution time (i.e., 10 seconds) of the "pseudo-continuous" effect or the "gase pseudo-continuous" effect (longer than 0 seconds and shorter than 10 seconds) ). On the other hand, the executable time of the "development propriety effect" may be configured to be executable for a time equal to or longer than the "pseudo-continuous" effect or the "gase pseudo-continuous" effect. By configuring in this way, the "pseudo-ren" production or "gase pseudo-ren" production can be replaced with the "development propriety production", or the "development propriety production" can be replaced with the "pseudo-ren" production or "gase pseudo-ren" production. It is possible to replace (change) with . In addition, there are rules (constraints) based on the execution of the ``pseudo-ren'' effect and the ``gase pseudo-ren'' effect. Also, if the "pseudo-ren" production is performed three times or more, the rule that the production of "super reach" or higher will always be executed, and the "gase pseudo-ren" production will not be performed more than three times in a row. If there is a rule such as that, by replacing the ``pseudo-ren'' production or ``gase pseudo-ren'' production with the ``development propriety production'', execute a consistent production without violating the production rules. can be done.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the condition for generating the "slump state" is set to the case where a period of 10 seconds has elapsed in which the variable effect is not executed after entering the demonstration effect. On the other hand, the condition for entering the "slump state" may be such that it occurs immediately after entering the demonstration effect, or that it occurs under the condition that the frame button 22 is operated by the player. In this case, a "slump state" is created on the condition that the player is bored with the current production state such as volume change, light amount change, brightness variation, character selection, background selection, etc. of the pachinko machine 10 and operates the frame button 22. It is possible to execute a different performance than usual for the player who is tired of the performance state of (1), thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, in order to synchronize the driving of the holding device 73 by the main controller 110 and the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81 by the sound ramp controller 113, based on the command from the main controller 110 Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to execute the "slump effect". On the other hand, when an abnormality such as a command transmission error occurs, all the commands related to the "slump effect" cannot be correctly received from the main controller 110, and the command related to the "slump effect" is only fragmentarily received. The audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute control related to the “slump effect” even in a situation where no command is received (for example, only a slump command). In this case, for example, even if the dummy hold command is not received, display control related to the dummy hold display may be performed, or conversely, if the dummy hold command is not received, the hold display The content of the "slump effect" is adjusted and changed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, such as by replacing the "pseudo-continuous" effect that consumes one with the "development possibility effect" that does not consume the pending display. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any discrepancies in the content of the performance, to prevent the generation of the so-called rule-breaking performance due to the discrepancy in the content of the performance, and to prevent the players from misunderstanding.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, when the "slump effect" is performed, the final effect element in the "slump effect" is determined, and then the remaining effect elements are determined in order. On the other hand, the contents of the "slump effect" may be determined in descending order of importance of the effect elements.

<Modification 35>
In the above-described embodiment, the main pending display and the dummy pending display are each displayed as one separate pending display. On the other hand, the main reservation display is composed of the main display of one character pattern, the dummy reservation display is composed of the sub (auxiliary) display of the one character pattern, and the main reservation display and the dummy reservation display are composed of one character. You may display a pending|holding display so that a design may be formed. Also, a dummy pending display may be displayed by a decoration display related to the main pending display. The decoration display related to this reserved display is, for example, a pattern associated with one character pattern, a pattern attached to one character pattern, or a pattern that can recall one character. Any form may be used.

<Modification 36>
In the above embodiment, the dummy pending display is terminated in the "slump effect", so that the pending display is shifted at a timing different from the actual variable effect pending shift timing. On the other hand, the suspension display may be performed at a timing other than the "slump presentation" at a timing different from the actual suspension shift timing of the variable presentation.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, the audio lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third pattern (special pattern) that is held and executed with the entry of the ball into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (start winning) as a trigger Variation that becomes a big hit during the variation production or "slump production" A case has been described in which "reservation change notice" is performed in the execution symbols and the reservation symbols to determine whether or not there is an effect or "slump effect". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (start winning), there is a variable display of the second symbol that is held and executed (stops at the symbol "○"). Whether or not there is, using the second pattern reservation lamp 84, the third pattern display device 81, etc., is combined with whether or not there is a variation effect or "slump effect" that becomes a big hit during the variation effect of the third pattern, Or, alternatively, the player may be notified. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a winning variable display in the pending second pattern variable display or in the running and pending second pattern variable display. . Therefore, it can be estimated whether the second symbol will be a hit or not before executing the variable display of the second symbol. Among game machines, there is a game machine that enhances the playability depending on the presence or absence of winning of the second symbol, and it is particularly effective in such a game machine.

In the above-described embodiment, the demo effect is described as stopping display of the third symbol consisting of the main symbols with no numbers "0" to "9", but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has explained the case of executing the "suspended change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect. A fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and together with the variation effect or "slump effect" executed by the third pattern display device 81, the fourth pattern display device displays the fourth pattern display device. By displaying the pattern, unlike the "suspension change notice" or "suspension change notice", continuous notice effects that are executed across multiple fluctuation effects or "slump effects" (hereinafter, including "suspension change notice" (referred to as “continuous announcement effect”) may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a pachinko machine 10 is provided with a role different from each movable role that operates according to various effects, and by operating the role in a predetermined mode together with a variable production or a "slump production", a continuous advance notice can be obtained. You may perform a performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. By lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with a variable effect or a "slump effect", a continuous advance notice effect may be executed.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs a variable effect or a "slump effect" (dynamic display), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device. , the character works in a predetermined manner, the voice is output from the voice output device 226, or the illumination parts 29 to 33 light up or blink, thereby making the player feel the expectation of a big win. can have. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variation effect or the "slump effect" is performed, but the fourth pattern display different from the third pattern display device 81 is performed. A continuous announcement effect is performed by displaying a pattern by the device, activating a character, outputting sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting/flickering of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the player is different from usual. It is possible to easily recognize that the performance has been performed. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. By causing the main control device 110 to perform the winning judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect or "slump effect", When the pachinko machine 10 performs a continuous advance notice performance, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect A plurality of aspects may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the main control unit 110, when there is a prize (start winning) to the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a, the suspension to notify the voice lamp control device 113 the number of pending balls incremented by "1" A case has been described in which each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203b along with the start winning is included in the number-of-balls command and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 as it is. The types of counters included in may be some of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension. It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of the A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winning to the special prize winning openings 77a and 78a and the passage through the second ball opening 67 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, but the maximum number of suspended balls is 4 times. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, in a part of the third symbol display device 81, the number of holding balls of the variable effect or "slump effect" based on the winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is indicated by numbers or areas divided into four may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of held balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the light-emitting member holds It may be configured to notify the number of balls.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect or "slump effect" which is the variable display of the third pattern scrolls the pattern as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. However, it is also possible to move and display the pattern in the horizontal direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. In addition, the variable display of the symbols is not limited to the variable rendering of the symbols. Display is also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect or the "slump effect" is executed, the case where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot see them is explained. Instead of the high-speed fluctuation display, all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a snow noise-like manner in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. It may be displayed as an image.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays the identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, it is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol row after displaying a row of symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is equipped with a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.
<Group A: Executes dynamic effects longer than the set fluctuation time>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variable effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, the pattern is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While executing a pseudo effect (so-called “pseudo-continuous” effect) as if a specific display result appears again, there is a system that executes an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in the conventional game machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the presentation cannot be unexpected. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of favorably improving the interest of a game.

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Selection means (for example, selection means ( For example, a variation type counter CS1),
a dynamic display execution means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the execution time selected by the selection means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the execution time is longer than the execution time selected by the selection means in the display means. A gaming machine A0 characterized by comprising a specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") instead of time and the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and based on the execution time selected by the selection means, the dynamic display execution means performs dynamic display on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the execution determining means is configured to be able to determine whether or not dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means. When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the specific effect execution means causes the display means to display the execution time selected by the selection means. For a longer period of time, a specific effect is executed instead of the dynamic display. As a result, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the effect is not performed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the specific effect may be, for example, the same, substantially the same, or related effect as the dynamic display, the same, substantially the same, or related effect as the demonstration effect, or the same or substantially the same as the big win effect or the small win effect. Examples include effects that are the same or related, and effects that are completely different from or unrelated to the dynamic display.

In gaming machine A0,
The specific effect execution means is
Extension time selection means (eg, S1406 of variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extension time (eg, extension time) when executing the specific effect;
a total time execution means (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means; A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined extension time is selected by the extension time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means when executing the specific effect. Then, the specific performance is executed during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means by the total time execution means provided in the specific performance execution means. . As a result, the specific performance can be executed for the selected dynamic display execution time or longer, and by increasing the performance execution time in the display means, the situation where the performance is not performed in the display means can be reduced and the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, whether or not the specific identification information appears, or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "failure display", false chance pattern, etc.) is displayed. (For example, when all symbols are stopped such as "low speed fluctuation" effect element, "pseudo run" effect, "gase pseudo run" effect or "normal reach" effect element),
The specific effect execution means is
In the specific effect, a plurality of times execution means (for example, the first effect and the second effect in the "slump effect") for executing the determination effect in a number greater than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine A2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display or whether the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. A performance is performed. Then, in the specific effect, the number of judgment effects larger than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means is executed by the multiple times execution means provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, in the specific effect, a larger number of determination effects than the number of dynamic displays actually obtained are executed, and the player is given the illusion that many lottery opportunities are obtained, thereby improving the game. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In gaming machine A2,
The means for executing multiple times,
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect (for example, "gase pseudo-ren 1") including the judgment effect of 1;
a second effect execution means for executing again a second effect (for example, "gase pseudo-continuation 2") including the judgment effect of 1 after the first effect is performed by the first effect execution means; with
The first production execution means is
ending the first effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selecting means;
The second production execution means is
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the second effect is terminated when the total time of the execution time selected by the selection means and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect including one determination effect is executed by the first effect execution means provided in the multiple times execution means, and the first effect is executed by the second effect execution means provided in the multiple times execution means. After the first performance is performed by the execution means, the second performance including one determination performance is performed again. Here, the first effect execution means performs the first effect so as to end within the dynamic display execution time selected by the selection means, and the second effect execution means performs the execution time selected by the selection means. and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means, the second performance is completed. As a result, based on the satisfaction of one dynamic display execution condition, the first effect and the second effect each including the determination effect are executed in the specific effect, and the number of dynamic displays is larger than the number of actually acquired dynamic displays. You can perform a number judgment production. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player feel as if he/she has obtained many lottery opportunities.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the execution time selected by the selection means, a predetermined effect element (e.g., "high speed fluctuation" + "low speed change", "gase pseudo run" effect, "pseudo run" effect, or "normal reach" effect element) etc.) to select at least one effect element (for example, S1708 of the variable effect process (S1117)),
The means for executing multiple times,
A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, in the specific effect, a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selecting means is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one effect element is selected from the predetermined effect elements by the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means, based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, in the specific effect, the effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed by the multiple times execution means. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, and as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player think of it.

Note that "same or similar" refers to items with the same time and content, items with the same time but slightly different content (coloration, composition, size, etc.), items with the same content but slightly different time ( Several seconds) are examples, and if it is a production element with content and time that can be associated with the reference production element, it falls into the category of "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines A2 to A4,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means are
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, individual area varying means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The means for executing multiple times,
Timing synchronizing means (for example, "non-reach ( The game machine A5 is characterized by synchronizing the finalization timing of the effect mode and the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of the ``guess pseudo-run 2'').

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means is synchronized with the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific effect by the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple times execution means. be. As a result, the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display is associated with the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display can be recognized even during execution of the specific effect, There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine A5,
The timing synchronization means
In the second effect by the second effect execution means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol) in the display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect A game machine A6 characterized by synchronizing the stop timing of the row Z1) with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second effect by the second effect executing means, the timing of stopping the identification information in the display areas other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect is adjusted by the timing synchronization means to the execution time of the dynamic display. is synchronized with the end timing of As a result, the stop timing of the identification information of the display area that is stopped at times other than the end timing of the specific performance is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display is recognized even during execution of the specific performance. This has the effect of suggesting to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A6,
The specific effect execution means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific identification information does not appear, the execution means for executing the specific effect (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213)) is provided. Gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machines A0 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the determining means determines that the specific identification information is not to appear, the specific effect is executed by the executing means at the time of failure provided in the specific effect executing means. As a result, even if the game value is not given because the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed on the display means for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time, and the dynamic display is performed on the display means. By reducing the number of situations in which the performance is not performed, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from losing his/her excitement.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The extension time selection means is
A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising an extension non-acquisition means for not acquiring the extension time when the specific identification information appears (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213): Yes). .

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means is configured to make the extension time non-acquisition when the specific identification information appears. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the end of the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is awarded, and a notification according to the special game state is made. It must be made. Therefore, if the extended time is acquired even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, and the specific effect based on the extended time is executed, the specific effect is interrupted in the middle with the start of the special game state. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the contents of the presentation. Therefore, according to the game machine A8, in the case of dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the extension time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, even when the specific performance is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the specific performance can be synchronized, so that there is no discrepancy in the performance. , there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine A8,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, pre-stage selection means (e.g., , stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means is
A gaming machine A9 characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means, the extension time is not acquired.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. Further, when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means, the extended time is not acquired by the extension non-acquisition means. In the dynamic display including the previous-stage identification information, it is common to perform a determination effect as to whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information appears. A relatively long dynamic display execution time is chosen. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquiring means during the dynamic time. Therefore, even in such a case, there is little need to perform a specific effect that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time. Therefore, in the game machine A9, when the dynamic display execution time for displaying the preceding stage identification information is selected, the extended time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the performance time on the display means is not lengthened more than necessary, and the player is prevented from losing interest in the game.

<Group B: Converting the change effect of losing to a chance-up effect>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variable effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, the pattern is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. The expectation for a big win is amplified by performing a pseudo performance (so-called “pseudo-ream” performance) as if the player had been hit, and performing a special performance as if the judgment in the dynamic display had been performed multiple times. There is a thing (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027)).

However, in a conventional game machine, when a predetermined lottery draw is not won, even special effects such as the above-mentioned "pseudo-ream" effect are not executed, and the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, creating unexpectedness in the content of the effect. I didn't. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group B have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, a selection means (for example, a selection means ( For example, a variation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the production pattern selected by the selection means,
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
When the specific identification information appears, a predetermined event effect (for example, a “gase pseudo-ream” effect, a “pseudo-ream” effect, or a effect element including a “ready-to-win display”) is executed in the dynamic display. a possible event production execution means;
execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means does not show the specific identification information, the display means displays the dynamic display. A gaming machine B0 characterized by comprising specific effect execution means (for example, slump effect storage area 223h) for executing the event effect as a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") replacing target display.

According to the game machine B0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects an effect pattern for dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and based on the effect pattern selected by the selection means, the dynamic display execution means. performs dynamic display on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the specific identification information appears, the event effect execution means can execute a predetermined event effect in the dynamic display, and the execution determination means executes the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is set. Then, when the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means does not show the specific identification information, the specific effect execution means causes the display means to: An event effect is executed as a specific effect that replaces the dynamic display. As a result, for example, even if the specific identification information does not appear and the game value cannot be expected to be given, and even if the execution lottery for the event effect is omitted, it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed. When it is set, the event performance can be executed as the specific performance, the appearance of the event performance makes the player expect the appearance of the specific identification information, and the effect that the amusement of the game can be improved. There is

It should be noted that the "event effect" means, in addition to the effect unit that can be executed in the dynamic display such as the effect element including the "gase quasi-continuous" effect, the "quasi-continuous" effect, or the "reach display", for example, identification information and It may be an effect of presenting a different suggested pattern (notice pattern) or an effect of changing the background pattern displayed on the display means.

In gaming machine B0,
The event production execution means is
As the event production, a development suggesting pattern (for example, stopping the chance eye pattern) that suggests that the dynamic display is continuously executed will appear. '' performance or ``pseudo-ream'' performance).

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the event effect executing means executes, as the event effect, a development suggesting effect of whether or not a development suggesting pattern suggesting that the dynamic display is continuously executed appears. As a result, even when the specific identification information does not appear and the game value cannot be expected to be given, it is possible to execute the development suggestive effect as to whether or not the dynamic display is to be continued as the specific effect. The appearance of the suggestive effect makes the player expect the continuation of the dynamic display and the appearance of the specific identification information, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
The specific effect execution means is
A plurality of execution means for executing the event production at least twice as the specific effect (for example, "gase pseudo-run 1" and "gase pseudo-run 2" in "slump effect") is provided. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the event effect is executed twice or more as the specific effect by the multiple times execution means provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, by executing the event effects a plurality of times, the appearance of each event effect makes the player expect whether or not the specific identification information will appear, respectively, and the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In gaming machine B2,
A time selection means (for example, a fluctuation type counter CS1) that selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result of the determination means,
The multiple execution means is
Preceding execution means (for example, execution of "gase pseudo-continuation 1") for executing the preceding event effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means;
Post-execution means for executing the event production after the event production by the pre-execution means and beyond the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means 2” execution), and a game machine B3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the time selection means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the preceding event presentation is executed within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selecting means by the previous execution means provided in the multiple times execution means, and the post execution means provided in the multiple times execution means. Then, after the dynamic display execution time selected by the time selection means is exceeded, the subsequent event presentation is executed. As a result, even if the game value is not given because the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the event production is performed a plurality of times, and the production is continued on the display means for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time. By reducing the number of situations in which dynamic effects are not performed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In gaming machine B3,
The means for executing multiple times,
Extension time selection means (for example, S1406 of variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when executing the event effect later by the post-execution means;
Total time execution means (for example, slump A game machine B4 characterized by comprising an effect timer 223g).

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined extension time is acquired by the extension time selection means provided in the multiple times execution means when the later event production is executed by the post-execution means. Based on the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means, the total time execution means executes the event presentation a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to execute an event effect that is equal to or longer than the selected dynamic display execution time and the number of times of execution. It is possible to reduce the number of situations in which the event is not performed, and to increase the player's expectation for a big win by executing a plurality of event presentations, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In game machine B3 or B4,
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, a predetermined production element (for example, "high speed fluctuation" + "low speed fluctuation", "gase pseudo run" production, "pseudo run" production or "normal reach" production elements, etc.) to select at least one effect element (for example, S1708 of the variable effect process (S1117)),
The means for executing multiple times,
A gaming machine B5 characterized by executing a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selecting means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one effect element is selected from the predetermined effect elements by the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on the execution time selected by the time selection means. Then, the effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed by the multiple times execution means. As a result, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, and as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player think of it.

Note that "same or similar" refers to items with the same time and content, items with the same time but slightly different content (coloration, composition, size, etc.), items with the same content but slightly different time ( Several seconds) are examples, and if it is a production element with content and time that can be associated with the reference production element, it falls into the category of "same or similar".

In any one of game machines B3 to B5,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means are
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, individual area varying means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The means for executing multiple times,
Timing synchronization means (for example, " The game machine B6 is characterized in that it is provided with a timing for determining the non-reach (long) performance mode and a stop timing for the left symbol row Z1 of the ``gase pseudo-run 2'' in synchronization with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B3 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means and the stop timing of any of the identification information in the event presentation by the multiple times execution means are determined by the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple times execution means. are synchronized. As a result, the dynamic display and the event presentation by the multiple times execution means are related, and it is possible to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the event presentation by the multiple times execution means, There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event presentation by the multiple execution means and the dynamic display.

In gaming machine B6,
The timing synchronization means
In the subsequent event production by the post-production executing means, the stop timing of the identification information (for example, the left symbol row Z1) other than the identification information (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) to be stopped at the end of the event production is A game machine B7 characterized by synchronizing with the end timing of the execution time of dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing synchronizing means synchronizes the stop timing of the identification information other than the identification information to be stopped at the end of the event production in the subsequent event production by the post-production execution means with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display. . As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the event presentation by the multiple times executing means is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the dynamic display ends even during the execution of the event presentation by the multiple times executing means. It is possible to recognize the timing, and there is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event presentation by the multiple-time execution means and the dynamic display.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B7,
The specific effect execution means is
The game machine B8 is characterized by comprising an effect changing means for changing the effect pattern selected by the selecting means to the event effect.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect change means provided in the specific effect execution means changes the effect pattern selected by the selection means to the event effect. As a result, for example, even if it is a production pattern in which the event production is not executed at first, the event production can be executed, and the appearance of the event production makes the player expect the appearance of the specific identification information, and the game progresses. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

In any of gaming machines B4 to B8,
The extension time selection means is
A gaming machine B9 characterized by comprising an extension non-acquisition means for not acquiring the extension time when the specific identification information appears (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213): Yes). .

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machines B4 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means is configured to make the extension time non-acquisition when the specific identification information appears. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the end of the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is awarded, and a notification according to the special game state is made. It must be made. Therefore, even in the dynamic display where the specific identification information appears, if the extended time is acquired and the event production based on the extended time is executed, the event production will be interrupted in the middle with the start of the special game state. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the contents of the presentation. Therefore, according to the game machine B9, in the case of dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the extended time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, even when a specific effect is performed, it is possible to synchronize the end timing of the acquired dynamic time with the end timing of the event effect by the multiple-time execution means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect in which the player does not feel a sense of incongruity without causing discrepancies.

In gaming machine B9,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, pre-stage selection means (e.g., , stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means is
A game machine B10 characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means, the extension time is not acquired.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. The extension non-acquisition means is configured to make the extension time non-acquisition when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, since it is common to perform a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears, a relatively long dynamic display is performed in order to execute the determination effect. A run time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, there is little need to perform the event presentation by the multiple-time execution means for a time longer than the dynamic time acquired up to such a case. Therefore, in the game machine B10, when the dynamic display execution time for displaying the preceding stage identification information is selected, the extended time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the performance time on the display means is not lengthened more than necessary, and the player is prevented from losing interest in the game.

<Group C: Determining the effect content from the later effect elements in the obtained effect time>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means, dynamic display (variable display) of patterns and the like is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot game is executed when the display result indicates a jackpot.

In such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of dynamic display variation patterns are provided in advance. Then, one variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the winning timing of the ball into the start winning opening, and dynamic display based on the variation pattern is performed on the display means.

In this variation pattern, first, the main control means for performing the main control of the game selects the execution time of the dynamic display due to the entry of the ball into the start winning opening, and the control signal based on the execution time is selected. A notification is sent to the sub control means, and a detailed variation pattern is determined in the sub control means based on the execution time (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027)).

However, in the conventional game machine, the main control means must set a wide variety of games, and there is a demand for a way to reduce the control load on the main control means. There is room.

The C group of inventions has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and aims to provide a game machine capable of reducing the control load of the main control means.

Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that executes game control,
Sub-control means (for example, sound lamp control device 113) that executes game control based on the control signal from the main control means;
a display means (for example, a third pattern display device 81) whose display is controlled by the sub-control means;
The main control means is
Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
time selection means (for example, variation type counter CS1) for selecting the execution time of dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) performed by the display means based on the determination result by the determination means; ,
a notification means for notifying the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means (for example, external output processing of timer interrupt processing (S101));
The sub control means is
pattern selection means (for example, variation setting processing (S1213)) for selecting one effect pattern from among a plurality of effect patterns for executing at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notification means; ,
Dynamic display execution means (for example, variation effect processing (S1117)) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means,
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
The pattern selection means is
When the control signal is notified by the notification means, the second half side selection means (for example, in the "slump effect") selects first the effect element to be executed in the second half part of the dynamic display based on the control signal Stored in the slump effect storage area 223h from "Which reach"),
Residual selection means for selecting the remaining production elements based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the production time based on the production elements selected by the latter half selection means from the execution time (for example, "which one" in "slump production") After storing "deep reach" in the slump performance storage area 223h, "development suggestive performance" is stored in the slump performance storage area 223h).

According to the gaming machine C0, the main control means executes game control, the sub-control means executes game control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the sub-control means displays on the display means. controlled. Then, the obtaining means provided in the main control means obtains the lottery information when a predetermined starting condition is established, and the determining means also provided in the main control means obtains the lottery information based on the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means. judgment is made. Also, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means is selected by the time selection means provided in the main control means based on the determination result by the determination means. The notification means notifies the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, pattern selection means provided in the sub control means selects one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns for executing at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notification means. The dynamic display execution means provided in the sub control means executes dynamic display on the display means based on the performance pattern selected by the pattern selection means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the control signal is notified by the notification means, the latter half selection means provided in the pattern selection means first selects the effect element to be executed in the latter half of the dynamic display based on the control signal. . Then, the remaining performance elements are executed based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the performance time based on the performance element selected by the latter half side selection means from the execution time by the residual selection means provided in the pattern selection means. As a result, the main control means only needs to select the execution time of the dynamic display and notify the sub-control means of the execution time. To determine the contents of dynamic display by first selecting a performance pattern from the performance elements to be displayed, then determining the performance elements based on the remaining remaining time, and ensuring the consistency of a series of dynamic displays. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced by causing the sub control means to execute the main control of selecting the effect pattern of the dynamic display.

In gaming machine C0,
The production element is
A fixed time production element (for example, a “gase pseudo-ren” production, a “pseudo-ren” production, or a “Which reach reach” production element) composed of a predetermined fixed time (for example, “10 seconds”),
The execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means is
A gaming machine C1 characterized by including a time integral multiple of the performance time of the fixed performance.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a fixed-time effect element composed of a predetermined fixed time is included as the effect element, and an integral multiple of the fixed effect is included as the dynamic display execution time selected by the time selection means. As a result, when the sub-control means selects an effect pattern for dynamic display based on the notified execution time, when an execution time that is an integral multiple of the effect time of the fixed effect element is selected, the fixed time effect element is selected. can be combined to select an effect pattern for executing dynamic display, and an effect that is consistent with the execution time can be executed.

In gaming machine C1,
The production element is
Including static production elements that do not change over time or have little change (for example, production elements of "development possibility production", freeze production or blackout production),
The residual selection means is
The game machine C2 is characterized in that the static effect element is selectable.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rendering elements include static rendering elements that do not change or change little over time. Then, the static effect element is configured to be selectable by the residual selection means. As a result, for example, even if the remaining time is less than one fixed time effect element, by selecting the static effect element as the effect element of the remaining time, a fixed time effect with no or little change over time can be obtained. Even if the performance element is interrupted in the middle and the next performance element is executed, there is an effect that the performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable can be provided.

In addition, "no or little change over time" means, for example, a state where there is no change for a few seconds, or even if there is a change, the main content (for example, the entire background, the entire screen composition, Character design, etc.) does not change, and only auxiliary content (for example, a part of the background, a part of the screen composition, etc.) is changed.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
The sub control means is
execution determination means (for example, a sub-slump flag 223f) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
when the notification means notifies the control signal and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notification means; a specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") instead of the dynamic display in the display means for a time longer than the execution time of A game machine C3 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means provided in the sub-control means can determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the notification means notifies the control signal and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the specific effect execution means causes the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notification means. For a time longer than the display execution time, the display means executes the specific effect instead of the dynamic display. As a result, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the effect is not performed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C3,
The specific effect execution means is
Additional time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined additional time (for example, extended time) when executing the specific effect;
Total time executing means (for example, slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during the total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means and the execution time selected by the time selecting means. and a gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined additional time is selected when executing the specific effect by the additional time selecting means provided in the specific effect executing means. Then, the specific performance is executed during the total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means by the total time execution means provided in the specific performance execution means. . As a result, the specific performance can be executed for the selected dynamic display execution time or more, and by increasing the performance execution time in the display means, the situation in which the performance is not performed in the display means can be reduced and the game can be played. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of

In gaming machine C4,
The additional time selected by the additional time selection means is
A gaming machine C5 characterized by including a time integral multiple of the performance time of the fixed performance.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the additional time selected by the additional time selection means includes the integral multiple times of the fixed effect. Thereby, when the sub-control means selects a dynamic display effect pattern based on the total time of the notified execution time and the added additional time, the dynamic display is executed by combining the fixed time effect elements. It is possible to select an effect pattern to be executed, and to execute a specific effect consistent with the execution time.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C5,
The latter half side selection means is
a judgment effect selection means for selecting a judgment effect (for example, the effect element of "Which reach") for determining whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. prepared,
The residual selection means is
Judgment transition effect selection means for selecting a judgment transition effect (for example, a “pseudo-continuous” effect in which a chance symbol or a false chance symbol appears) for determining whether or not to transition to the determination effect;
a development selection means for selecting the judgment transition production or the development production of whether to shift to the judgment production (for example, a “pseudo change” production element in which a chance development pattern or a reach formation pattern appears) A game machine C6 characterized in that

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machines C0 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the judgment effect selection means provided in the second half selection means selects a judgment effect as to whether or not the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. In addition, the determination transition effect selection means provided in the residual selection means selects the determination transition effect whether or not to transition to the judgment effect, and the development selection means provided in the residual selection means also selects the judgment transition effect or judgment. A development performance is selected as to whether or not to shift to the performance. As a result, the sub control means first selects the effect pattern from the effect element to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the execution time, and then determines the effect element based on the remaining remaining time. , the content of the dynamic display can be determined while maintaining the consistency of a series of dynamic displays.

In gaming machine C6,
The time selection means is
The game machine C7 is characterized in that it is configured so that a long execution time can be easily selected when the specific identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the time selection means is configured to easily select a long execution time when the specific identification information appears. As a result, when the execution time of the selected dynamic display is a long execution time in which many effects are likely to be executed, the determination transition effect or the development effect with a high degree of expectation for the appearance of the specific identification information is executed. Since the degree of expectation for the appearance of the specific identification information changes due to the execution of the judgment transition effect and the development effect, there is an effect that interest is generated as to whether to shift to which effect or not, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In game machine C6 or C7,
The judgment transition effect and the development effect are
A game machine C8 characterized by executing the same or similar effect elements.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6 or C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the same or similar effect elements are executed in the determination transition effect and the development effect. As a result, it is difficult for the player to identify whether the determination transition effect is being performed or the development effect is being performed, and the dynamic display is performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display is performed. It is possible to make the player feel as if the display was performed, and make the player feel as if he/she has obtained many lottery opportunities, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Note that “same or similar” refers to items with the same time and content, items with the same time but slightly different content (color, composition, size, etc.), items with the same content but slightly different time ( Several seconds) are examples, and if it is a production element with content and time that can be associated with the reference production element, it falls into the category of "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines C3 to C8,
The specific effect execution means is
Time acquiring means (for example, variation setting processing) for acquiring new execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information when the acquiring means acquires the new lottery information during execution of the specific effect. (S1401) of (S1213);
Residual summing means for summing the execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed (for example, S1409 of the variation setting process (S1213));
A game characterized by comprising sum setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the specific effect again based on the sum time summed by the residual sum means. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during execution of the specific effect by the time acquisition means provided in the specific effect execution means, the execution time of the new dynamic display is determined based on the lottery information. The execution time acquired by the time acquiring means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed are added together by the residual summing means which is also provided in the specific effect executing means. Then, the specific effect is set by the sum setting means provided in the specific effect execution means, based on the total time summed by the residual summing means. As a result, even if the execution time of a new dynamic display is acquired during execution of a specific effect, by setting the contents of the specific effect anew, consistency between the specific effect being executed and the execution time can be achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to set the contents of the specific effect while taking the

In gaming machine C9,
The sum setting means is
The game machine C10 is characterized in that the latter half selection means first selects the performance element to be executed in the second half of the specific performance based on the total time.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the following effects are produced. That is, in the sum setting means, the effect element to be executed in the second half of the specific effect based on the total time is selected first by the second half selection means. As a result, even if the execution time of a new dynamic display is acquired during execution of the specific effect, the effect pattern is selected first from the effect element to be executed in the second half of the specific effect based on the total time. After that, it is possible to set the performance elements again based on the remaining remaining time, and it is possible to determine the content of the Dokutei performance while maintaining the consistency of a series of dynamic displays.

<D Group: Dummy Hold Display>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while dynamic display (variation effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, the pattern is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While executing a pseudo effect (so-called “pseudo-continuous” effect) as if a specific display result appears again, there is a system that executes an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in the conventional game machine, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect is monotonous, and the content of the effect cannot be unexpected. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group D have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) performed in first display means (for example, main display area Dm of third pattern display device 81) is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display execution means (e.g., audio lamp controller 113) to
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
storage means (for example, the reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying performance number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
a pseudo display means (for example, a pending pattern that is a dummy pending display) for displaying pseudo pseudo effect number information on the second display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, whether or not the specific identification information appears, or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "failure display", false chance pattern, etc.) is displayed. (For example, when all symbols are stopped such as "low speed fluctuation" effect element, "pseudo run" effect, "gase pseudo run" effect or "normal reach" effect element);
A total effect number executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h and a pending information storage area 223i) for executing the determination effect of a number corresponding to the total number of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information. A gaming machine D0 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the memory means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the second display means displays the effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the memory means. Is displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is established by the pseudo display means, pseudo pseudo effect number information is displayed on the second display means. Here, whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display is determined by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Judgment production is executed. Also, the total number of effects execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the number of determination effects corresponding to the total number of the number of effects information and the number of pseudo effects information. As a result, the pseudo production number information is displayed or erased so as to be linked with the judgment production in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and even if it is the pseudo production number information, the judgment production is executed. It is possible to create a realistic feeling as if the dynamic display of is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine D0,
The total production number execution means is
Additional effect selection means (for example, variable setting) for selecting an additional effect to be additionally executed (for example, "gase pseudo-run 2" in "slump effect") when displaying the pseudo effect number information by the pseudo display means Processing (S1413) of S1213),
The pseudo display means is
Before execution of the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, pre-execution display means for displaying the information on the number of pseudo effects (for example, before execution of "gase pseudo-run 2", a ball to the dummy winning opening 75 A game machine D1 characterized in that it is equipped with a holding pattern that is a dummy holding display when a ball is entered.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the additional effect selecting means provided in the total effect number executing means selects an additional effect to be additionally executed when the pseudo effect number information is displayed by the pseudo display means. Then, the pre-execution display means provided in the pseudo display means displays the pseudo effect number information before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selecting means. As a result, it is possible to display the pseudo effect number information before the additional effect that is additionally executed is executed, so for example, even though neither the pseudo effect number information nor the effect number information is displayed, the additional effect number information can be displayed. can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while providing a consistent presentation.

In gaming machine D0 or D1,
a launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means,
The pseudo display means is
A game machine D2 characterized by displaying the pseudo performance number information due to the entry of a game ball into second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, and the ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball entering means. Then, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information caused by the ball entering the first ball entry means. Here, the pseudo display means displays the pseudo performance number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to display the pseudo effect number information, which is the number of effects performed by the first display means, due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the performance number information is displayed by entering the ball into the first ball entering means. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and the pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine D2,
The second ball entering means
A gaming machine D3, characterized in that it is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entering means is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entering means. As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed down in the vicinity of the first ball entering means has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Even when the pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entry, the player can be given the illusion that the performance number information is displayed as if the ball was entered in the first ball entry means. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and the pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

Note that the "near the first ball-entering means" means, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball-entering means, or an area between the first ball-entering means when there are a plurality of first ball-entering means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In gaming machine D2 or D3,
Holding means (for example, holding device 73) that can change between a holding state for holding the game ball shot by the shooting means and a release state for releasing the held game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, with
The second ball entering means
A game machine D4 characterized in that the game ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where it can enter.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state in which the game ball shot by the shooting means is held and a released state in which the held game ball is released when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from is allowed to enter. As a result, it is possible to cause the game ball held by the holding means to enter the second ball entering means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and to display the pseudo performance number information. As a result, it becomes possible to immediately enter the reserved game ball into the second ball entering means, and while displaying the pseudo performance number information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the pseudo performance number information. Even when a pseudo production is performed based on the above, it is possible to create a sense of realism as if an actual dynamic display were being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In gaming machine D4,
The total production number execution means is
When the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means, a counting means (for example, a holding device drive timer 203g) for counting whether or not it is time to display the information on the number of pseudo effects corresponding to the additional effect. , and
The holding means is
Release means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for releasing the game balls held by the holding means when the timing for displaying the pseudo effect number information has come according to the counting result of the counting means. A gaming machine D5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means, the counting means provided in the total effect number executing means counts whether or not it is time to display the pseudo effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. be done. When the timing for displaying the pseudo performance number information is reached by the counting result of the counting means, the game balls held by the holding means are released by the releasing means provided in the holding means. This makes it possible to associate the timing of entering the game ball into the second ball entering means and the timing of displaying the pseudo effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and the pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if you were there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In gaming machine D5,
The total production number execution means is
Retention determination means (for example, a retention ball detection switch 73g) for determining whether or not a game ball is retained in the retention means;
According to the counting result of the counting means, when it is time to display the pseudo performance number information, and when it is determined that the game ball is not retained in the retention means by the retention determination means, the additional performance is performed, A game machine D6 characterized by comprising an effect changing means (for example, an effect conversion flag 223k) for changing the effect number information or the pseudo effect number information to a non-digest effect that does not digest.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is reserved in the reserve means by the reserve determination means provided in the total effect number execution means. Then, when it is time to display the pseudo effect number information according to the result of counting by the counting means, the game balls are reserved in the reservation means by the reservation determination means. When it is determined that there is no effect, the additional effect is changed to a non-execution effect in which the effect number information or the pseudo effect number information is not digested. As a result, when the game ball to be entered by the second ball entering means is not reserved in the holding means, the pseudo production number information is not displayed, and the number of effects executed by the first display means and the second Consistency with the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information displayed by the ball-entering means can be maintained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In gaming machine D6,
storage determination means (for example, pending display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether the lottery information stored in the storage means includes the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information;
Display change means (for example, pending change counter 223d) for changing the display mode of the number of effects information and the number of pseudo effects information based on the determination result by the storage determination means,
The production change means is
A change time changing means (for example, pending rank up command) for changing the display mode of the number of effects information by the display changing means when changing the additional effect to the non-digesting effect. game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage discriminating means discriminates whether or not the lottery information stored in the storage means includes a dynamic display for displaying the specific identification information, and the display changing means determines based on the discrimination result of the storage discriminating means. Then, the display mode of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-digested effect by the change time change means provided in the effect change means, the display mode of the effect number information is changed by the display change means. Thus, even when the additional performance is changed to the non-execution performance because the game ball is not reserved in the holding means, the player's expectation for the specific identification information is increased by changing the display mode of the performance number information. By amplifying , there is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of presentation and improve the interest of the game.

<Group E: Holding shift before the fluctuation time elapses>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while dynamic display (variation effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

The number of pending dynamic displays is displayed by a predetermined pending symbol, and when the dynamic display being executed is terminated, the pending symbol corresponding to the dynamic display that has not been executed is shifted (shifted) to display. It is By configuring in this way, the player is suggested to end the dynamic display being executed and to start a new dynamic display, and the remaining number of pending dynamic displays is suggested to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-340046)).

However, in the conventional game machine, the transition (shift) display of the reserved symbols is monotonous, and the contents of the presentation cannot be unexpected. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group E have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and their object is to provide a game machine capable of executing an unexpected presentation to suitably improve the interest of the game. .

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) performed in first display means (for example, main display area Dm of third pattern display device 81) is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display execution means (e.g., audio lamp controller 113) to
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying information on the number of effects corresponding to the number of effects executed by the first display means;
Based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquisition means, the first increase means for increasing (adding) and displaying the number of effects information (for example, the reserved design is added based on the winning to the left special figure winning opening 77a ) and
a first reducing means for reducing (erasing) the effect number information based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means (e.g., erasing the execution pattern based on the end of the variable effect);
A second increasing means for increasing and displaying the effect number information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means Display with additional patterns) and
A second reduction means for reducing the number of effects (for example, "gase pseudo-continuation 1 ), and a gaming machine E0 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E0, the lottery information is acquired when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determining means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the second display means is configured to be able to display the number-of-effects information corresponding to the number of effects executed by the first display means. Then, the first increasing means increases and displays the effect number information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the first decreasing means based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means, Performance number information is reduced. Further, the second increasing means increases and displays the effect number information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the second decreasing means causes the dynamic display executing means to The effect number information is decreased based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display. As a result, the increase and decrease of the effect number information can be performed under different conditions from the start or end of the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that variations can be provided for increasing display and decreasing of the number of effects information, and an unexpected effect can be provided to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E0,
a launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means,
The first condition is
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a game ball is entered into a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball entering means. Then, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Here, the entry of the game ball to the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means is the first condition. That is, based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the effect number information is increased and displayed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to provide variations in the increase display of the number of effects information, provide an unexpected effect, and improve the amusement of the game.

In gaming machine E0 or E1,
execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the first display means performs a specific effect (for example, a "slump" a plurality of times). a specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes each effect unit of "effect",
The second condition is
The game machine E2 is characterized in that it is the end of the specific effect of 1.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and when the acquisition means acquires lottery information, the dynamic display is performed by the execution determination means. When it is determined that the specific effect has not been executed, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect a plurality of times on the first display means. Here, the end of one specific effect is the second condition. That is, the effect number information is decreased based on the end of one specific effect different from the end of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing variations for the decrease in the number of effects information and providing an unexpected effect.

In gaming machine E2,
A time selection means (for example, a fluctuation type counter CS1) that selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result of the determination means,
The specific effect execution means is
A game machine E3, characterized by comprising a long-time execution means for executing the specific effect a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected by the time selection means based on the determination result by the determination means. A long-time execution means provided in the specific performance execution means executes the specific performance a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means. That is, the specific effect is executed a plurality of times longer than the acquired dynamic display execution time. As a result, by increasing the execution time of the effect on the first display means, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the effect is not performed on the first display means, thereby improving the amusement of the game. In addition, consistency is maintained between the execution of the performance on the first display means and the increase and decrease of the performance number information displayed on the second display means, and the performance without a sense of incongruity is provided to arouse the interest of the player. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent this.

In gaming machine E3,
The long-running means is
Extension time selection means (eg, S1406 of variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined extension time (eg, extension time) when executing the specific effect;
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. and a gaming machine E4 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific performance is to be executed, a predetermined extended time is selected by the extended time selecting means provided in the long running means, and the extended time is selected by the total time running means also provided in the long running means. During the total time of the extension time selected by the means and the execution time selected by the time selection means, the specific performance is executed. As a result, the specific effect can be executed for a period longer than the selected dynamic display execution time, and by increasing the execution time of the effect in the first display means, the situation where the effect is not performed in the display means can be reduced. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine E3 or E4,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a determination effect for whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, a ``low speed fluctuation'' effect, a ``pseudo continuation'' effect, a ``gase quasi continuation'' effect, or a ``normal reach'' effect element (When all symbols are stopped, etc.).
The specific effect execution means is
A gaming machine E5 comprising a determination execution means for each specific effect (for example, a first effect and a second effect in a "slump effect") for executing the determination effect for each specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3 or E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, a determination effect is executed for each specific effect by a determination execution means for each specific effect provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, for each specific effect, a larger number of determination effects than the number of dynamic displays actually obtained is executed, and the player is given the illusion that many lottery opportunities are obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of

In gaming machine E5,
The specific effect execution means is
A first effect execution means for executing a first effect (for example, “Gase pseudo-ren 1”) for performing the judgment effect of 1;
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect (for example, “gase pseudo-continuation 2”) for performing the judgment effect again after the first effect is performed by the first effect execution means;
The second reducing means is
Decrease the effect number information based on the end of the first effect by the first effect executing means, and decrease the effect number information based on the end of the second effect by the second effect executing means. A game machine E6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect executing means provided in the specific effect executing means executes the first effect for performing the determination effect of 1, and the second effect executing means also provided in the specific effect executing means executes the first effect. After the first performance by the means is performed, the second performance for judging performance is executed again. Here, the second reduction means reduces the number of effects information based on the end of the first effect by the first effect execution means, and the number of effects is reduced based on the end of the second effect by the second effect execution means. information is reduced. As a result, the consistency between the number of performances of the judgment performance on the first display means and the number of performance information displayed on the second display means is displayed while giving the player the illusion that he or she is getting many lottery opportunities. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by providing an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

In any of gaming machines E2 to E6,
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, a predetermined production element (for example, "high speed fluctuation" + "low speed fluctuation", "gase pseudo run" production, "pseudo run" production or "normal reach" production elements, etc.) to select at least one effect element (for example, S1708 of the variable effect process (S1117)),
The specific effect execution means is
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that, in the specific effect, a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selecting means is executed.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E2 to E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one effect element is selected from the predetermined effect elements by the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means based on the execution time selected by the time selection means. Then, the specific effect execution means executes the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means in the specific effect. As a result, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, and as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player think of it.

Note that "same or similar" refers to items with the same time and content, items with the same time but slightly different content (coloration, composition, size, etc.), items with the same content but slightly different time ( Several seconds) are examples, and if it is a production element with content and time that can be associated with the reference production element, it falls into the category of "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines E2 to E7,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means are
In each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means, individual area varying means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The specific effect execution means is
Timing synchronization means (for example, "non-reach (Long)" effect mode determination timing is synchronized with the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Ten 2").

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E2 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means and the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific effect are synchronized by the timing synchronization means provided in the specific effect execution means. be done. As a result, the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display is associated with the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display can be recognized even during execution of the specific effect, There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In gaming machine E8,
The timing synchronization means
In the second effect by the second effect execution means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol row Z1) in the display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect ) is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second effect by the second effect executing means, the timing of stopping the identification information in the display areas other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect is adjusted by the timing synchronization means to the execution time of the dynamic display. is synchronized with the end timing of As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the specific effect is associated with the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display even during execution of the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display. can be recognized, and there is an effect that the relevance between the specific effect and the dynamic display can be suggested to the player.

<Group F: Relation between slump effect and holding device>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while dynamic display (variation effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

Also, as a game machine of this kind, there is a pachinko machine provided with holding means for holding balls shot into a game area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held by the holding means, and when a predetermined condition is established (for example, the player presses a release button), the ball held by the holding means is released, and the ball moves downstream. It is configured to enter a ball into a provided ball entrance, and is configured to provide a player with a predetermined game value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-95235)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the entry of the ball released from the holding means into the ball entrance and the dynamic display based on the entry into the starting ball entry means are not related, and the game becomes monotonous. As a result, there was no unexpectedness in the content of the production. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group F has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game using a ball held by a holding means.

A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting game balls toward a game area;
A first ball entry means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
Acquisition means (e.g., special prize winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., jackpot random number counter C1) due to entry of game balls into the first ball entry means;
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, a selection means (for example, a , variation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means on the first display means,
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second ball entering means (for example, a dummy winning hole 75) different from the first ball entering means, into which the game ball fired by the launching means can enter;
Holding means (for example, a holding device 73) provided above the game area of the second ball entry means and capable of holding a game ball flowing down the game area;
Releasing means (for example, holding device solenoid 73f); and
When the game ball released by the release means enters the second ball entering means, a related display related to the dynamic display (for example, a reserved symbol as a dummy reserved display) is displayed. A game machine F0 characterized by comprising means (for example, a dummy reserved ball number counter 223c).

According to the gaming machine F0, the shooting means shoots the game ball toward the game area, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball entering means. Then, due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. will be Then, based on the determination result by the determining means, the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the first display means is selected by the selecting means, and the dynamic display selected by the selecting means is displayed by the dynamic display executing means. , is performed in the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered into the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the holding means provided above the game area of the second ball entering means Thus, the game ball flowing down the game area can be held. Then, the game ball retained by the retaining means is released by the releasing means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition regarding the dynamic display. Then, when the game ball released by the releasing means enters the second ball entering means, the related display related to the dynamic display is displayed by the related display means. As a result, the game ball held in the holding means is released based on the establishment of the first condition in the dynamic display, and the released game ball enters the second ball entering means, resulting in dynamic display. Relevant association display can be performed. Therefore, the production in the dynamic display and the production using the game balls held in the holding means can enrich the variations of the production, and improve the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In gaming machine F0,
The first condition is
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that a predetermined number of seconds have passed since execution of the dynamic display was started.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is that a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the execution of the dynamic display was started. That is, when a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the execution of the dynamic display was started, the game ball held in the holding means can be released and entered into the second ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. Therefore, the production in the dynamic display and the production using the game balls held in the holding means can enrich the variation of the production, and improve the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
storage means (for example, the reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the dynamic display effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means;
The related manifestation means is
The game machine F2 is characterized by comprising means for increasing the number of effects and displaying the number of effects as the related display (for example, adding reserved symbols as dummy reserved display).

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the dynamic display effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means is stored in the second It is configured to be able to be displayed on the display means. Here, the effect number information is increased and displayed as the related display by the effect number information increasing means provided in the related display means. That is, when the game ball held by the holding means enters the second ball entering means, the effect number information, which is the number of effects of dynamic display, is increased and displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the number of dynamic display effects was increased based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. Therefore, by displaying more information on the number of effects than the number of effects of the dynamic display actually acquired, the player is given the illusion that he or she can obtain many lottery opportunities, thereby enhancing the interest in the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F2,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears ” performance, ``gase quasi-ream'' performance or ``normal reach'' performance element (when all symbols are stopped)),
The related manifestation means is
When the effect number information is increased and displayed by the effect number information increasing means, the determination effect increasing means for increasing the number of executions of the determination effect by one A gaming machine F3 characterized by comprising a "gase pseudo-ren 2").

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, or whether the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. A performance is performed. Then, when the performance number information is increased by the performance number information increasing means and displayed by the determination performance increasing means provided in the related appearance means, the execution count of the determination performance is increased by one. As a result, the determination performance in the dynamic display is increased based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means, and the number of determination performances larger than the number of determination performances in the dynamic display actually acquired is executed, By giving the player the illusion that he or she can obtain many lottery opportunities, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F3, the related appearance means
When the number of executions of the judgment effect is increased by the judgment effect increasing means, when the number of effects is reduced by 1 at the end of the judgment effect (for example, executed at the end of "guess pseudo-run 1") A game machine F4 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of executions of the judgment performance is increased by the judgment performance increasing means, the number of performance information is decreased by one at the end of the judgment performance by the increase time decreasing means provided in the related appearance means. As a result, when the judgment performance is increased, the performance number information is increased by one with the increase in the judgment performance, and the performance number information is decreased by one with the end of the judgment performance, so that the actual judgment performance It is possible to create a sense of realism as if the number of images is increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In any of the game machines F0 to F4,
A first flow path (for example, a sorting ball entrance 72) that allows the game ball shot by the shooting means to flow down to the first ball entering means,
The holding means is
A game machine F5 provided in the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball shot by the shooting means flows down to the first ball entering means through the first flow path. A retaining means is provided in the first channel. As a result, it becomes possible to reserve the game ball that can enter the first ball entering means by the holding means, and when the game ball can flow into the first ball entering means, the game ball is first held by the holding means. can be put on hold. Therefore, when an effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means, the state in which the game ball is held in the holding means can be maintained. Therefore, the production in the dynamic display and the production using the game balls held in the holding means can enrich the variations of the production, and improve the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In the gaming machine F5,
The holding means is
A storage section that can store game balls (for example, a storage ball holding section 73b);
A guide portion (for example, a holding device opening/closing plate 73a) that guides game balls flowing down the first flow path to the storage portion when no game balls are stored in the storage portion,
The guide section
A game machine F6 characterized in that, when game balls are stored in the storage portion, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are caused to flow down to the first ball entering means side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is configured to be able to be stored by the storage portion provided in the storage means, and when the game ball is not stored in the storage portion, the guide portion similarly provided in the storage means causes the first flow path The game ball flowing down is guided to the storage part. Then, when game balls are stored in the storage part, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are caused to flow down to the first ball entering means side by the guide part. As a result, when no game balls are stored in the storage part, the game balls that can enter the first ball entering means can be retained by the retention means, while the game balls are stored in the storage part. If so, game balls that can enter the first ball entering means can flow down to the first ball entering means side. Therefore, when the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, the game ball can be put in a state of being held by the holding means first. Therefore, when an effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means, the game ball can always be held in the holding means. As a result, the production in the dynamic display and the production using the game balls held in the holding means can enrich the variation of the production, and the interest in the game using the game balls held in the holding means is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In the game machine F6,
The first flow path is
Having a passage wall (for example, a side wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the sorting ball entrance 72) that allows game balls to flow down,
The guide section
The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the leading end portion of the guiding portion is shaped to be in surface contact with the passage wall when the game ball is guided to the storing portion.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball flows down by the passage wall of the first flow path. Further, when the guide portion is in a state of guiding the game ball to the storage portion, the leading end portion of the guide portion is configured to be in surface contact with the passage wall. That is, the leading end portion of the guiding portion comes into surface contact with the passage wall, so that the game ball collides with the portion other than the upper surface portion of the leading end portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the guide portion by making it difficult for the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path to collide with the upper surface portion of the tip portion of the guide portion.

In any of the gaming machines F5 to F7,
The first ball entering means
Predetermined predetermined first ball entry means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a),
A plurality of specific first ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means (for example, right special figure winning opening 78a) are provided,
The first flow path is
Distributing means (e.g., distributing device 76) for alternately distributing game balls flowing down the first flow path to the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means,
The second ball entering means
A gaming machine F8 characterized by being arranged in an area between the predetermined first ball-entering means and the specific first ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F5 to F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the first ball-entering means, a predetermined predetermined first-ball-entering means and a plurality of specific second-ball-entering means different from the predetermined first ball-entering means are provided. By the means, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are alternately distributed to the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means. Then, the second ball-entering means is arranged in a region between the predetermined first ball-entering means and the specific second ball-entering means. As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether the game ball flowing down the first flow path has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second ball entering means. Even when the performance number information is displayed based on the above, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the performance number information was displayed as if the ball had entered the first ball entering means. As a result, even if the performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and the determination performance is performed based on the performance number information, it is possible to determine whether the actual determination performance is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to create such a sense of realism. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by executing an unexpected production.

In the game machine F8,
The holding means is
A game machine F9, characterized in that it is arranged on the upstream side of the sorting means in the game area.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is arranged upstream of the sorting means in the game area. As a result, it is possible to hold the game ball that can enter the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means by the holding means before being sorted by the sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball can enter either the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means, the game ball can be first held by the holding means in either case. Therefore, when performing an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means, the state in which the game ball is held in the holding means can be maintained. As a result, the production in the dynamic display and the production using the game balls held in the holding means can enrich the variation of the production, and the interest in the game using the game balls held in the holding means is improved. There is an effect that it is possible to achieve

In any of the game machines F0 to F4,
A second flow path (for example, an out port 66) for flowing down a game ball that has entered the first ball entering means,
The holding means is
A game machine F10 provided in the second flow path.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machines F0 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball entering the first ball entering means flows down through the second flow path, and the holding means is provided in the second flow path. When the game ball that can enter the first ball entering means is reserved, the player feels a sense of loss due to the fact that the lottery information that may appear the specific identification information is not acquired, and the game is played. There is a risk of losing interest in it. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F10, the game ball that enters the first ball entering means and is not used in subsequent games can be held by the holding means. Therefore, a game ball that is not used in a game is entered into the second ball entering means, instead of a game ball that can be entered into the first ball entering means or the like and is used in the game, and the performance and the holding means in the dynamic display are performed. By the performance using the reserved game balls, the variations of the performance can be enriched, and the interest of the game using the game balls reserved in the holding means can be improved without disturbing the players. , has the effect of

<G Group: Execution of production across multiple variable productions, change production time according to winning timing>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variable effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, the pattern is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. While executing a pseudo effect (so-called “pseudo-continuous” effect) as if a specific display result appears again, there is a system that executes an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in the conventional game machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the presentation cannot be unexpected. Therefore, there is a need to improve the interest in games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group G were made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Reference selection means for selecting a reference time for dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) performed by display means (for example, third pattern display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. (For example, variation type counter CS1) and
dynamic display execution means (e.g., sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a specific effect executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (for example, "gase pseudo-ream 2" of a "slump effect") performed over at least a portion of each of the plurality of dynamic displays; ,
When the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means, timing determination means (for example, fluctuation setting processing (S1213) for determining the acquisition timing of the lottery information ) of S1419) and
Special effect setting means (for example, , S1420 to S1422 of the variation setting process (S1213)).

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the reference selection means selects a reference time for dynamic display of the identification information performed on the display means, and the dynamic display is performed based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means. Dynamic display is performed on the display means by the execution means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect that is performed across at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, and during execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, new lottery information is obtained by the acquiring means. is acquired, the acquisition timing of the lottery information is determined by the timing determining means. Then, based on the determination result of the timing determination means, the special effect setting means sets the effect time of the predetermined special effect to be performed after the specific effect. As a result, according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific performance that is performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, the performance time of the subsequent special performance is varied. There is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G0,
The specific effect execution means is
addition time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined addition time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific effect;
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223g ) and
The timing determination means is
The game machine G1 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not it is timing for executing the specific effect based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when executing the specific effect, the predetermined additional time is selected by the additional time selecting means provided in the specific effect executing means. Then, the specific effect is executed during the total time of the addition time selected by the addition time selection means and the reference time selected by the reference time selection means by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means. be done. Here, the timing discriminating means discriminates whether or not it is the timing for executing the specific effect based on the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means. That is, when the part of the specific effect that is executed based on the reference time and the additional time is being executed based on the additional time, depending on whether or not the lottery information is acquired, the subsequent special effect The performance time of the performance is set. Therefore, since the performance time of the special performance can be set in consideration of the additional time, even when the specific performance based on the additional time is executed, the performance contents of the specific performance and the special performance are matched. There is an effect that the character can be maintained and an effect can be provided that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine G1,
The specific effect execution means is
Elapsed time counting means for counting the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the added time (for example, S1421 of the variation setting process (S1213)),
The special effect setting means is
When the timing determination means determines that the specific effect based on the additional time is being executed, the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the specific effect counted by the elapsed time counting means A game machine G2, characterized by comprising elapsed time setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the special effect based on the elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the elapsed time counting means provided in the specific effect executing means counts the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the added time. Then, when it is determined by the timing determining means that the specific effect based on the additional time is being executed by the elapsed time setting means provided in the special effect setting means, the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the elapsed time A special effect is set based on the elapsed time of the specific effect counted by the time counting means. That is, the effect time of the special effect changes based on the elapsed time of the specific effect. As a result, according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific performance that is performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, the performance time of the subsequent special performance is varied. There is an effect that it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The special effect setting means is
When the timing determining means determines that the timing at which the new lottery information is acquired by the acquiring means and that the specific performance based on the additional time is not being executed, the acquired additional time is subtracted. Above, based on the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the reference time based on the later lottery information, the addition and subtraction setting means (for example, S1420 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the special effect ), a gaming machine G3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the addition and subtraction setting means provided in the special effect setting means determines that the timing at which the acquisition means acquires the new lottery information is not during execution of the specific effect based on the addition time. In this case, the special effect is set based on the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the reference time based on the later lottery information after subtracting the acquired additional time. That is, if the specific effect based on the additional time is not executed, even if the additional time is subtracted from the subsequent special effect, there will be no discrepancy between the effect content and the effect time, and the effect time can be easily managed. Become. As a result, while achieving consistency in performance and simplification of management of performance settings, at least according to the acquisition timing of lottery information during execution of a specific performance that is performed across a part of each of a plurality of dynamic displays By providing variations in the performance time of the subsequent special performance, there is an effect that the variation of the performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, a determination effect for whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, a ``low speed fluctuation'' effect, a ``pseudo continuation'' effect, a ``gase quasi continuation'' effect, or a ``normal reach'' effect element (When all symbols are stopped, etc.).
The specific effect executing means and the special effect setting means are
A gaming machine G4 characterized by executing the determination effect in the specific effect and the special effect.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the determination effect is executed in the specific effect and the special effect by the specific effect executing means and the special effect setting means. As a result, the determination effect is executed even in the specific effect and the special effect, so that there is an effect that the variation of the effect can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4,
an execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
The specific effect execution means is
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the reference time selected by the reference selection means and the addition time The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed until the total time including the additional time selected by the selecting means elapses.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the acquisition means acquires the lottery information by the specific effect execution means and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not executed, the reference time selected by the reference selection means is added. The specific performance is executed until the total time including the additional time selected by the time selection means elapses. As a result, even after the selected reference time for dynamic display has passed, the specific effect can be executed until the additional time elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the situation in which the game is not played and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5,
The specific effect execution means is
When the determination means determines that the specific identification information does not appear, the addition time selection means selects the addition time, and execution means for executing a specific effect based on the addition time (for example, A gaming machine G6 characterized by comprising a variation setting process (S1405 of S1213).

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the specific identification information does not appear by the failure execution means provided in the specific effect execution means, the addition time is selected by the addition time selection means, and based on the addition time. A specific effect is executed. Thereby, even if the game value is not given because the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the specific performance is performed on the display means for a longer time than the acquired reference time, and the dynamic performance is performed on the display means. By reducing the number of situations in which the action is not performed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6,
The addition time selection means is
A game machine G7 characterized by comprising an addition non-acquisition means for not acquiring the addition time when the specific identification information appears (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213): Yes). .

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific identification information appears, the addition time is not acquired by the addition non-acquisition means provided in the addition time selection means. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the end of the dynamic display, a transition is made to a special game state (for example, a jackpot) in which a predetermined game value is awarded, and a notification according to the special game state is made. It must be made. Therefore, if the additional time is acquired even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, and the specific effect based on the additional time is executed, the specific effect will be terminated halfway along with the start of the special game state. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the content of the presentation. Therefore, according to the game machine G7, in the case of dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, the additional time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the end timing of the acquired dynamic time with the start timing of the special game state based on the specific identification information, so that there is no discrepancy in the performance and the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a production that does not feel

In gaming machine G7,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, pre-stage selection means (e.g., , stop pattern selection counter C3),
The addition non-acquisition means is
The game machine G8 is characterized in that when the preceding stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the preceding stage selection means, the additional time is not acquired.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. Then, the addition non-acquisition means is configured so that the addition time is not acquired when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, since it is common to perform a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears, a relatively long dynamic display is performed in order to execute the determination effect. A run time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquiring means during the dynamic time. Therefore, even in such a case, there is little need to perform a specific effect that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time. Therefore, in the gaming machine G8, when the dynamic display execution time for displaying the preceding stage identification information is selected, the additional time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that the performance time on the display means is not lengthened more than necessary, and the player is prevented from losing interest in the game.

<Group H: Configuration of holding device>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while dynamic display (variation effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

Also, as a game machine of this kind, there is a pachinko machine provided with holding means for holding balls shot into a game area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held by the holding means, and when a predetermined condition is established (for example, the player presses a release button), the ball held by the holding means is released, and the ball moves downstream. It is configured to enter a ball into a provided ball entrance, and is configured to provide a player with a predetermined game value (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-95235)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the purpose is to improve the interest by directly imparting the game value by allowing the game ball held in the holding means to enter the winning opening based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game value is given. Therefore, many game balls had to be reserved, and as a result, the installation area of the holding means in the game area became large, and the degree of freedom in designing the board surface of the game area was reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in design compared to conventional game machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group H have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and can improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine while improving the interest of the game by using the ball held by the holding means. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting game balls toward a game area;
A first ball entry means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter;
Acquisition means (e.g., special prize winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., jackpot random number counter C1) due to entry of game balls into the first ball entry means;
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means (e.g., variation type counter CS1);
dynamic display execution means (for example, sound lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means on the display means;
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second ball-entering means (for example, dummy winning hole 75) different from the first ball-entering means, which imparts a predetermined game value when the game ball launched by the launching means enters;
holding means (for example, a holding device 73) capable of holding a game ball flowing down a first flow path provided on the upper side of the game area of the second ball entry means;
with
The retaining means
A storage unit (for example, a holding ball holding unit 73b) that can store one game ball,
A guide part (for example, opening and closing of a holding device a plate 73a);
changing means (for example, rotating shaft portion 73c) for changing the guiding portion from the guiding state to a non-guiding state in which the game ball is not guided to the storing portion when the game ball is stored in the storing portion;
When game balls are stored in the storage portion, movable means (eg, holding portion lock portion 73e1) that can change between a storage state of storing game balls in the storage portion and a release state of releasing the storage state. and,
a drive means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for driving the movable means to the storage state and the release state;
release means (for example, a holding device drive flag 203f) for changing the movable means from the storage state to the release state by the drive means when a predetermined first condition is satisfied;
A second flow path (for example, a board surface return port 74) for causing the game ball released from the stored state by the releasing means to flow down to the second ball entering means side;
Predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect related to the dynamic display when the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path enters the second ball entering means (for example, a reserved symbol that is a dummy reserved display) display) and
re-guiding means (e.g. opening/closing plate push-out portion 73e2) for changing the guiding means to the guiding state when the movable means is changed from the released state to the storing state. Gaming machine H0 to play.

According to the gaming machine H0, the game ball is shot toward the game area by the shooting means, and the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball entering means. Lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means, and determination is made by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed by the display means is selected by the selection means based on the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Executed in means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the game ball fired by the shooting means enters the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means is configured to give a predetermined game value. A game ball flowing down a first flow path provided on the upper side of the game area is configured to be held by holding means. In addition, in the case of a guiding state in which one game ball can be stored by a storage portion provided in the storage means and is connected to the storage portion, and no game balls are stored in the storage portion, the guide portion , the game ball flowing down the first flow path is guided to the reservoir side. Then, when the game balls are stored in the storage portion, the movable means can change between a storage state in which the game balls are stored in the storage portion and a release state in which the storage state is released. Further, the driving means drives the movable means to the stored state and the released state, and when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, the releasing means changes the movable means from the stored state to the released state by the driving means. The game ball released from the stored state by the releasing means flows down to the second ball entering means side through the second flow path. Then, when the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path enters the second ball entering means, the predetermined effect executing means executes a predetermined effect related to the dynamic display. Further, when the movable means is changed from the released state to the stored state by the re-guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the guiding state. That is, when one game ball stored in the holding means enters the second ball entering means, a predetermined game value is imparted, a predetermined effect is executed in the dynamic display, and further, the holding means After the game balls stored in the storage part are released, the game balls can be guided to the storage part when the game balls can be stored again. As a result, the production using the game balls efficiently stored in the holding means can increase the variation of the production, and the interest in the game using the game balls stored in the holding means can be enhanced. , has the effect of In addition, since it is possible to impart interest to the player even without a configuration in which a large amount of game balls are stored in the holding means and a large amount of game value is provided, the holding means is installed while improving the interest by the holding means. There is an effect that the area can be reduced and the degree of freedom in designing the board surface in the game area can be increased.

<Group I: Main Reservation Display and Decorative Reservation Display>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a starting ball entry means while dynamic display (variation effect) of symbols and the like is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , the dynamic display of the incoming ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the amusement of the game, when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a big win appears, there are some that execute various effects (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2015-134027)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to improve the interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of favorably improving the enjoyment of a game.

Acquisition means (for example, left special figure winning opening 77a or right special figure winning opening 78a) for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition,
Determining means (for example, S401 of fluctuation start processing (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means;
Dynamic display of identification information (for example, third pattern variation effect) performed in first display means (for example, main display area Dm of third pattern display device 81) is executed based on the determination result by the determination means. a dynamic display execution means (e.g., audio lamp controller 113) to
In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
storage means (for example, the reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying basic effect number information (for example, a final reservation display) corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
Decoration (or auxiliary display, hereinafter the same) of the basic effect number information on the second display means Decoration (or auxiliary display, hereinafter the same) Decoration for displaying the effect number information (for example, dummy pending display) Display means (for example, a reserved pattern that is a dummy reserved display),
The dynamic display execution means
In the dynamic display, whether or not the specific identification information appears, or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "failure display", false chance pattern, etc.) is displayed. (For example, when all symbols are stopped such as "low speed fluctuation" effect element, "pseudo run" effect, "gase pseudo run" effect or "normal reach" effect element);
A game characterized by comprising an effect executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h and a pending information storage area 223i) for executing the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information. Machine I0.

According to the gaming machine I0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is established, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the basic effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means. Displayed by Then, the decoration display means displays decoration effect number information that decorates the basic effect number information on the second display means. Here, whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display is determined by the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Judgment production is executed. Further, the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decoration effect number information is executed by the effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means. As a result, the basic performance number information and the decoration performance number information are displayed or erased so as to be linked with the determination performance in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and the basic performance number information and the decoration performance number information correspond to each other. By executing the judgment effect, there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I0,
The production executing means is
Additional effect selection means (for example, variable setting) for selecting an additional effect to be additionally executed (for example, "gase pseudo-run 2" in "slump effect") when the decorative effect number information is displayed by the decoration display means Processing (S1413) of S1213),
The decoration display means is
Before execution of the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, pre-execution display means for displaying the information on the number of decoration effects (for example, before execution of "gase pseudo-run 2", a ball is inserted into the dummy winning opening 75 A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is provided with a holding symbol that is a dummy holding display when a ball is entered.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the additional effect selection means provided in the effect execution means selects the additional effect to be additionally executed when the decoration display means displays the decoration effect number information. Then, the decoration effect number information is displayed by the pre-execution display means provided in the decoration display means before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means. As a result, it is possible to display the decorative effect number information before the additional effect that is additionally executed is executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while providing a consistent presentation.

In gaming machine I0 or I1,
A launching means for launching game balls (eg, ball launching unit 112a);
A first ball entry means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a) into which the game ball shot by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
Acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means,
The pseudo display means is
A game machine I2 characterized by displaying the decoration effect number information due to the entry of a game ball into second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is shot by the shooting means, and the ball shot by the shooting means can enter the first ball entering means. Then, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information caused by the ball entering the first ball entry means. Here, the decoration display means displays the decoration performance number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to display the decoration performance number information related to the determination performance performed by the first display means due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, It is possible for the player to have an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed by entering the ball into the first ball entering means. As a result, while displaying the decoration performance number information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, even if the performance is performed based on the decoration performance number information, the player is provided with a performance that does not cause discomfort, There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I2,
The second ball entering means
A gaming machine I3 characterized by being arranged in the vicinity of the first ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entering means is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entering means. As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed down in the vicinity of the first ball entering means has entered the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. Even when the decoration performance number information is displayed based on the ball entry, the player can be given the illusion that the performance number information is displayed as if the ball was entered in the first ball entry means. As a result, even when the number of decoration performance information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and a pseudo performance is performed based on the information of the number of decoration performances, the performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable is provided. There is an effect that it is possible to provide and improve the interest of the game.

Note that the "near the first ball-entering means" means, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball-entering means, or an area between the first ball-entering means when there are a plurality of first ball-entering means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In gaming machine I2 or I3,
Holding means (for example, holding device 73) that can change between a holding state for holding the game ball shot by the shooting means and a release state for releasing the held game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, with
The second ball entering means
A game machine I4 characterized in that the game ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where it can enter.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state in which the game ball shot by the shooting means is held and a released state in which the held game ball is released when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from is allowed to enter. As a result, the game ball held by the holding means can be entered into the second ball-entering means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and the decoration performance number information can be displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to immediately enter the reserved game ball into the second ball entering means, and while displaying the decoration effect number information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the decoration effect number information is displayed. Even in the case where the performance is performed based on the above, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to improve the interest in the game.

In gaming machine I4,
The production executing means is
When the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means, a counting means (for example, a holding device drive timer 203g) for counting whether or not it is time to display the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. , and
The holding means is
releasing means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for releasing the game balls held by the holding means when the timing for displaying the decoration effect number information has come according to the counting result of the counting means; A gaming machine I5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an additional effect is selected by the additional effect selecting means, the counting means provided in the effect executing means counts whether or not it is time to display the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. . Then, when the timing for displaying the number of decorative effects is reached by the release means provided in the holding means, the game balls held by the holding means are released. This makes it possible to associate the timing of entering the game ball into the second ball entering means and the timing of displaying the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. As a result, while displaying the decoration performance number information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, even if the performance is performed based on the decoration performance number information, the player is provided with a performance that does not cause discomfort, , there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I5,
The production executing means is
Retention determination means (for example, a retention ball detection switch 73g) for determining whether or not a game ball is retained in the retention means;
According to the counting result of the counting means, when it is time to display the decoration effect number information, and when it is determined by the reservation determination means that the game ball is not reserved in the reservation means, the additional effect is performed, A game machine I6 characterized by comprising an effect change means (for example, effect conversion flag 223k) for changing the basic effect number information or the decorative effect number information to a non-digest effect that does not digest.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is reserved in the reservation means by the reservation determination means provided in the effect execution means. Then, when the timing for displaying the number of ornamental effects is reached according to the result of counting by the counting means, the game ball is not reserved in the reserve means by the reserve determination means. When it is determined, the additional effect is changed to a non-digestive effect in which the basic effect number information or the decoration effect number information is not digested. Thus, when the game ball to enter the second ball entering means is not reserved in the holding means, the number of decoration effects is not displayed, and the number of effects executed by the first display means and the second Consistency with basic performance number information and decoration performance number information displayed by the ball-entering means can be maintained. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not cause a sense of incongruity and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In gaming machine I6,
storage determination means (for example, pending display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether the lottery information stored in the storage means includes the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information;
a display change means (for example, a pending change counter 223d) for changing the display mode of the basic effect number information and/or the decorative effect number information based on the determination result by the storage determination means;
The production change means is
When changing the additional effect to the non-digestive effect, changing means (for example, pending rank-up command) for changing the display mode of the basic effect number information and/or the decorative effect number information by the display changing means A gaming machine I7 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage discriminating means discriminates whether or not the lottery information stored in the storage means includes a dynamic display for displaying the specific identification information, and the display changing means determines based on the discriminated result of the storage discriminating means. Then, the display mode of the basic effect number information and/or the decoration effect number information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-digested effect by means of changing means provided in the effect changing means, the display mode of the basic effect number information and/or the decorative effect number information is changed by the display changing means. . As a result, even when the additional effect is changed to the non-digestive effect because the game balls are not reserved in the reserve means, the display mode of the basic effect number information and/or the decoration effect number information is changed to allow the player to By increasing the expectation for the specific identification information, there is an effect that the variety of effects can be enriched and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the game machines A0 to A9, the game machines B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines B0 to B10, the game machines A0 to A9, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines C0 to C10, the above game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines D0 to D7, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

Further, for any one of the game machines E0 to E9, the above game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines F0 to F10, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines G0 to G8, the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited in any one may be applied.

Further, for the configuration of the game machine H0, any one of the game machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and I0 to I7 You may apply the structure limited by.

Further, for the configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I7, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0 You may apply the structure limited by.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characterized game machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A game machine Z2 characterized by. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, and I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion of Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

It should be noted that the "entry" into the "special figure winning openings 77a, 78a" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined start condition" in the claims, and the "counters C1 to C3 , CS1" corresponds to the "lottery information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, and the "third symbol" in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" in the claims. Correspondingly, the "variable effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "jackpot display" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the claims. Corresponds to the "specific identification information" described above, and the "jackpot" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
66 Out port (a part of the second flow path)
72 distribution inlet (a part of the first flow path)
73 holding device (part of holding means)
73a Holding device opening/closing plate (part of guide part)
73b Holding ball holding part (part of storage part)
73c Rotating shaft (part of changing means)
73e1 holding portion lock portion (part of movable means)
73e2 Opening/closing plate push-out part (part of re-guiding means)
73f retainer solenoid (part of release means, part of actuation means)
73g Hold ball detection switch (part of hold determination means)
74 Board surface return port (part of the second flow path)
75 Dummy Winning Port (Part of Second Ball Entering Means, Part of Second Increasing Means)
76 sorting device (part of sorting means)
77a Left side special figure winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of predetermined first ball entry means)
78a Right special figure winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of specific first ball entry means)
81 Third pattern display device (part of display means, part of first display means)
110 main control device (part of determination means, part of main control means)
112a ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Audio ramp controller (part of dynamic display execution means, part of sub-control means)
203c Reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203f Hold device drive flag (part of release means)
223d pending change counter (a part of memory discrimination means)
203e Main slump counter (a part of execution determination means)
203g holding device drive timer (part of counting means)
223c Dummy Retained Ball Counter (Part of Related Appearance Means)
223d pending change counter (part of display change means)
223f Subslump flag (a part of execution determination means)
223g Slump effect timer (part of total time execution means)
223h Slump effect storage area (part of specific effect execution means, part of second half selection means, part of remaining selection means, part of total effect number execution means, part of effect execution means)
223i Reservation information storage area (part of total effect number execution means, part of effect execution means)
223k effect conversion flag (part of effect change means)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of lottery information)
C3 stop pattern selection counter (part of the previous stage selection means)
CS1 Fluctuation type counter (part of selection means, part of time selection means, part of reference selection means)
Db cockpit display area (part of second display means, part of pseudo display means, part of decorative display means)
Dm main display area (a part of the first display means)
S101 External output processing (part of notification means)
S401 (part of determination means)
S1117 Fluctuation effect processing (part of dynamic display execution means)
S1208 Hold display setting process (part of memory determination means)
S1213 (part of pattern selection means)
S1401 (part of time acquisition means)
S1405 (a part of execution means when losing)
S1406 (part of time selection means, part of extension time selection means, part of addition time selection means)
S1409 (part of residual summing means)
S1411 (part of elapsed time setting means)
S1413 (part of total setting means, part of additional effect selection means, part of elapsed time setting means)
S1419 (part of timing determination means)
S1420 (part of special effect setting means, part of addition/subtraction setting means)
S1421 (part of special effect setting means, part of elapsed time counting means)
S1422 (part of special effect setting means)
S1708 (part of effect element selection means)
Z1 to Z3 left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row (part of individual area variation means)

Claims (1)

a launching means for launching a game ball;
a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means and different from the first ball-entering means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information at least by entering a ball into the first ball entry means;
determination means capable of determining based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic display executing means capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information performed on the first display means based on the determination result by the determination means;
In a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a second display means capable of displaying first effect number information corresponding to the number of said lottery information stored in said storage means;
a second effect number information display means capable of displaying second effect number information different from the first effect number information on the second display means by entering a ball into the second ball entering means;
The dynamic display execution means
By stopping all the identification information changed with the start of the dynamic display on the first display means, the specific identification information appears, or the predetermined game value is different from the specific identification information. is executed for the number of times corresponding to the total number of the first effect number information and the second effect number information. is possible and
The game machine is
execution time selection means capable of selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means;
After the execution time selected by the execution time selection means has passed, a post-elapsed change capable of changing the appearance of the non-specific identification information in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means comprising means and
The post-elapsed change means is
A first mode of changing the mode of the non-specific identification information appearing on the first display means and a second mode different from the first mode on the first display means are configured to be executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine is constructed so that the result of the dynamic display based on the ball entering the first ball entering means can influence the entering of the ball into the second ball entering means.

Images